Operating Instructions

Operating Instructions
Memory Card Camera-Recorder
Model No.
AJ-PX270
Before operating this product, please read the instructions carefully and save this manual for future use.
W0214HM0 -YI
ENGLISH
VQT5J83A(E)
Read this first!
Read this first!
indicates safety information.
CAUTION:
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK,
DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).
NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.
REFER TO SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol,
within an equilateral triangle, is intended to
alert the user to the presence of uninsulated
“dangerous voltage” within the product’s
enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude
to constitute a risk of electric shock to
persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral
triangle is intended to alert the user to
the presence of important operating and
maintenance (servicing) instructions in the
literature accompanying the appliance.
The mains plug of the power supply cord shall
remain readily operable.
The AC receptacle (mains socket outlet) shall be
installed near the equipment and shall be easily
accessible.
To completely disconnect this equipment from the
AC mains, disconnect the power cord plug from
the AC receptacle.
CAUTION:
Danger of explosion or fire if battery is incorrectly
replaced or mistreated.
• Do not disassemble the battery or dispose of it
in fire.
• Do not store in temperatures over 60°C (140°F).
• Do not expose the battery to excessive heat
such as sunshine, fire or the like.
For Battery Pack
WARNING:
• Use specified charger.
• Replace only with same or specified type.
• To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, do not
expose this equipment to rain or moisture.
• To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, keep
this equipment away from all liquids. Use and
store only in locations which are not exposed
to the risk of dripping or splashing liquids, and
do not place any liquid containers on top of the
equipment.
CAUTION:
In order to maintain adequate ventilation, do
not install or place this unit in a bookcase, builtin cabinet or any other confined space. To
prevent risk of electric shock or fire hazard due to
overheating, ensure that curtains and any other
materials do not obstruct the ventilation.
WARNING:
CAUTION:
Always keep memory cards (optional accessory)
or accessories (microphone holder screws) out of
the reach of babies and small children.
Do not lift the unit by its handle while the tripod is
attached. When the tripod is attached, its weight
will also affect the unit’s handle, possibly causing
the handle to break and hurting the user. To carry
the unit while the tripod is attached, take hold of
the tripod.
CAUTION:
To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock and
annoying interference, use the recommended
accessories only.
CAUTION:
Excessive sound pressure from earphones and
headphones can cause hearing loss.
CAUTION:
Do not jar, swing, or shake the unit by its handle
while the conversion lens or another accessory is
attached.
Due to the added weight of the conversion lens,
any strong jolt to the handle may damage the unit
or result in personal injury.
CAUTION:
Do not leave the unit in direct contact with the skin
for long periods of time when in use.
Low temperature burn injuries may be suffered if
the high temperature parts of this unit are in direct
contact with the skin for long periods of time.
When using the equipment for long periods of
time, make use of the tripod.
CAUTION (For USA and Canada):
To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of
plug to wide slot, fully insert.
– 2 –
Read this first!
indicates safety information.
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
Keep metal objects (such as necklaces and
hairpins) away from the battery.
Short-circuiting may occur across the terminals,
causing the battery to heat up, and you may
seriously burn yourself if you touch the battery in
this state.
A coin type battery is installed inside of the unit.
Do not store the unit in temperatures over 60 °C
(140 °F).
Do not leave the unit in an automobile exposed to
direct sunlight for a long period of time with doors
and windows closed.
CAUTION:
This apparatus can be operated at a voltage in the range of 100-240 V AC.
Voltages other than 120 V are not intended for U.S.A. and Canada.
Operation at a voltage other than 120 V AC may require the use of a different AC plug. Please contact either
a local or foreign Panasonic authorized service center for assistance in selecting an alternate AC plug.
FCC NOTICE (USA)
Declaration of Conformity
Model Number:
AJ-PX270
Trade Name:
Panasonic
Responsible Party:Panasonic Corporation of North America
Two Riverfront Plaza, Newark, NJ 07102
Support contact:
1-800-524-1448
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
To assure continued compliance, follow the attached installation instructions and do not make any
unauthorized modifications.
CAUTION:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant
to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference
to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which
can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
The user may find the booklet “Something About Interference”
available from FCC local regional offices helpful.
FCC Warning:
To assure continued FCC emission limit compliance, follow the attached installation instructions and the
user must use only shielded interface cables when connecting to host computer or peripheral devices.
Also, any unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment could void the user’s authority to
operate this device.
– 3 –
Read this first!
indicates safety information.
NOTIFICATION (Canada)
CAN ICES-3(B)/NMB-3(B)
The rating plate is on the underside of the Camera Recorder, Battery Charger and AC Adaptor.
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
1) Read these instructions.
2) Keep these instructions.
3) Heed all warnings.
4) Follow all instructions.
5) Do not use this apparatus near water.
6) Clean only with dry cloth.
7) Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
8)Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that
produce heat.
9) Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider
than the other. A grounding-type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are
provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the
obsolete outlet.
10)Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point
where they exit from the apparatus.
11)Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer.
12)Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus.
When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/ apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over.
13)Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time.
14)Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged
in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the
apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped.
For USA
A lithium ion/polymer battery that is recyclable powers the product you have purchased.
Please call 1-800-8-BATTERY for information on how to recycle this battery.
– 4 –
Read this first!
Brazil Only
Brasil Apenas
rr Manuseio de baterias usadas
BRASIL
Após o uso, as pilhas e /ou baterias poderão
ser entregues ao estabelecimento comercial
ou rede de assistência técnica autorizada.
Cobrir os terminais positivo (+) e negativo (-) com uma fita isolante adesiva, antes de depositar numa caixa
destinada para o recolhimento. O contato entre partes metálicas pode causar vazamentos, gerar calor, romper a
blindagem e produzir fogo.
Não desmonte, não remova o invólucro, nem amasse a bateria. O gás liberado pela bateria pode irritar a
garganta, danificar o lacre do invólucro ou o vazamento provocar calor, ruptura da blindagem e produzir fogo
devido ao curto circuito dos terminais. Não incinere nem aqueça as baterias, elas não podem ficar expostas a
temperaturas superiores a 100°C (212°F). O gás liberado pela bateria pode irritar a garganta, danificar o lacre
do invólucro ou o vazamento provocar calor, ruptura da blindagem e produzir fogo devido ao curto circuito dos
terminais provocado internamente.
Evite o contato com o liquido que vazar das baterias. Caso isto ocorra, lave bem a parte afetada com bastante
água. Caso haja irritação, consulte um médico.
To remove the battery
Para remover a bateria
Main Power Battery (Lithium ion Battery)
Bateria Principal de Energia
(Refer to page  for the detail.)
Press the battery release button.
Pressione o botão para liberar a bateria.
Battery release button
Botão de liberação da bateria
Back-up Battery (Lithium Battery)
• For the removal of the battery for disposal at the end of its service life, please consult your dealer.
– 5 –
Read this first!
rr Batteries that may be used with this product (Correct as of March 2014)
Panasonic VW-VBD58 batteries may be used with this product.
It has been found that counterfeit battery packs which look very similar to the genuine product are made
available to purchase in some markets. Some of these battery packs are not adequately protected with internal
protection to meet the requirements of appropriate safety standards. There is a possibility that these battery
packs may lead to fire or explosion. Please be advised that we are not liable for any accident or failure occurring
as a result of use of a counterfeit battery pack. To ensure that safe products are used we would recommend that
a genuine Panasonic battery pack is used.
Battery Charger / AC Adaptor
Disconnect the AC mains plug from the AC mains socket when not in use.
– 6 –

ffSDXC logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
ffHDMI, HDMI logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and/
or other countries.
ffMMC (Multi Media Card) is a registered trademark of Infineon Technologies AG.
ffMicrosoft® and Windows® are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
ffScreenshots are used according to Microsoft Corporation guidelines.
ffApple, Macintosh, Mac OS, QuickTime, iPad, and iPhone are trademarks or registered trademarks of Apple Inc. in the United States and/or other
countries.
ffJava and all Java-based trademarks are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the United States.
ffAll other names, company names, product names, etc., contained in this instruction manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective owners.
ffThis product is licensed under the AVC Patent Portfolio License. All other acts are not licensed except private use for personal and non-profit purposes
such as what are described below.
-- To record video in compliance with the AVC standard (AVC Video)
-- To play back AVC Video that was recorded by a consumer engaged in a personal and non-commercial activity
-- To play back AVC Video that was obtained from a video provider licensed to provide the video
Visit the MPEG LA, LLC website (http://www.mpegla.com/) for details.
ffUse of DCF Technologies under license from Multi-Format, Inc.
How to read this document
rr Illustrations
ffIllustrations of the camera, menu screens, and other items, may vary from the actual items.
rr Conventions used in this manual
ffWords and phrases in [ ] brackets indicate details and content displayed in the viewfinder or LCD monitor.
ffWords and phrases in < > brackets indicate design text used on this camera, such as button names.
rr Reference pages
ffReference pages in this document are indicated by (page 00).
rr Terminology
ffSD memory card, SDHC memory card, and SDXC memory card are referred to as “SD memory card”.
ffA memory card with the “P2” logo such as AJ‑P2E064AG memory card (optional) is referred to as a “P2 memory card”.
ffA memory card with the “microP2” logo such as AJ‑P2M032AG memory card (optional) is referred to as a “microP2 memory card”.
ffP2 memory card and microP2 memory card are referred to only as “P2 card” unless distinguished otherwise.
ffMedia such as external hard disk drives (HDD) connected to USB are referred to as “storage devices”.
ffVideo that is created during a single recording operation is referred to as a “clip”.
– 7 –
Contents
Contents
Read this first! 2
Adjusting image quality 55
Detail function 55
Skin tone function 55
RB gain control function 56
Before using the camera 11
Chroma setting function 56
Use of the camera on a system 13
Matrix function 56
Basic configuration devices 13
Color correction function 57
Expanded configuration devices 13
Black control function 57
Gamma function 57
What you can do with this camera 14
Knee function 57
Recording to the memory card 14
High color function 58
Linking to external devices 14
White clip function 58
Connecting to the network 15
Chapter 1
Overview
10
Chapter 2
Description of Parts
16
Setting the electronic shutter 59
Shutter mode 59
Adjusting with the <SEL/PUSH SET> dial button and <MODE/
Left side 17
MENU CANCEL> button 59
Right side 19
Flash band compensation (FBC) function 60
Front side, rear side 21
Setting the flash band compensation function 60
Top side 23
Variable frame rate (VFR) recording function 61
Chapter 3
Preparation
Native variable frame rate recording 61
Standard variable frame rate recording (pull-down recording) 61
25
Selecting audio input and adjusting recording levels 63
Power supply 26
Selecting audio input signals 63
Charging the battery 26
Using the built-in microphone 63
Attaching and removing the battery 27
Using the external microphone and audio device 63
Using the AC adaptor 27
Adjusting the recording level 64
Attaching and adjusting accessories 29
Displaying the audio level detailed 64
Adjusting the grip strap 29
Getting position information using the GPS 65
Attaching the shoulder strap 29
Special recording functions 66
Attaching the lens hood 29
Pre-recording 66
Attaching the eye cup 30
Interval recording 66
Attaching the front microphone 31
One-shot recording 67
Attaching a tripod 31
Loop recording 67
Turning on/off the power 32
One-clip recording 68
How to turn on the power 32
Simultaneous recording 69
How to turn off the power 32
Hot swap recording 69
Setting the date/time of the internal clock 33
Recording check function 70
P2 card 34
Shot mark recording function 70
Inserting a P2 card 34
Text memo recording function 70
Removing a P2 card 35
Convenient shooting functions 71
Preventing accidental erasure 35
Low angle shooting 71
P2 card access LEDs and status of P2 cards 35
Scan reverse shooting 71
P2 card recording time 36
Zebra patterns display 71
CPS (Content Protection System) 37
Displaying the center marker 71
How to handle data recorded on P2 cards 37
Displaying the safety zone marker 71
Assigning functions to the USER buttons 38
Displaying frame marker 72
Adjusting and setting the LCD monitor 40
Checking and displaying the shooting status 72
Using the LCD monitor 40
Changing image size 72
Adjusting the LCD monitor 40
Image stabilization function 72
Mirror shooting 40
Dynamic range stretcher function 72
Highlighting the outlines of images 40
Backlight compensation 72
Color bars 72
Adjusting and setting the viewfinder 41
Time stamp function 72
Using the viewfinder 41
Deleting last clip function 73
Adjusting the viewfinder 41
Waveform monitor function 73
Highlighting the outlines of images 41
Direct menu operation 73
Tally lamp 42
Chapter 4
Shooting
43
Multi formats 74
Selecting recording signals 74
System modes and recording functions 74
Basic procedures 44
List of recording settings and recording functions 76
Preparation 44
Selecting video output 77
Shooting 44
Recording/playback and output format list 78
Selecting the resolution, codec, and video format for recording 45
Dual codec recording 79
Adjustable settings when shooting 47
Dual codec recording setting 79
Iris 47
Recording the proxy data 79
Gain 47
Recording to the SD memory card 79
Super gain 47
Checking the proxy data 80
Brightness adjustment 47
Error displays about proxy data recordings 81
Macro 47
Handling setting data 83
Focusing (manual focus) 47
Setting data file configuration 83
Focus assist function 48
Handling SD memory cards 83
Area mode function 49
Performing operations on SD memory cards 84
Level gauge function 50
How to use user data 85
Adjusting the white and black balance 51
How to use scene file data 85
Adjusting the white balance 51
How to restore the scene file or menu setting status to the
Adjusting the black balance 52
factory settings 87
Using the zoom function 54
Saving to an SD memory card and loading saved data 87
Setting the <ZOOM> switch 54
Selection of external reference signal and generator lock
Adjusting the zoom position 54
setting 88
Zoom ring 54
– 8 –
Contents
Locking the video signal to the external reference signal 88
Connecting to a computer in the USB device mode 152
Connecting to external devices in USB host mode 152
Setting the time data 89
Recording of time codes and user bits 89
Chapter 9 Network Connection
161
User bits settings 92
How to input user bits 93
Network connection 162
Setting the time code 93
Available functions 162
Externally locking the time code 94
Operating environment 162
Supplying the time code externally 96
Preparing for connection 163
Connecting and setting the genlock and time code input/output 96
For wireless LAN 163
Setting and displaying the counter 97
For wired LAN 164
Chapter 5
Playback
98
Network settings 165
Wireless LAN settings 165
Basic procedures 99
Wired LAN settings 166
Preparation 99
P2 browser function settings and connection status check 168
Playback 99
FTP client function setting 168
Thumbnail operations 100
Using FTP client function 170
Thumbnail operation overview 100
FTP server folder list (FTP explorer screen) 170
Thumbnail screen 100
Deleting clips on the FTP server 171
Selecting thumbnails 102
Viewing information of clips on FTP server 171
Setting thumbnail screen display 102
Transferring from a P2 card to an FTP server (copy) 172
Changing thumbnails 103
Writing back from an FTP server to a P2 card (copy) 172
Shot mark 104
Transferring from an SD card to an FTP server (export) 172
Text memo 104
Writing back from an FTP server to an SD memory card
Deleting clips 105
(import) 173
Restoring clips 105
Reconnecting incomplete clips 106
Chapter 10 Maintenance and Inspection
174
Copying clips 106
Maintenance 175
Setting clip metadata 106
Charging the built-in battery 175
Formatting a P2 card 108
Formatting SD memory cards 109
Frequently asked questions 176
109
Properties Power supply 176
Battery 176
Shooting 176
Chapter 6 Menu Operations
114
Editing 176
Setting menu structure 115
Playback 176
Menu types and how to open them 115
Others 177
Main menu structure 115
Warning system 178
Setting menu display 116
Cases indicated by error codes 178
Setting menu basic operations 116
Cases indicated by error messages 178
Setting [USER MENU] 117
Updating the camera firmware 182
Setting menu initialization 117
Cleaning and storing 183
Menu list 119
Cleaning the camera recorder 183
[SCENE FILE] 119
Cautions when storing the camera recorder 183
[SYSTEM MODE] 124
[USER SW] 125
Chapter 11 Specification
184
[SW MODE] 126
[AUTO SW] 127
Specifications 185
[RECORDING SETUP] 128
Dimensions 185
[CLIP] 129
Specifications 185
[AUDIO SETUP] 131
Index 190
[OUTPUT SEL] 132
[NETWORK SETUP] 134
[DISPLAY SETUP] 135
[CARD FUNCTIONS] 138
[OTHER FUNCTIONS] 138
[MAINTENANCE] 138
[DIAGNOSTIC] 139
[USER MENU SEL] 139
[OPTION MENU] list 140
[AREA SELECT] 140
[AWB PRE CONTROL] 140
[CAM REMOTE ADJ.] 140
[ENG SECURITY] 140
Chapter 7
Display
141
Screen status display 142
Configuration of status display on screen 142
Selecting display items on screen 142
Displaying screen 142
Checking and displaying shooting status 146
Mode check display 147
Chapter 8
Connecting to External Devices
149
Connecting with headphones, remote control, or TV/
monitor 150
Headphones 150
Remote control 150
TV/monitor 150
Connection function via <USB2.0 DEVICE> or <USB3.0
HOST> terminal 152
– 9 –
Chapter 1
Overview
Before using the camera, read this chapter.
For accessories, refer to the leaflet supplied with the product.
Chapter 1 Overview — Before using the camera
Before using the camera
rr When using this product during rain or snow or when at the beach, be careful that water does not get inside the camera recorder.
Water causes damage to the camera recorder and memory card. (Repair may be impossible)
rr Keep the camera recorder away from devices (TVs, TV games, etc.) that produce magnetism.
ffIf you use the camera recorder on or near TVs, video and sound data may be distorted by electromagnetic waves.
ffStrong magnetic fields produced by speakers and large motors may cause damage to recorded contents and may distort images.
ffElectromagnetic waves emitted by microcomputers may have a harmful effect on the camera recorder and may corrupt video and sound data.
ffThe camera recorder may not operate properly if it receives harmful effects from devices that produce magnetism. If this happens, turn off the camera
recorder and either remove the battery or unplug the AC adaptor from the power outlet. Then, replace the battery or reconnect the AC adaptor. After
that, turn on the camera recorder.
rr Do not use the camera recorder near radio transmitters or high-voltage devices.
If you use the camera recorder near radio transmitters or high-voltage devices, the recorded video and sound data may suffer harmful effects.
rr When using the camera recorder at the beach, etc., be careful that sand and dust do not get inside the camera recorder.
Sand and dust may damage the camera recorder and memory card. (Be careful when inserting and removing the memory card)
rr Battery charger and battery
ffIf the <CHARGE> lamp continues blinking even when the battery is at its optimal temperature, the battery or battery charger may be damaged.
Contact a dealer.
ffIf the battery is warm, it will take longer than usual to charge.
ffIf you use the battery charger near a radio, the radio sound may be distorted. Keep the battery and battery charger at least 1 m away from radios
when in use.
ffNoise may be emitted when using the battery charger, but this is not a malfunction.
rr When carrying the camera recorder, be careful not to drop it.
ffStrong shocks will damage the camera recorder body and it may not operate properly.
ffIf you carry the camera recorder, use a grip strap or shoulder strap and handle it carefully.
rr Do not apply insecticide or volatile materials to the camera recorder.
ffIf insecticide or volatile materials come into contact with the camera recorder, the camera recorder body may warp and the paint may come off.
ffDo not allow the camera recorder to remain in contact with rubber or vinyl objects for a long period of time.
rr After using the camera recorder, either remove the battery or disconnect the AC cable from the power outlet.
rr Battery characteristics
The battery is a rechargeable lithium-ion battery. It produces electrical energy via an internal chemical reaction. This chemical reaction is easily
influenced by the surrounding temperature and humidity, so the effective usage time of the battery is reduced when the surrounding temperature is hot
or cold. When used in extremely low temperature environments, the effective usage time is approximately five minutes.
When the battery is in an extremely hot environment, its protective function will operate and the camera recorder cannot be used temporarily.
rr After using the camera recorder, be sure to remove the battery.
Be sure to remove the battery from the camera recorder. (If the battery is left in the camera recorder, it will continue to consume a small amount of
electric current even when the power is turned off)
If the battery is left inside the camera recorder for a long time, it will over discharge and may become unusable even if it is recharged.
Do not remove the battery when the power is turned on.
Turn off the power and remove the battery after the operation lamp goes completely out.
rr Take proper care of the battery terminal.
Do not allow dust or foreign objects on the battery terminal.
Also, if you drop the battery by mistake, make sure that the battery body and the terminal are not warped.
Inserting a deformed battery into the camera recorder or attaching it to the battery charger may cause damages on the camera recorder or battery
charger.
rr Cautions when throwing memory cards away or transferring them to others
Formatting memory cards or deleting data using the functions of the camera or a computer will merely change the file management information: it will
not completely erase the data on the cards. When throwing these cards away or transferring them to others, either physically destroy them or use a
data deletion program for computers (commercially available) to completely erase the data. Users are responsible for managing the data stored in their
memory cards.
rr LCD monitor and viewfinder
ffIf the same image or letters are allowed to be displayed on the LCD monitor for a long time, the image may be burned into the screen. It will return to
normal after leaving the camera recorder turned off for several hours.
ffCondensation sometimes forms on the LCD panel of the LCD monitor in locations subject to extreme temperature differences. If this happens, wipe
with a soft, dry cloth.
ffIf the camera recorder is very cold, the LCD monitor will be slightly darker than normal immediately after the power is turned on. The screen will return
to its regular brightness when the temperature inside increases.
– 11 –
Chapter 1 Overview — Before using the camera
ffSince the viewfinder of the camera uses organic EL, if the same image or letters are allowed to be displayed for a long time, the image may be burned
into the screen. There is no problem with the recorded images.
Switch the screen by turning off the screen or by using the eye sensor, etc.
ffThe LCD monitor and viewfinder (organic EL) are highly-precisely managed so that at least 99.99% of the dots are effective pixels and 0.01% or less
are invalid pixels and always lit. This is not a malfunction and it has no effect whatsoever on the recorded images.
rr Do not point the eye piece of the lens and viewfinder at the sun.
Doing so might damage the components inside.
rr Protective cap for the terminal
Place a protective cap on connection terminals not being used.
rr GPS
GPS (Global Position System) satellite is managed by the United States Department of State and its precision is sometimes intentionally changed.
Position it in a location where there is a good view of the sky and there is no influence of obstacles such as roofs and trees, etc.
Depending upon the surrounding environment and the time, it may take a long time to position and errors may be larger.
rr Caution regarding laser beams
The MOS sensor may be damaged if the MOS sensor is subjected to light from a laser beam.
Take sufficient care to prevent laser beams from striking the lens when shooting in an environment where laser devices are used.
rr Note the following points.
ffIf you prepare to record important images, always shoot some advance test footage to verify that both pictures and sound are being recorded
normally.
ffShould video or audio recording fail due to a malfunction of the camera or the P2 cards used, we will not assume liability for such failure.
ffSet up or check the calendar and time zone before recording. These settings have an effect on the management and playback order for (Setting the
date/time of the internal clock) recorded contents.
rr Copyrights
Copyright laws may prohibit use, except for personal pleasure, of the video and audio contents recorded with your camera recorder without permission
of the rights holder.
rr Software information about this product
1 This product includes software licensed under GNU General Public License (GPL) and GNU Lesser General Public License (LGPL), and
customers are hereby notified that they have rights to obtain, re-engineer, and redistribute the source code of these software.
2 This product includes software licensed under MIT-License.
3 This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/).
4 This product includes software licensed under OpenBSD License.
5 This product includes PHP, freely available from <http://www.php.net/>.
6 This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group.
For details on these descriptions (originally provided in English) and how to obtain the source code, visit the following website.
http://pro-av.panasonic.net/
We do not accept inquiries about the details of the source code obtained by the customer.
rr Precautions when installing USB drivers
For the latest information on the driver, visit the following website.
http://pro-av.panasonic.net/
ffInstall the required driver into your computer from the website.
ffFor installation procedure of the driver, refer to the installation manual on the website.
– 12 –
Chapter 1 Overview — Use of the camera on a system
Use of the camera on a system
Parts other than the camera are optionally available. Use the following recommended parts.
Basic configuration devices
Equipment necessary for shooting with the camera, such as batteries, etc.
Part name
Part No.
Remark
Super-directional electret stereo microphone
(phantom +48V)
AG‑MC200G
“Attaching the front microphone” (page 31)
Battery
VW‑VBD58 (7.2 V, 5800 mAh: Product comparable
to the included battery)
CGA‑D54/CGA‑D54s (7.2 V, 5400 mAh)
“Attaching and removing the battery” (page 27)
SD memory card*
P2 memory card*
microP2 memory card*
Visit the support desk at the website*
“P2 card” (page 34)
* For the latest information on P2 cards and SD memory cards that are not described in the Operating Instructions, visit the support desk at the following website:
http://pro-av.panasonic.net/
Expanded configuration devices
You can also use the following devices in addition to the basic configuration devices.
Part name
Wireless module
Part No.
AJ‑WM30
Remark
“For wireless LAN” (page 163)
– 13 –
Chapter 1 Overview — What you can do with this camera
What you can do with this camera
This camera is a P2 hand-held camera recorder with the following features.
ffThe camera has an optical 22x cam-type zoom and a newly-developed 1/3-type 2.2 million pixel 3MOS sensor with high sensitivity F11 (59.94 Hz)/F12
(50 Hz) and low noise.
ffIn addition to AVC‑Intra, as a recording codec, the camera also has a low-rate and full HD (1920×1080, 4:2:2, 10-bit) image quality AVC‑LongG 50/
AVC‑LongG 25, and AVC‑LongG 12 (4:2:0, 8-bit), which allow long-term recording.
ffIt is compatible with both microP2 memory cards and P2 memory cards.
ffIt supports progressive full frame rate shooting in 1080/60P and 1080/50P, output of 3G SDI/HDMI, and operations using AVC proxy video.
ffIn addition to metadata input and playlist editing* by using both wired and wireless LAN connections, you can send proxy files to the network server by
connecting 4G adaptor*.
* Schedule to support when future versions are upgraded
Recording to the memory card
P2 card
The following can be recorded on the P2 card:
ffHD/SD recording
ffAVC Ultra system codec support
ffSimultaneous recording (microP2 memory card only)
ffDual codec recording
ffVariable frame rate
Slow & quick motion recording
SD memory card
Settings for user files and scene files, etc. can be stored in and loaded from the SD memory card.
Linking to external devices
USB device mode
Data (files) for performing nonlinear editing on a computer are transferred.
P2 memory card, microP2 memory card*1
Personal computer
USB 2.0 (device mode)*2
*1 P2 memory cards and microP2 memory cards are optionally available. They are not supplied with the camera.
*2 The USB 2.0 cable is not supplied with the camera. Prepare a commercial USB 2.0 cable (double-shielded for noise suppression).
USB host mode (<USB3.0 HOST> terminal connection)
The camera directly controls the hard disk drive to transfer data.
USB 3.0*
External storage device
* A USB 3.0 cable is not supplied with this product. Use a commercially sold USB 3.0 cable (with double shielding for noise reduction).
– 14 –
Chapter 1 Overview — What you can do with this camera
Connecting to monitor
A monitor can be connected to output images.
Audio pin cable*1
HDMI cable*2
Monitor
BNC cable (composite/HD SDI/SD SDI)*3
*1 Cables are optionally available. They are not supplied with the camera.
*2 Use an HDMI cable (optional) with double shielding. For the HDMI cable, using Panasonic HDMI cable is recommended.
*3 For the BNC cable (optional) connected to the <SDI OUT> terminal, prepare a double-shielded cable equivalent to 5C‑FB.
Connecting to the network
Wired LAN connection
The following operations are available on your computer via LAN terminal:
ffCamera status check
ffThumbnail image check
ffProxy playback*
ffDownload of proxy file/clip management information
ffDisplaying/editing of metadata
ffAdding/deleting of metadata (shot mark or text memo)
ffCamera remote control (collective operations of recording control and time code/user bits)
In addition, clip transferring can be performed by the FTP client function via the LAN terminal.
* Contents which were recorded with AVC‑LongG 6 cannot be played back.
Connecting using wireless LAN connection and 4G adaptor*
Attaching the wireless module AJ‑WM30 (optional) to the <USB2.0 HOST> terminal (sub-host) of the camera allows you to connect the camera via
wireless LAN (IEEE 802.11).
The following operations are available using your tablet, smartphone, and computer.
ffCamera status check
ffThumbnail image check
ffProxy playback
ffDisplaying/editing of metadata
ffAdding/deleting of metadata (shot mark or text memo)
ffCamera remote control (collective operations of recording control and time code/user bits)
In addition, clip transferring can be performed by the FTP client function via wireless LAN (access point connection) or 4G adaptor*.
* Schedule to support when future versions are upgraded
– 15 –
Chapter 2
Description of Parts
This chapter describes the names, functions, and operations of parts on the camera.
Chapter 2 Description of Parts — Left side
Left side
24 25
28
20
21
22
29
30
23
26 27
31
1
15
2
3
4
5
7
6
9
8
11
10 12
13 14
16
17
18
19
1 Focus ring (page 47)
Focus manually when the <FOCUS> switch is set to <M>.
2 Zoom ring (page 54)
Adjust the zoom manually when the <ZOOM> switch is set to <MANUAL>.
3 Lens cover switching lever (page 30)
Open/close the lens cover.
4 Iris ring (page 47)
Adjust the lens iris manually when the manual iris is set with the <IRIS> button.
5 <ZOOM> switch (page 54)
Select the operation of the zoom.
<SERVO>: You can use the motor-driven zoom using the zoom lever.
<MANUAL>: You can operate the zoom ring manually to adjust the angle of view.
6 <DISP/MODE CHK> switch (page 72)
This is the spring switch to check the status of the shooting, etc.
ffPush this switch towards the <OFF> side to clear all displays except the display of the operation status, frame display such as an area, counter,
marker, and safety zone.
ffPush this switch towards the <CHK> side to display all information such as setting status of the functions for the shooting, the list of functions
assigned to the USER buttons on the LCD monitor during shooting stand-by or shooting. Each time the switch is pushed towards the <CHK> side,
the display of the status switches in turn.
7 <GAIN> switch (page 47)
Switch the brightness of the screen according to the lighting conditions under which you are shooting.
8 <F.AUDIO LEVEL> dial (page 64)
In the following conditions, the recording levels for the audio channels 1 to 4 can be adjusted.
ffWhen the <CH1>/<CH2> switch is set to <MANU>
ffWhen [AUTO LEVEL CH3]/[AUTO LEVEL CH4] is set to [OFF] in the main menu → [AUDIO SETUP] → [RECORDING CH SETTING]
Assignment of audio channels 1 to 4 can be performed in the main menu → [AUDIO SETUP] → [RECORDING CH SETTING] → [FRONT VR
SELECT].
9 <WHITE BAL> switch (page 51)
Select the method for adjustment of the white balance.
<PRST>: Set the white balance to the preset value. Each time the <AWB> button is pressed, [3200K], [5600K], and [VAR] are toggled.
<A>/<B>: Select when using the stored value of the adjustment of the white balance.
10 <MENU> button (page 116)
Press this button to display [USER MENU]. Press this button for 3 seconds or more to display the main menu. Press it again to return to the original
image.
11 <SEL/PUSH SET> dial button (page 116)
Move, select, and set the items in the setting menu while the setting menu is displayed.
Set the preset values of the shutter, synchro scan, variable frame rate value, and white balance.
12 <MODE/MENU CANCEL> button (page 59)
ffWhen the setting menu is not displayed, each press of the button switches modes to change the variable value of shutter speed, variable frame
rate, and white balance.
ffWhen the setting menu is displayed, setting of the menu items is canceled and the previous screen is displayed.
– 17 –
Chapter 2 Description of Parts — Left side
13 <AUTO/MANUAL> switch
Select the method to adjust the focus, gain, iris, white balance, and shutter speed at shooting. You can set the function to assign to <AUTO> in the
main menu → [AUTO SW].
<AUTO>: Adjust automatically. (Auto mode)
<MANUAL>: Adjust manually. (Manual mode)
14 <SLOT SEL> button
Select the microP2 memory card slot for the target of recording.
This button can be used as the USER button (USER7). (page 38)
15 Diopter adjustment lever (page 41)
Adjust the diopter scale so that the viewfinder screen can be viewed clearly.
16 <INPUT 1>/<INPUT 2> switch (page 63)
Switch audio input signals connected to the <AUDIO INPUT 1>/<AUDIO INPUT 2> terminal.
<LINE>: Select when audio equipment is connected by the line input.
<MIC>: Select when the external microphone is connected.
<+48V>: Select when the external microphone is connected and the microphone needs power supply.
17 <CH1 SELECT>/<CH2 SELECT> switch (page 63)
Select the audio to be recorded to audio channel 1/2.
<INT(L)>/<INT(R)>: Record left audio (right audio) of the built-in microphone.
<INPUT1>: Record input signals from the <AUDIO INPUT 1> terminal.
<INPUT2>: Record input signals from the <AUDIO INPUT 2> terminal.
18 <CH1>/<CH2> switch (page 64)
Select the method to adjust the input level of audio channel 1/2.
<AUTO>: Adjust automatically.
<MANU>: Adjust using the <AUDIO LEVEL CH1>/<AUDIO LEVEL CH2> dial.
19 <AUDIO LEVEL CH1>/<AUDIO LEVEL CH2> dial (page 64)
Adjust the recording level of audio channel 1/2.
20 Internal speaker
Output audio during playback.
When connecting the headphones to the headphones terminal, audio from the speaker turns off automatically.
21 HANDLE ZOOM switch (page 54)
Select the operation of the zoom lever (handle side).
<FIX>: Zoom in/out with the speed set in the main menu → [SW MODE] → [H.ZOOM SPEED].
<VAR>: Zoom speed changes depending on how strong the lever is pushed. (When pushed gently, the speed becomes slower, and when pushed
strongly, it becomes faster.)
<OFF>: The zoom lever does not work.
22 <ND FILTER> switch (page 47)
Select the filter to suit the illumination of the subject.
<1/64>: Reduce the amount of light entering the MOS sensor to 1/64.
<1/16>: Reduce the amount of light entering the MOS sensor to 1/16.
<1/4>: Reduce the amount of light entering the MOS sensor to 1/4.
<OFF>: Does not use the ND filter.
23 <IRIS> button (page 47)
Select the method for adjustment of the lens iris.
24 <FOCUS ASSIST> button (page 48)
Switch on/off the focus assist function.
This button can be used as the USER button (USER1). (page 38)
25 <MACRO> button (page 47)
Switch on/off the macro function of the focus.
This button can be used as the USER button (USER2). (page 38)
26 <FOCUS> switch (page 47)
Select the focus function.
<A>: Changes to the auto focus mode. Adjust the focus automatically.
<M>: Changes to the manual focus mode. Control the focus ring manually to adjust the focus.
<c>: Changes to the manual focus mode after the focus distance is set to infinity.
This is the spring switch. Even when the <FOCUS> switch is pushed towards the <c> side, the switch returns to the <M> position.
27 <PUSH AUTO> button (page 48)
When the button is pressed in manual focus mode, focus is adjusted automatically while it is pressed.
28 <OIS> button (page 72)
Switch on/off the image stabilization function.
This button can be used as the USER button (USER3). (page 38)
29 <ZEBRA> button (page 71)
Select the display of either zebra of marker.
This button can be used as the USER button (USER4). (page 38)
30 <WFM> button (page 73)
Select whether to display the waveform monitor on the LCD monitor.
This button can be used as the USER button (USER5). (page 38)
31 <A.IRIS.LEVEL> button
Switch on/off the auto iris function.
Set the target value of the auto iris level in the main menu → [SCENE FILE] → [A.IRIS LEVEL EFFECT].
This button can be used as the USER button (USER6). (page 38)
– 18 –
Chapter 2 Description of Parts — Right side
Right side
1
2
3
4
5 6
7
8
9
10
14
11
12
13
15
17
16
18
1 Eye cup (page 30)
2 Eye piece
3 Busy (active status indication) lamp (page 84)
Indicate the active status of the SD memory card, and is illuminated when the card is active.
4 SD memory card slot (page 84)
This is the insertion slot for the SD memory card (optional). Use the SD memory card for recording/opening the setting menu of the camera, or
uploading metadata or proxy recording, etc.
@@NOTE
tt Cautions when using SD memory cards
- On the camera, use SD memory cards that conform to the SD standard, SDHC standard, or the SDXC standard. When performing proxy
recording, use SDHC memory cards, SDXC memory cards, or SD memory cards with the class description of class2 or higher.
- MMC (Multi Media Card) cannot be used. (Bear in mind that taking pictures may no longer be possible if you use them.)
- When using miniSD/microSD cards with the camera, always install the adaptor specially designed for miniSD/microSD cards. (The camera will
not work properly if only the miniSD/microSD adaptor is installed. Make sure that the card has been inserted into the adaptor before use.)
- Use of Panasonic SD memory cards and miniSD/microSD cards is recommended. Be sure to format cards on the camera before use.
- Refer to our support desk at the following website for the latest information not included in these operating instructions.
http://pro-av.panasonic.net/
- SDHC memory cards are a standard that was established in 2006 by the SD Association for large-capacity memory cards that exceed 2 GB.
- SDXC memory cards are a standard that was established in 2009 by the SD Association for large-capacity memory cards that exceed 32 GB.
5 Recording button (grip side) (page 44)
Press this button to start recording. Press it again to stop recording.
Used for direct shooting in thumbnail mode.
6 Power switch (page 44)
Switch on/off the power.
7 Microphone cable clamp (page 31)
Used for securing the microphone cable.
8 Pin holder
Attach the zoom ring pin which is removed from the camera.
9 Headphones terminal (page 150)
This is the connecting terminal of headphones for audio monitor.
10 <AUDIO INPUT 2> terminal (XLR, 3-pin) (page 63)
Connect the audio equipment or the microphone.
11 <SDI OUT> terminal (page 96)
This is the output terminal for HD/SD SDI signals.
12 <TC IN/OUT> terminal (page 89)
This is the input/output terminal for time code.
Use the <IN/OUT> switch to select the input or output.
13 <GENLOCK IN/VIDEO OUT> terminal (page 94)
This is the input terminal for reference signals when setting the genlock to the camera section. This is the output terminal of the video for monitor.
Use the <IN/OUT> switch to switch the input or output.
14 <IN/OUT> switch (page 92)
Switch the input and output of the <TC IN/OUT> terminal and <GENLOCK IN/VIDEO OUT> terminal.
– 19 –
Chapter 2 Description of Parts — Right side
15 <CAM REMOTE> terminal (page 150)
Connect the remote control (optional) to control some functions remotely.
<FOCUS IRIS>: (3.5 mm mini jack) Control the focus operation and iris operation remotely.
<ZOOM S/S>: (2.5 mm mini jack) Control the zoom operation and start/stop operation of recording remotely.
16 Tripod holes
Attach the tripod. (bottom)
ffMounting hole size
-- 1/4‑20 UNC (screw length 5.5 mm or shorter)
-- 3/8‑16 UNC (screw length 5.5 mm or shorter)
17 <OPEN> button (page 163)
Use this button when opening the cover of the <USB2.0 HOST> terminal at the bottom of the button.
18 <USB2.0 HOST> terminal (sub-host) (page 163)
This is the terminal for the wireless LAN. Mount the wireless module AJ‑WM30 (optional).
– 20 –
Chapter 2 Description of Parts — Front side, rear side
Front side, rear side
12
13
14
15
16
1 2 3 1
6
7
17
8
18
19
20
21
22
23
4
9
5
10 11
1 Built-in microphone (page 63)
This is the built-in stereo microphone.
2 Light sensor
Detects indoor and outdoor light.
3 Front tally lamp (page 42)
Lights during shooting. This lamp will blink when the battery level becomes low.
4 Recording button (front side) (page 44)
Press this button to start recording. Press it again to stop recording.
The operation of this button can be forbidden by the main menu → [SW MODE] → [FRONT REC].
5 <AWB> button (page 51)
Press this button to adjust the white balance. Press it for two seconds or more to adjust the white balance and then black balance.
6 Eye sensor (page 41)
Bring your eyes closer to display the screen on the viewfinder.
@@NOTE
tt The eye sensor may not work properly depending on the shape of glasses in use, how you hold the camera, or by hitting the strong light around
the eye piece.
tt The eye sensor does not work during video playback.
7 Viewfinder (page 41)
8 <AUDIO INPUT 1> terminal (XLR, 3-pin) (page 31)
Connect the audio equipment or the microphone.
9 Rear tally lamp (page 42)
Light during shooting. This lamp will blink when the battery level becomes low.
10 Battery attachment (page 27)
11 Battery release button (page 27)
Remove the battery.
12 microP2 memory card 1 access LED (page 35)
Indicate the access status of recording and playback of the card inserted in the microP2 memory card slot 1.
13 microP2 memory card slot 1 (page 34)
14 microP2 memory card 2 access LED (page 35)
Indicate the access status of recording and playback of the card inserted in the microP2 memory card slot 2.
15 microP2 memory card slot 2 (page 34)
16 P2 memory card slot (page 34)
17 P2 memory card access LED (page 35)
Indicate the access status of recording and playback of the card inserted in the P2 memory card slot.
18 <AUDIO OUT> terminal (page 150)
Output audio signals recorded to audio channel 1/2.
19 <USB3.0 HOST> terminal (host) (page 152)
Connect external hard disk drive, etc.
20 <USB2.0 DEVICE> terminal (device) (page 152)
Connect to a computer with the USB 2.0 cable to transfer data.
21 <HDMI OUT> (monitor output) terminal (page 150)
This is the output terminal of the video for monitor.
– 21 –
Chapter 2 Description of Parts — Front side, rear side
22 <LAN> terminal (page 164)
Connect the LAN cable.
23 <DC IN 12V> terminal (page 27)
This is the input terminal for the external power supply. Connect the supplied AC adaptor.
– 22 –
Chapter 2 Description of Parts — Top side
Top side
1
2
3
6
4
8
6
5
9
10
13 14 15 16
7
22
11
12
23
24
17
19 21
18 20
1 Light shoe
Attach the video light.
2 Recording button (handle side) (page 44)
Press this button to start recording. Press it again to stop recording.
This includes hold mechanism.
3 Zoom lever (grip side) (page 54)
Adjust the zoom of an image.
<T>: Zoom in the image.
<W>: Zoom out the image.
4 <IRIS> button (page 47)
Select the method for adjustment of the lens iris.
This button can be used as the USER button (USER8). (page 38)
5 <REC CHECK> button (page 44)
Press this button while recording is suspended, to play back the video and audio of the most recent clip for approximately three seconds.
6 Shoulder strap attachment (page 29)
Attach the shoulder strap.
7 LCD monitor (page 40)
8 Zoom lever (handle side) (page 54)
Adjust the zoom of an image.
<T>: Zoom in the image.
<W>: Zoom out the image.
9 Focal plane index < >
Indicate the focal plane of the MOS sensor.
It provides a reference for measuring the accurate focal distance from the subject.
10 Handle mounting holes
Mount the handle.
ffMounting hole size
-- 1/4‑20 UNC (screw length 5.5 mm or shorter)
-- 3/8‑16 UNC (screw length 5.5 mm or shorter)
11 <COUNTER> button (page 93)
Switch the display item of the counter.
12 <RESET> button
Reset the display of the time counter.
13 <%> button
This works when the thumbnail screen is displayed.
Press this button during a pause to perform fast-reverse playback.
Press this button during playback to perform 4x speed reverse playback.
If it is pressed with playback paused, the clip being played back is paused at its start point (cued state).
– 23 –
Chapter 2 Description of Parts — Top side
14 <(> button
This works when the thumbnail screen is displayed.
Press this button to stop playback.
Press this button when you stop interval recording or one-shot recording, or when you end combining to the clip of one-clip recording.
15 <)> button
This works when the thumbnail screen is displayed.
Press this button during a pause to perform fast playback.
Press this button during playback to perform 4x speed playback.
If it is pressed with playback paused, the clip being played back is paused at the start point of the next clip (cued state).
16 <=/&> button
This works when the thumbnail screen is displayed.
Press this button to view playback image.
Press it during playback to pause playback.
17 <THUMBNAIL> button (page 100)
Press the button to display the thumbnail screen on the LCD monitor and viewfinder. Press it again to return to the regular display.
18 <EXIT>/<CANCEL> buttons (page 102)
Restore the display to the previous state while the setting menu or property screen is displayed.
Press this button while holding down the <SHIFT> button to act as the cancel button. This is convenient, for example, for batch-canceling clip
selections.
19 Control stick (page 102)
Use this button to select a thumbnail or to perform operations of menus and area mode function.
20 <MENU> button (page 116)
Press this button to display [USER MENU]. Press this button for 3 seconds or more to display the main menu.
Press it while the thumbnail is displayed to display the operation screen of the thumbnail menu, and clips can be deleted.
21 <SHIFT> button (page 102)
Use this button together with the control stick or other buttons.
ffPress the control stick upward/downward while holding down the <SHIFT> button.
This moves the cursor to the thumbnail of the clip at the start or the end on the thumbnail screen.
ffPress the control stick while holding down the <SHIFT> button.
This selects all clips from the previously selected clip up to the clip at the cursor position.
ffPress the <EXIT>/<CANCEL> buttons while holding down the <SHIFT> button.
This works as the cancelation function. (page 24)
Operations with the <SHIFT> button held down are displayed in orange at each operation section.
22 <AUDIO MON/ADV> button (page 99)
<+>: When pressing during playback, the audio volume of the monitor is increased. When pressing during pause, frame-by-frame play is performed.
<−>: When pressing during playback, the audio volume of the monitor is decreased. When pressing during pause, frame-by-frame rewind is
performed.
23 <BARS> button (page 72)
Switch on/off the color bar. The color bar is interlocked with the test tone (1 kHz).
24 <LCD BACKLIGHT> button (page 40)
Select the brightness of the backlight of the LCD monitor.
– 24 –
Chapter 3
Preparation
Before you use the camera, mount the battery following the procedures in this chapter. The mounting of accessories is also described in this chapter.
Chapter 3 Preparation — Power supply
Power supply
A battery or AC adaptor can be used as the power supply.
Charging the battery
The battery is not charged at the time of purchase. Fully charge the battery in the battery charger before using the battery.
It is recommended that you have one extra battery.
<POWER> lamp
To the power outlet
(2)
(1)
<CHARGE> lamp
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
1Place the battery horizontally along the
Fig. 3
mark in the battery charger and slide it in. (Fig. 1)
Press it in firmly.
2Connect an AC cable. (Fig. 2)
Connect in the order shown in the figure.
ff<POWER> lamp
- Once the AC cable is connected, the lamp will light up.
ff<CHARGE> lamp
- Lit: Charging.
- Not lit: Charging is complete.
- Flashing: Reinsert the battery.
3Slide the battery out to remove it. (Fig. 3)
rr Standard charging time and recording time
Battery parts number
Voltage/capacity
Charging time
VW‑VBD58 (supplied)
7.2 V/5800 mAh
Approx. 360 min
Continuous shootable time
Approx. 90 min
CGA‑D54/CGA‑D54s (optional)
7.2 V/5400 mAh
Approx. 330 min
Approx. 85 min
ffThe time when the ambient operating temperature is 20°C (68°F) and the relative operating humidity is 60%. At other temperature and humidity the
charging time may take longer.
@@NOTE
tt Continuous recordable time is applied under the following conditions. If you use the camera in other conditions, continuous shootable time will shorten.
- With the LCD monitor open
- When the main menu → [OUTPUT SEL] → [SDI OUT] is set to [OFF]
- When the main menu → [OUTPUT SEL] → [VIDEO OUT] is set to [OFF]
- With the cable not inserted into the <HDMI OUT> terminal
tt The battery and camera recorder will become warm during use or while charging.
tt Make sure that batteries are discharged before storing them.
tt When stored for long periods of time, it is recommended that you charge batteries once per year and then use up the battery capacity by using the
battery in the camera recorder before storing it again.
tt When the battery becomes extremely hot or cold, the <CHARGE> lamp will flash several times and charging will automatically begin.
tt When the battery is left unused and discharged for a long time, the <CHARGE> lamp will flash several times and charging will automatically begin.
tt If the <CHARGE> lamp continues blinking even when the battery is at its optimal temperature, the battery or battery charger may be damaged.
Contact a dealer.
tt If the battery is warm, it will take longer than usual to charge.
tt If you use the battery charger near a radio, the radio sound may be distorted. Keep the battery and battery charger at least 1 m away from radios
when in use.
tt Noise may be emitted from the battery charger when using the battery charger, but this does not indicate a malfunction.
rr Supplied battery
ffRemaining battery level display function
The approximate remaining battery level can be checked by looking at the LED display of the battery.
The displayed battery level may be different when the battery is attached to the camera and you are shooting and when the battery is not attached.
ffThe supplied battery is intended for use only in this camera.
Do not use it in other devices.
– 26 –
Chapter 3 Preparation — Power supply
Attaching and removing the battery
Attaching
1Insert the battery until you hear it clicks.
Removing
Lock release button
Power switch
Battery release button
1Turn the power switch to <OFF> while holding down the lock release button.
Make sure that the LCD monitor has gone off.
2Lift up and remove the battery while holding down the battery release button.
Support the battery with your hand so that it does not fall down.
Using the AC adaptor
Attaching
To the power outlet
(1)
<DC IN 12V> terminal
1Connect an AC cable.
Connect in the order shown in the figure.
– 27 –
(2)
Chapter 3 Preparation — Power supply
2Connect the AC adaptor to the <DC IN 12V> terminal.
Removing
1Turn the power switch to <OFF> while holding down the lock release button.
Make sure that the LCD monitor has gone off.
2Remove the AC adaptor from the <DC IN 12V> terminal.
@@NOTE
tt When not using the camera, remove the AC cable from the power outlet.
tt Use the supplied AC adaptor. Do not use other AC adaptors.
tt The AC adaptor can be connected when attaching the battery to the camera. When the AC adaptor is connected, the camera will switch to be powered
by the AC adaptor. When removing the AC adaptor, the camera will be powered by the battery.
– 28 –
Chapter 3 Preparation — Attaching and adjusting accessories
Attaching and adjusting accessories
Adjusting the grip strap
Adjust the grip strap so that it fits the size of your hand.
1Open the cover and adjust the length of the strap.
2Replace the cover.
Attach the cover firmly.
Attaching the shoulder strap
Attach the shoulder strap to the attachment lugs.
Longer than 20 mm
Longer than 20 mm
@@NOTE
tt Make sure that the shoulder strap is securely attached.
Attaching the lens hood
Removing
1Rotate the lens hood counter-clockwise.
– 29 –
Chapter 3 Preparation — Attaching and adjusting accessories
Attaching
Center of camera
The side with the index of the lens hood
1Align the index of the lens hood with the center of the camera body and attach.
Position the lens hood so that the side with the index of the lens hood is facing upwards.
2Rotate the lens hood clockwise until it locks in with a click.
Opening and closing the lens cover
Use the lens cover open/close lever to open and close the lens cover.
Open the lens cover to take videos and photographs.
When not using the camera, close the lens cover in order to protect the lens.
@@NOTE
tt Do not press the lens cover with force. Doing so may damage the lens and lens cover.
Attaching the eye cup
Groove
1Attach the eye cup by aligning the groove on the attaching part of the eye cup with the inner ridge of the eye cup.
– 30 –
Chapter 3 Preparation — Attaching and adjusting accessories
Attaching the front microphone
Microphones such as a super-directional microphone AG‑MC200G (optional) can be attached.
Screws for tapped hole protection are attached on the camera body. Remove those screws when you attach the microphone holder.
Screw for the microphone holder
Microphone cable clamp
Microphone holder
<AUDIO INPUT 1> terminal
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
Fig. 3
1Attach the microphone holder. (Fig. 1)
2Attach the microphone and tighten the microphone holder clamping screw. (Fig. 2)
3Connect the microphone connecting cable to the <AUDIO INPUT 1> terminal on the camera. (Fig. 3)
4Secure the microphone connecting cable with the microphone cable clamp.
5Set the <INPUT 1> switch to match the microphone to be connected.
@@NOTE
tt The microphone holder cannot be fixed with the screws originally attached on the camera. Use the dedicated screws that came with the camera to fix
the microphone holder.
Attaching a tripod
The tripod attachment holes accept 1/4‑20 UNC and 3/8‑16 UNC screws. Use the hole that matches the diameter of the clamping screw on the tripod.
@@NOTE
tt Use a tripod in safe locations.
tt The depth of the tripod attachment hole is 5.5 mm. When attaching the camera to a tripod, do not over-tighten the tripod screw.
– 31 –
Chapter 3 Preparation — Turning on/off the power
Turning on/off the power
Lock release button
Power switch
How to turn on the power
1Align the power switch to <ON> while holding down the lock release button.
The LCD monitor lights up.
How to turn off the power
1Align the power switch to <OFF> while holding down the lock release button.
The LCD monitor goes off.
– 32 –
Chapter 3 Preparation — Setting the date/time of the internal clock
Setting the date/time of the internal clock
The value of the time is recorded to content (clips) and affects the thumbnail playback order. Before recording, be sure to check and set the date and
time zone.
1Press the <MENU> button for 3 seconds or more.
ffThe main menu screen is displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD monitor.
2Select the main menu → [OTHER FUNCTIONS] → [CLOCK SETTING] to set the year, month, day, and time.
For details on the settings menu, refer to “Setting menu basic operations” (page 116).
3Select the main menu → [OTHER FUNCTIONS] → [TIME ZONE] to set the time difference from Greenwich Mean Time.
@@NOTE
tt You can correct the date and time of the internal clock from GPS by enabling the GPS function.
rr Time zone table
Time difference
Region
Time difference
00:00 Greenwich
Region
+01:00 Central Europe
−00:30
+01:30
−01:00 Azores
+02:00 Eastern Europe
−01:30
+02:30
−02:00 Mid-Atlantic
+03:00 Moscow
−02:30
+03:30 Tehran
−03:00 Buenos Aires
+04:00 Abu Dhabi
−03:30 Newfoundland
+04:30 Kabul
−04:00 Halifax
+05:00 Islamabad
−04:30
+05:30 Bombay
−05:00 New York
+06:00 Dakar
−05:30
+06:30 Yangon
−06:00 Chicago
+07:00 Bangkok
−06:30
+07:30
−07:00 Denver
+08:00 Beijing
−07:30
+08:30
−08:00 Los Angeles
+09:00 Tokyo
−08:30
+09:30 Darwin
−09:00 Alaska
+10:00 Guam
−09:30 Marquesas Islands
+10:30 Lord Howe Island
−10:00 Hawaii
+11:00 Solomon Islands
−10:30
+11:30 Norfolk Island
−11:00 Midway Islands
+12:00 New Zealand
−11:30
+12:45 Chatham Islands
−12:00 Kwajalein Atoll
+13:00
+00:30
@@NOTE
tt Be sure to make this setting before using the camera for the first time. After, do not change the setting during use.
tt Clock accuracy is a lunar inequality of approximately ±30 seconds with the power off. When accurate time is required, check and reset the time when
the power is turned on.
tt The built-in clock runs for several years on the built-in lithium cell of the camera. When the lithium cell runs low,
will be displayed in the viewfinder
and LCD monitor screen when the camera is turned on. For details, refer to “Maintenance” (page 175).
– 33 –
Chapter 3 Preparation — P2 card
P2 card
Inserting a P2 card
When using the camera for the first time, be sure to set the time data beforehand. (page 33)
Select and use either of the microP2 or P2 memory card slot on the camera.
microP2 memory card slot 1
microP2 memory card access LED
Eject button
P2 memory card slot
Card slot cover
microP2 memory card slot 2
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
P2 memory card access LED
Fig. 3
1Set whether to use the microP2 memory card slot or the P2 memory card slot.
1) Select [REC MEDIA] in the main menu → [RECORDING SETUP].
2) When using microP2 memory cards, select [microP2], and when using P2 memory cards, select [P2].
2Open the card slot cover. (Fig. 1)
3Insert a card into the card slot. (Fig. 2)
ffmicroP2 memory cards
- Insert with the label side facing left.
- There are two microP2 memory card slots.
ffP2 memory cards
- Insert the card with the logo facing left until the eject button pops out.
- Press the eject button that popped out to the upward.
4Make sure that the P2 card access LED is lit orange or green. (Fig. 3) (page 35)
When two microP2 memory cards are inserted in the card slots, recording will be performed in order from the microP2 memory card with the smaller
slot number. However, regardless of the slot number, if a microP2 memory card is inserted later, that microP2 memory card will be accessed later
than the previously inserted microP2 memory cards.
ffExample: When microP2 memory cards are inserted in two slots
If microP2 memory cards are inserted into two slots, the cards are used as P2 card in the order of the slot number 1 → 2. However, if you remove
the microP2 memory card from slot 1 and then insert it again, recording of the microP2 memory card will take place in order from slot 2 → 1.
The microP2 memory card number to be recorded to is maintained even if the camera is turned off. When the camera is next turned on, recording
can be continued to the same microP2 memory card as before the camera was turned off.
5Close the card slot cover.
@@NOTE
tt You can also switch the memory card to be recorded by pressing the USER button on which [REC MEDIA] is assigned.
tt Be sure to close the card slot cover in order to prevent dropping, dust, and static electricity.
tt Be sure to format P2 cards only on a P2 device.
tt The microP2 memory card with the P2 card adaptor (AJ‑P2AD1G) attached cannot be inserted into the P2 memory card slot on the camera.
tt If SDHC/SDXC memory cards other than microP2 memory cards are used on the microP2 memory card slot, operation is not guaranteed.
tt If a microP2 memory card is inserted slowly, [FORMAT ERROR!] or [NOT SUPPORTED!] may be displayed. In such a case, insert the card again.
– 34 –
Chapter 3 Preparation — P2 card
Removing a P2 card
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
1Open the card slot cover.
2Remove the card.
ffmicroP2 memory cards
- Press in the microP2 card further into the camera and let go.
- The microP2 memory card is released from the card slot, and the microP2 memory card can be removed.
ffP2 memory cards
- Lift the eject button (Fig. 1), and press in. (Fig. 2)
@@NOTE
tt After insertion, do not remove the P2 card while it is being accessed or recognized (the P2 card access LED is flashing orange). Doing so may result
in a malfunction.
tt If the P2 card is removed while being accessed, [TURN POWER OFF] is displayed on the LCD monitor screen or the viewfinder screen, and the tally
lamp or other warning is displayed. Also, all P2 card access LEDs flash rapidly in orange. Turn off the power. (page 178)
tt If the P2 card is removed while being accessed, clips on it may become irregular. Check the clips and restore them, if required. (page 105)
tt If the P2 card being formatted is removed, formatting of the P2 card is not guaranteed. In this case, [TURN POWER OFF] is displayed on the LCD
monitor screen or the viewfinder screen. Turn off the power and then back on again, and reformat the P2 card.
tt If a P2 card is inserted into another slot during playback, the inserted card is not recognized and the P2 card access LED does not light. The P2 card
starts to be recognized when playback ends.
tt Even if a P2 card is inserted in a vacant card slot during recording, the P2 card may not be recognized immediately in the following instance:
- Immediately after a pre-recording
- Immediately after a recording slot is switched
tt The P2 card access LED can be set to continuously off in the main menu → [OTHER FUNCTIONS] → [ACCESS LED]. In this case, turn off the power
before removing the card, or after the card is inserted or after operation (recording, playback, etc.) has stopped, and wait for the charging to complete
before removing the card.
Preventing accidental erasure
In order to prevent erasing the recorded contents of the P2 card by mistake, turn the write protect switch on the P2 card to the Protect side (or the LOCK
side).
Write-protect switch
Write-protect switch
@@NOTE
tt Write-protect switch can be switched while the card is being accessed (during recording or playback), but does not take effect until accessing of the
card stops.
P2 card access LEDs and status of P2 cards
P2 card access LED
P2 card status
Mode check display*
Is illuminated green
Recording possible
Reading/writing are both possible.
[ACTIVE]
Is illuminated orange
Recording target
Reading/writing are both possible. The card is currently
the recording target (including loop recording).
[ACTIVE]
Flashing orange
Accessing card
Reading/writing are currently being performed.
[ACCESSING]
Flashing orange rapidly
The card is being
recognized.
The P2 card is being recognized.
[INFO READING]
– 35 –
Chapter 3 Preparation — P2 card
P2 card access LED
P2 card status
Flashing green slowly
Off
Mode check display*
Card full
There is no free space on the P2 card. Reading only is
possible.
[FULL]
Write protect
The write-protect switch on the P2 card is at the Protect
position. Reading only is possible.
[PROTECTED]
Unrecordable card
Recording is not possible by the currently set recording
format since the SD memory card, etc. is inserted. To
record the card, change the recording format or use a
P2 card.
[REC IMPOSSIBLE]
Slot that is not recording
target
The card has been inserted into a different slot from the
slot ([P2] or [microP2]) that was selected in the main
menu → [RECORDING SETUP] → [REC MEDIA].
No display
Card not supported
This card cannot be used on the camera. Replace the
card.
[NOT SUPPORTED]
Illegal format
The P2 card is not properly formatted. Reformat the
card.
[FORMAT ERROR]
No card
The P2 card is not inserted. The card is waiting to be
recognized.
[NO CARD]
Unauthenticated card
This microP2 memory card cannot be authenticated.
Select the main menu → [CLIP] → [AUTHENTICATE],
and enter the password.
For details, refer to “Manual CPS authentication”
(page 112).
[AUTH NG]
* Mode check is displayed on the LCD monitor screen or the viewfinder screen. For details, refer to “Screen status display” (page 142).
P2 card recording time
rr P2 cards supported on the camera
Optional P2 and microP2 memory cards with a capacity of 4 GB to 64 GB can be used with the camera. (As of March 2014)
@@NOTE
tt AJ‑P2C002SG (2 GB) cards cannot be used.
tt When AVC‑Intra 100 in 1080/59.94P or 1080/50P mode is selected, you cannot record to the following P2 cards.
- P2 memory cards of R, A, or E series
tt The driver installed on the camera may be required to be updated depending on the type of P2 card. (page 182)
tt Refer to our support desk at the following website for the latest information not included in these operating instructions.
http://pro-av.panasonic.net/
rr P2 card recording times
(Example when a 64 GB card is used)
System mode
1080P
1080i, 720P
480i, 576i
Recording format (codec)
Recording time
AVC‑Intra 100
Approx. 32 min
AVC‑LongG 25
Approx. 128 min
AVC‑LongG 12
Approx. 256 min
AVC‑Intra 100
Approx. 64 min
AVC‑Intra 50
Approx. 128 min
AVC‑LongG 50
Approx. 128 min
AVC‑LongG 25
Approx. 256 min
AVC‑LongG 12
Approx. 512 min
DVCPRO HD
Approx. 64 min
DVCPRO50
Approx. 128 min
DVCPRO
Approx. 256 min
DV
Approx. 256 min
@@NOTE
tt The above table shows values for regular recording. With native recording, even longer recording times are available depending on the system mode.
tt In the case of 32 GB P2 cards, the recording time becomes 1/2 of the above recording times, in the case of 16 GB P2 cards, the recording time
becomes 1/4, and in the case of 8 GB P2 cards, the recording time becomes 1/8.
tt Indicated capacities include management and other area, so the space available for recording is less than the values in the table above.
Dividing clips recorded on P2 cards
If P2 cards with a capacity of 8 GB or more are used on the camera, recording is automatically continued as another clip when a single continuous
recording time exceeds the following times. When thumbnails for clips are handled (displayed, deleted, restored, etc.) on P2 devices, they can be
handled as a single clip. Clips may be displayed as separate clips in nonlinear editing software and on a computer. When recording on microP2
memory cards that exceed 32 GB in AVC‑LongG codec, recording can be continued as the same clip by selecting [ONE FILE] from the main menu →
[RECORDING SETUP] → [FILE SPLIT].
Recording format (excluding native recording)
Continuous recording time
AVC‑I100 (1080P)
Approx. 3 min
– 36 –
Chapter 3 Preparation — P2 card
Recording format (excluding native recording)
Continuous recording time
AVC‑I100 (1080i)
DVCPRO HD
Approx. 5 min
AVC‑LongG 50
AVC‑Intra 50
DVCPRO50
Approx. 10 min
AVC‑LongG 25
DVCPRO
DV
Approx. 20 min
AVC‑LongG 12
Approx. 40 min
CPS (Content Protection System)
The microP2 memory card supports the security function “Content Protection System” that allows encryption formatting to prevent data leak to third
parties.
To use the CPS function, set a CPS password to the camera, and enable the microP2 memory card authentication and encryption formatting functions.
An encrypted microP2 memory card will be automatically recognized between devices where the same CPS password is set, and recording and
playback of the microP2 memory card are enabled. For details, refer to “Setting CPS password” (page 112).
@@NOTE
tt Setting or deleting of CPS can be performed in the main menu → [CLIP] → [PROPERTY] → [CPS PASSWORD].
tt Up to 16 characters can be input.
tt The encrypted microP2 memory card is not recognized on the SD card slot in a computer.
tt If the card is unable to be recognized, authenticate with the correct password or format and use the card as recording media. Recording data on the
card failed to be recognized cannot be checked. Do not perform any operation other than manual authentication and formatting with the failed card
inserted.
tt To access the encrypted card from a computer in the USB device mode, authenticate the encrypted card with P2 Viewer Plus.
How to handle data recorded on P2 cards
P2 cards are semiconductor memory cards that are used as the recording medium in the professional video production and broadcasting devices that
make up the DVCPRO P2 series.
ffSince data recorded in the P2 format is in a file format, they have excellent compatibility with computers. The file structure is a unique format, which
in addition to video and audio data in MXF files contains various other important information items. The folder structure links data recorded in the P2
format as shown below.
Drive:\
CONTENTS
AVCLIP
AUDIO
CLIP
ICON
PROXY
VIDEO
VOICE
LASTCLIP.TXT*
All these folders are required.
If even part of this information is modified or deleted, the data may no longer
be recognized as P2 data, or the card may no longer be able to be used with
P2 devices.
This is the file to which the information of the final clip that was recorded
with the P2 device is written.
@@NOTE
tt P2 cards formatted on devices other than microP2 memory card compatible devices do not have the AVCLIP folder. For P2 cards without the AVCLIP
folder, the folder will automatically be created when recording is performed on microP2 memory card compatible devices.
tt When transferring data from a P2 card to a computer, or when rewriting data saved on a computer back to a P2 card, to prevent data loss be sure to
download the special “P2 Viewer Plus” software. For details on downloading P2 Viewer Plus and the operating environment, visit the support desk at
the following website:
http://pro-av.panasonic.net/
tt Follow the steps below to use general IT tools such as Microsoft Windows Explorer or Apple Finder to transfer the data to a computer. Be sure to use
P2 Viewer Plus to write data back to a P2 card.
- Transfer the corresponding CONTENTS folder and LASTCLIP.TXT file together as a set.
- Do not transfer individual files from the CONTENTS folder.
- When copying, copy the LASTCLIP.TXT file at the same time as the CONTENTS folder.
- When transferring the data in multiple P2 cards to a computer, create a folder for each P2 card to prevent clips with the same name from being
overwritten.
- Do not delete data from the P2 card.
- Be sure to format P2 cards on a P2 device or P2 Viewer Plus.
– 37 –
Chapter 3 Preparation — Assigning functions to the USER buttons
Assigning functions to the USER buttons
Selected functions can be assigned to USER1 to USER8.
Set the functions to be assigned to [USER1] to [USER8] in the main menu → [USER SW].
Check the setting details using the <DISP/MODE CHK> button.
The following button functions are assigned to USER1 to USER8 as the factory settings. (The numbers of the USER buttons are displayed in the
camera.)
ffUSER1: <FOCUS ASSIST>
ffUSER2: <MACRO>
ffUSER3: <OIS>
ffUSER4: <ZEBRA>
ffUSER5: <WFM>
ffUSER6: <A.IRIS.LEVEL>
ffUSER7: <SLOT SEL>
ffUSER8: <IRIS>
USER3
USER1
USER8
USER4
USER2
USER7
USER6
USER5
Selectable functions
Item
[INHIBIT]
Description
Disables assignment of functions.
[SCENE FILE SEL]
Assigns the function to display the screen (the main menu → [SCENE FILE] → [FILE SELECT]) in which users select the scene file.
[LEVEL GAUGE
RESET]
Assigns the function to set the level gauge using the current horizontal and vertical directions as reference values. Holding down the
assigned button will reset to the factory setting.
[WFM]
Assigns the function for switching the waveform display. Select the waveform display from the main menu → [SW MODE] → [WFM
MODE].
[D.ZOOM]
Assigns the digital zoom function. Zooms in on the field angle by 2x, 5x, and 10x vertically and horizontally.
[DRS]
Assigns the dynamic range stretcher function.
[FBC]
Switches the flash band compensation function to enabled/disabled.
[S.GAIN]
Assigns the function that increases the gain to 24 dB or more. Select the gain value from the main menu → [SW MODE] → [SUPER
GAIN].
[1S.EXP.]
Enables/disables the one second exposure function.
[ATW]
Switches the auto tracking white balance functions to enabled/disabled.
[ATW LOCK]
Fixes the white balance value when pressing this item while the auto tracking white balance function is activated. Resumes the auto
tracking white balance function when pressing again.
[SPOTLIGHT]
Switches the auto iris control function for the spot light to enabled/disabled.
[BACKLIGHT]
Switches the auto iris control function for the backlight compensation to enabled/disabled.
[BLACKFADE]
Assigns the functions that fade out the entire image as black.
[WHITEFADE]
Assigns the functions that fade out the entire image as white.
[A.IRIS.LEVEL]
Switches the auto iris setting function to enabled/disabled.
[IRIS]
[Y GET]
[FOCUS ASSIST]
[FOCUS MACRO]
[OIS]
[FAST ZOOM]
[ZEBRA]
[EVF ON/OFF]
[PRE REC]
Assigns the function for switching the auto iris and manual iris.
Assigns the function for displaying the luminance level of the image at the position indicated by the square marker displayed near the
center.
Switches the manual focus assist display to on/off.
Switches the macro focus setting. You can set the macro function effects in the main menu → [SW MODE] → [MACRO MODE].
Switches the image stabilizer to enabled/disabled.
Speeds up the zoom speed when the zoom lever (with the HANDLE ZOOM switch at the handle side set to <VAR>) is pushed in to the
end.
Assigns the display function of the zebra pattern and marker.
Assigns the function that forces images to be displayed in the viewfinder.
Assigns the function for switching the pre-recording function to enabled/disabled.
[TEXT MEMO]
Assigns the text memo function.
[SHOT MARK]
Assigns the shot mark function.
– 38 –
Chapter 3 Preparation — Assigning functions to the USER buttons
Item
[DEL LAST CLIP]
[SLOT SEL]
[REC MEDIA]
[AUDIO MON SEL]
Description
Assigns the function to delete the clip shot immediately beforehand.
Assigns the function for switching the card to record when two or more cards are inserted in the microP2 memory card slot.
Assigns the function to select the recording target slot between the P2 memory card slot and microP2 memory card slot. This setting is
linked to the setting value in the main menu → [RECORDING SETUP] → [REC MEDIA].
Assigns the function that switches between the display of the audio level meter and the audio channel ([CH1]/[CH2] and [CH3]/[CH4]) of
output audio (headphones, built-in speaker, <AUDIO OUT> terminal, and <HDMI OUT> terminal) while the button is held down.
[REC CHECK]
Assigns the recording check function.
[USB MODE]
Assigns the function for switching the USB device mode or USB host mode to enabled/disabled.
@@NOTE
tt The following functions are also turned off when the camera is turned off.
[WFM]/[D.ZOOM]/[FBC]/[S.GAIN]/[ATW]/[ATW LOCK]/[SPOTLIGHT]/[BACKLIGHT]/[BLACKFADE]/[WHITEFADE]/[Y GET]/[FOCUS ASSIST]/[FAST
ZOOM]/[EVF ON/OFF]/[AUDIO MON SEL]/[USB MODE]
tt When [FAST ZOOM] is enabled, the zoom sound becomes louder than usual.
– 39 –
Chapter 3 Preparation — Adjusting and setting the LCD monitor
Adjusting and setting the LCD monitor
Using the LCD monitor
The LCD monitor of this camera is a 3.5 type. Use either the viewfinder or the LCD monitor depending on your purpose and the shooting conditions.
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
1Open the LCD monitor. (Fig. 1)
The light goes on when the LCD monitor is opened. The light goes off when it is closed.
2Set the LCD monitor screen to the easiest-to-view position. (Fig. 2)
Rotates 90° toward the lens and 180° toward you.
@@NOTE
tt When closing the LCD monitor, be sure to close it firmly.
tt Take care not to apply excessive force on the LCD monitor when it is opened. Doing so may result in a malfunction.
tt Condensation sometimes forms on the LCD panel of the LCD monitor in locations subject to extreme temperature differences. If this happens, wipe
with a soft, dry cloth.
tt If the camera recorder is very cold, the LCD monitor will be slightly darker than normal immediately after the power is turned on. The screen will return
to its regular brightness when the temperature inside increases.
tt The brightness or hue of the image on the viewfinder and LCD monitor may be different from those of the image on a TV monitor. The final check
should be done on a TV monitor.
Adjusting the LCD monitor
rr Adjusting the brightness, contrast, and color level
Adjust [LCD BRIGHTNESS] (brightness), [LCD CONTRAST] (contrast), and [LCD COLOR LEVEL] (color level) in the main menu → [DISPLAY SETUP]
→ [LCD SETTING].
These adjustments will not affect the images to be recorded.
rr Adjusting the backlight luminance
Switches the brightness of the LCD monitor backlight. There are two ways to do this:
ffSet from the main menu → [DISPLAY SETUP] → [LCD SETTING] → [LCD BACKLIGHT].
ffPress the <LCD BACKLIGHT> button. Each press of the button switches in the order [0] → [1] → [−3] → [−2] → [−1].
Mirror shooting
When recording with the LCD monitor rotated towards the lens side, if the camera is set [MIRROR] in the main menu → [DISPLAY SETUP] → [SELF
SHOOT], the image is displayed in reverse in left and right on the LCD monitor. This allows shooting as if looking at a mirror image. Note that only the
display of the LCD monitor is horizontally reversed. Recording is performed normally.
Highlighting the outlines of images
It is easier to focus if the outlines of images on the LCD monitor are highlighted.
Even when the outlines are highlighted on the LCD monitor, images output from the camera recorder and recorded images are not affected.
To highlight outlines, set [ON] in the main menu → [DISPLAY SETUP] → [EVF DETAIL], and adjust [EVF PEAK LEVEL] and [EVF PEAK FREQ] in the
main menu → [DISPLAY SETUP].
– 40 –
Chapter 3 Preparation — Adjusting and setting the viewfinder
Adjusting and setting the viewfinder
The viewfinder of this camera is a 0.5 type organic EL. Use either the viewfinder or the LCD monitor depending on your purpose and the shooting
conditions.
Using the viewfinder
When it is difficult to use the LCD monitor because the surroundings are bright, you can check the image using the viewfinder.
Positioning your eye near the viewfinder will trigger the eye sensor to automatically display the image.
ffThe eye sensor sensitivity can be set to [HIGH] or [LOW] in the main menu → [DISPLAY SETUP] → [EYE SENSOR].
ffThe eye sensor may not work properly depending on the shape of the eyeglasses you may be wearing, how you hold the camera, or by strong light
present in the vicinity of the eye piece. If this happens, switch the image display by assigning [EVF ON/OFF] to the USER button.
Diopter adjustment lever
Eye sensor
1Set the viewfinder screen to the easiest-to-view position.
The viewfinder can be lifted vertically to approximately 90 degrees.
2Adjust the characters inside the viewfinder screen so that they are clearly visible using the diopter adjustment lever.
@@NOTE
tt The image brightness and color hue seen on the viewfinder and LCD monitor may be different from that seen on a TV monitor. The final check of the
color hue should be done on a TV monitor.
Adjusting the viewfinder
rr Adjusting the brightness, contrast, and color level
Adjust [EVF BRIGHTNESS] (brightness), [EVF CONTRAST] (contrast), and [EVF COLOR LEVEL] (color level) in the main menu → [DISPLAY SETUP]
→ [EVF SETTING].
These adjustments will not affect recorded images.
rr Switching between color and monochrome
The viewfinder screen can be switched between color display and monochrome display. Set from the main menu → [DISPLAY SETUP] → [EVF
SETTING] → [EVF COLOR].
Highlighting the outlines of images
It is easier to focus if the outlines of images in the viewfinder are highlighted.
Even when the outlines are highlighted on the LCD monitor, images output from the camera recorder and recorded images are not affected.
To highlight outlines, set [ON] in the main menu → [DISPLAY SETUP] → [EVF DETAIL], and adjust [EVF PEAK LEVEL] and [EVF PEAK FREQ] in the
main menu → [DISPLAY SETUP].
– 41 –
Chapter 3 Preparation — Tally lamp
Tally lamp
If set to anything other than [OFF] in the main menu → [OTHER FUNCTIONS] → [TALLY LAMP], you can make up the tally lamp light while
photographing.
Also, the tally lamp will flash when the following situations occur:
ffWhen the remaining capacity of the battery is exhausted (four times per second)
ffThe P2 card has less free space to record and the battery level is low (one time per second)
ffThe P2 card has been removed while being accessed (four times per second)
ffThe P2 card has no more space to record (four times per second)
ffWhen the warnings such as the fluctuation of the reference signal for the <GENLOCK IN/VIDEO OUT> terminal and a system error or recording
abnormality warning are displayed (four times per second)
Front tally lamp
Rear tally lamp
– 42 –
Chapter 4
Shooting
This chapter describes the basic procedure for recording. It also describes special shooting methods such as pre-recording and loop recording.
Chapter 4 Shooting — Basic procedures
Basic procedures
This section describes the basic procedures for shooting. When you actually start shooting, pre-inspect your system to ensure that it works properly
after making preparations.
Preparation
1Attach the fully charged battery, or connect the AC adaptor. (page 26)
2Set the power switch to <ON>. (page 32)
3Insert the P2 card. (page 34)
4Adjust the angle of the LCD monitor and viewfinder or other conditions. (pages 40, 41)
5Set the lens cover lever to <OPEN>. (page 30)
@@NOTE
tt Even if the battery is fully charged, the remaining capacity of the battery may not be correctly displayed.
Shooting
For shooting, use the following steps.
b
c
b
a
b
a: <AUTO/MANUAL> switch
b: Recording button (grip side, handle side, front side)
c: <REC CHECK> button
1Set the video settings and the audio input.
Before shooting, the followings must be set or adjusted.
ffImage settings for the brightness function (iris, gain, shutter) and the white balance adjustment function, etc.
ffAudio input settings for audio recording.
ffAdjusting audio recording level
2Select shooting mode with the <AUTO/MANUAL> switch.
<AUTO>: auto mode
ff[A] is displayed at the upper part of the viewfinder and LCD monitor.
ffFocus, iris, gain, shutter, and white balance are automatically adjusted.
ffYou can set the operation specifics for auto mode in the main menu → [AUTO SW].
<MANUAL>: manual mode
ffTo adjust focus, iris, gain, shutter speed, and white balance manually, set the camera to manual mode.
ffAdjust the brightness by adjusting the iris and ND filter. (page 47)
ffTo focus manually, use the focus operation. (page 47)
ffTo adjust the white balance, adjust the white balance and black balance. (page 51)
ffTo set the audio input and adjust the recording level, switch audio input. (page 63)
3Press the REC button to start recording.
ffThe REC button is on three locations: the grip side, the handle side, and the front side.
ffDuring recording, the tally lamp lights red.
4To stop recording, press the REC button again.
5Check videos recorded.
After recording ends, pressing the <REC CHECK> button automatically plays back approximately the last three seconds of the latest clip.
Holding down the <REC CHECK> button for one second plays back from the last ten seconds of the latest clip.
In this way, you can check whether video has been recorded properly.
– 44 –
Chapter 4 Shooting — Basic procedures
ffReturns to recording standby after checking.
ffFor clips within ten seconds, previous clips are not played back even if the <REC CHECK> button is held down after returning to the start of the
current clip.
@@NOTE
tt During recording standby and recording, operation buttons (<%>, <)>, <=/&>, <(>) do not function.
tt When highly bright subjects (e.g. sun or lighting) are shot, the periphery of the subject might be colored.
tt When shooting at low angles, using the REC button on the handle side is helpful.
tt The REC button on the handle side includes a hold mechanism to prevent accidental operation.
tt The REC button on the front side can be disabled by settings. (page 127)
tt In the following cases, it may take time to complete writing to the P2 card even when you have pressed the REC button and stopped recording. For
this reason, if you press the REC button soon to start recording, the camera is unable to operate.
- Stopping of short-term recording
- Stopping immediately after recording to two microP2 memory cards
Selecting the resolution, codec, and video format for recording
You can select the recording resolution (1080P, 1080i, 720P, 480i, 576i), recording codec (AVC‑Intra, AVC‑LongG, DVCPRO HD, etc.), and the
recording frame rate.
Set in the main menu → [SYSTEM MODE] → [LINE&FREQ] and [REC FORMAT].
rr Resolution: 1920×1080
Setting
[LINE&FREQ]
[1080‑59.94P]
[REC FORMAT]
[AVC‑I100/60P]
[AVC‑G25/60P]
[AVC‑G12/60P]
—
1080/60P
[AVC‑I100/30PN]
1080/30PN Native
[AVC‑I100/24PN]
[1080‑59.94i]
Recording format
[CAMERA MODE]
1080/24PN Native
[AVC‑I100/60i]
[AVC‑I50/60i]
[AVC‑G50/60i]
[AVC‑G25/60i]
[AVC‑G12/60i]
—
1080/60i
[DVCPRO HD/60i]
[60i]
[1080‑50P]
[AVC‑I100/50P]
[AVC‑G25/50P]
[AVC‑G12/50P]
—
1080/50P
[1080‑50i]
[AVC‑I100/50i]
[AVC‑I50/50i]
[AVC‑G50/50i]
[AVC‑G25/50i]
[AVC‑G12/50i]
—
1080/50i
[DVCPRO HD/50i]
[50i]
rr Resolution: 1280×720
Setting
[LINE&FREQ]
[REC FORMAT]
[720‑60P]
[AVC‑I100/60P]
[AVC‑I50/60P]
[AVC‑G50/60P]
[AVC‑G25/60P]
[AVC‑G12/60P]
[720‑50P]
[AVC‑I100/50P]
[AVC‑I50/50P]
[AVC‑G50/50P]
[AVC‑G25/50P]
[AVC‑G12/50P]
Recording format
[CAMERA MODE]
—
720/60P
—
720/50P
[DVCPRO HD/60P]
[DVCPRO HD/50P]
rr Resolution: 720×480
Setting
[LINE&FREQ]
[480‑59.94i]
[REC FORMAT]
[DVCPRO50/60i]
[DVCPRO/60i]
[DV/60i]
Recording format
[CAMERA MODE]
[60i]
480/60i
[30P]
480/30P over 60i 2:2 Pull Down
– 45 –
Chapter 4 Shooting — Basic procedures
rr Resolution: 720×576
Setting
[LINE&FREQ]
[576‑50i]
[REC FORMAT]
[DVCPRO50/50i]
[DVCPRO/50i]
[DV/50i]
Recording format
[CAMERA MODE]
[50i]
576/50i
[25P]
576/25P over 50i 2:2 Pull Down
@@NOTE
tt In 480i/576i mode, the video aspect ratio for recording and output can be changed.
– 46 –
Chapter 4 Shooting — Adjustable settings when shooting
Adjustable settings when shooting
Adjust the iris and gain when shooting.
Iris
1Switch to manual mode with the <AUTO/MANUAL> switch. (page 44)
2Press the <IRIS> button to switch the adjustment method for the lens aperture.
[AUTO IRIS]: Adjusts iris setting automatically. (Auto iris)
[MANUAL IRIS]: Adjust the lens iris manually. (Manual iris)
3When on manual iris, rotate the iris ring to adjust the lens iris.
When the auto iris level function for auto iris is enabled, the value of the auto iris level can be adjusted by turning the iris ring. The value is not
applied to the setting in the main menu → [SCENE FILE] → [A.IRIS LEVEL EFFECT].
@@NOTE
tt Auto iris does not function when the frame rate is set to [9fps] or lower in variable frame rate, and when the shutter speed is set to less than 1/12.
Gain
If the camera recorder screen is dark, increase the gain to brighten the screen.
1Switch to manual mode with the <AUTO/MANUAL> switch. (page 44)
2Switch gain with the <GAIN> switch.
<L>: Normally set to this position. (Factory setting is 0 dB)
<M>: Increases the gain of the camera image amp. (Factory setting is 6 dB)
<H>: Increases the gain of the camera image amp. (Factory setting is 12 dB)
The gain values for <L>, <M>, and <H> can be changed in the main menu → [SW MODE] → [LOW GAIN], [MID GAIN], and [HIGH GAIN].
(page 126)
When in auto mode, selecting [ON] in the main menu → [AUTO SW] → [AGC] will set the camera to auto gain regardless of the position of the
<GAIN> switch. (page 127)
@@NOTE
tt When [NORMAL] is selected from the main menu → [SYSTEM MODE] → [SHOOTING MODE], the setting of −3 dB does not function.
Super gain
When shooting in dark locations, you can set super gain regardless of whether the camera is in auto mode or manual mode.
Select either [24dB], [30dB], [36dB], or [ALL] in the main menu → [SW MODE] → [SUPER GAIN].
You can switch to the selected gain by pressing a USER button assigned [SUPER GAIN]. (page 38)
When [ALL] is selected, each time the USER button is pressed, the camera toggles [24dB] → [30dB] → [36dB] → normal gain settings in order.
@@NOTE
tt Super gain does not function when the frame rate is set to lower than [12fps] in variable frame rate, or when the shutter speed is set to lower than
1/12.
Brightness adjustment
When the external light is strong, you can switch the ND filter (brightness adjustment filter) to use with the <ND FILTER> switch.
1Change the setting of the <ND FILTER> switch.
<1/64>: Reduce the amount of light entering the MOS sensor to 1/64.
<1/16>: Reduce the amount of light entering the MOS sensor to 1/16.
<1/4>: Reduce the amount of light entering the MOS sensor to 1/4.
<OFF>: Does not use the ND filter.
Macro
Macro function can be switched [ON]/[OFF].
1Press the USER button to which [FOCUS MACRO] has been assigned.
ffWhen [ON] is set,
is displayed at the top of the focus display on the viewfinder or LCD monitor.
ffThe operation mode when [ON] is set can be made in the main menu → [SW MODE] → [MACRO MODE].
ffFocus operation in the tele macro area is disabled when [MACRO MODE] is set to [TELE OFF]. The minimum shooting distance (M.O.D) is
maintained to be 1.1 m even when the zoom position is within the tele macro area.
ffFocus operation in all macro areas is disabled when [MACRO MODE] is set to [ALL OFF]. The minimum shooting distance (M.O.D) is maintained
to be 1.1 m from the lens at any zoom position.
Focusing (manual focus)
1Switch the method of controlling the focus with the <FOCUS> switch.
<A>: Changes to the auto focus mode. Adjusts the focus automatically.
– 47 –
Chapter 4 Shooting — Adjustable settings when shooting
<M>: Changes to the manual focus mode. Control the focus ring manually to adjust the focus.
<c>: Changes to the manual focus mode after the focus distance is set to infinity.
This switch is the spring switch. Even when the <FOCUS> switch is pushed towards the <c> side, the switch returns to the <M> position.
@@NOTE
tt Since the auto focus control may not operate properly if there is a flicker, select a shutter speed that is appropriate to the light.
tt If you set the camera to auto focus mode at times other than 60i (50i) and 60P (50P), the time required for the focus control will be slightly longer than
when in normal focus mode.
tt When [ON] is selected in the main menu → [AUTO SW] → [AF] and the camera is in auto mode, auto focusing is performed regardless of the position
of the <FOCUS> switch.
tt Auto focus does not function when the frame rate is set to [9fps] or lower in variable frame rate, and when the shutter speed is set to less than 1/12.
Auto high-speed focusing
Pressing the <PUSH AUTO> button performs the operation set in the main menu → [SW MODE] → [PUSH AF MODE].
[TURBO]: Performs high-speed focusing until the image is focused, once the button is pressed.
[NORMAL]: Performs automatic focusing while pressing the button.
Manual focus assist mode
By setting [ON] in the main menu → [SW MODE] → [MF ASSIST], you can switch from manual focus mode to manual focus assist mode.
ffCompared to manual focus mode, you can adjust the focus (course adjustment) by rotating the focus ring approximately a half-turn.
ffAfter adjusting with the focus ring, the focus is automatically adjusted (fine adjustment).
ffWhen the focus deviation is great, it may not be in focus.
ffAfter executing auto adjustment, it will not adjust automatically until you move the focus ring again.
Focus assist function
The focus assist function enables you to focus the target easily.
Expanded display in the viewfinder and LCD monitor, focus in red display (display with the contours of the image in red), and focus bar display are
available.
Expanded display [EXPAND]
Set to [EXPAND] in the main menu → [SW MODE] → [FOCUS ASSIST MODE] beforehand.
When the <FOCUS ASSIST> button is pressed, the center of the screen is expanded approx. three times so that you can focus the image easily.
EXPANDED
ffIn the expanded display, the status display and zebra pattern disappear, and [EXPANDED] is displayed at the top of the screen.
@@NOTE
tt Viewfinder screen and LCD monitor screen are expanded.
tt Expanded display is unavailable in the video output, SDI output, and HDMI output.
Focus in red display [IN RED]
Set [IN RED] in the main menu → [SW MODE] → [FOCUS ASSIST MODE] beforehand.
Press the <FOCUS ASSIST> button to put red borders around the contours of the image. When this happens the screen frame will turn red.
Adjust the focus so that the contours of the subject you want to focus on turn red.
@@NOTE
tt It is displayed only on the viewfinder screen and LCD monitor screen.
When various status information is displayed, they will disappear.
Focus bar display [FOCUS BAR]
The focus bar can be displayed when [ON] is set in the main menu → [DISPLAY SETUP] → [FOCUS BAR].
The degree of focus is indicated by the length of the bar.
ffWhite bar: Focus bar display
ffGreen line: Peak display
Not in focus
The bar extends to the right when the viewfinder is
in-focus.
– 48 –
Chapter 4 Shooting — Adjustable settings when shooting
Area mode function
You can perform the following operations by displaying the area frame with the control stick.
ffArea auto focus function
Auto focus operation is performed within the area selected with the area frame.
ffArea auto iris function
The iris value is adjusted automatically within the area selected with the area frame.
ffArea brightness display
The luminance level of the center of the selected area frame is displayed.
Operation function settings
Set the operations to be assigned to the area mode function from the main menu.
1Select the desired function in the main menu → [SW MODE] → [AREA MODE].
ff[INHIBIT]: Does not assign a function.
ff[FOCUS]: Area focus function and area focus bar function
ff[IRIS]: Area iris function
ff[Y GET]: Area brightness display
ff[FOCUS/IRIS]: Simultaneous operation of area focus function/area iris function, and area focus bar function
ff[FOCUS/Y GET]: Simultaneous operation of area focus function/area brightness display, and area focus bar function
Operation of area mode function
The function set in the main menu → [SW MODE] → [AREA MODE] can be used by performing the following operation when shooting or while in
shooting standby.
1Press the control stick.
ffAn area frame (white) is displayed.
2Press the control stick upward/downward/to the left/to the right to move the area frame to a desired position.
3Press the control stick.
ffThe area frame color changes from white to yellow.
ffWhen the yellow frame is displayed, the function set for [AREA MODE] can be operated in the area frame.
ffWhile the function is activated, [AREA] is displayed on the right of the display.
ffWhen the area brightness display is activated, the brightness display in the center does not operate.
4Press the control stick for two seconds or longer.
ffThe area frame disappears and the camera exits the area mode function.
@@NOTE
tt The area mode function is released when the power is turned off or when a video is played back.
– 49 –
Chapter 4 Shooting — Adjustable settings when shooting
Level gauge function
A level gauge that indicates the horizontal and vertical inclinations of the camera recorder can be displayed on the LCD monitor.
Horizontal direction
Example) When correcting the inclination towards the left
Vertical direction
Example) When correcting the downward inclination
Yellow lines will be displayed when inclined. Green lines will be displayed when there is almost no inclination. Inclinations will be displayed up to
approximately ±45° in the horizontal direction, and up to ±30° in the vertical direction.
1Select [ON] in the main menu → [DISPLAY SETUP] → [LEVEL GAUGE].
@@NOTE
tt The level gauge display is not recorded.
tt The level gauge is not displayed in the viewfinder.
tt The level gauge is not displayed when selecting [MIRROR] in the main menu → [DISPLAY SETUP] → [SELF SHOOT].
tt While moving the camera, the level gauge may not be displayed properly.
tt When shooting while tilting the camera upward or downward greatly, the level gauge may not be displayed properly.
tt When holding down the USER button where [LEVEL GAUGE RESET] is assigned in the main menu → [USER SW], the setting will be reset to the
factory setting.
tt When pressing the USER button where [LEVEL GAUGE RESET] is assigned in the main menu → [USER SW].
– 50 –
Chapter 4 Shooting — Adjusting the white and black balance
Adjusting the white and black balance
To obtain high-quality video at all times using the camera, the white and black balance must be adjusted according to conditions.
To obtain higher image quality, adjust in the order of AWB (white balance adjustment) → ABB (black balance adjustment) → AWB (white balance
adjustment).
@@NOTE
tt When white or black balance is adjusted while video is disrupted by the generator lock, adjustment may not be performed correctly. Adjust white or
black balance again after video has returned to normal.
Adjusting the white balance
The white balance must be adjusted again when the lighting conditions change. Follow the steps below to adjust the white balance automatically.
rr When storing in <A> of the <WHITE BAL> switch
1Switch to manual mode with the <AUTO/MANUAL> switch. (page 44)
2Set the <GAIN> switch.
Normally, set this to 0 dB. If it is too dark, set the gain to an appropriate value.
3Set the <WHITE BAL> switch to <A>.
4Change the <ND FILTER> switch settings according to the light conditions.
For setting examples for the <ND FILTER> switch, refer to “Brightness adjustment” (page 47).
5Place the white pattern at a point where the light conditions match those for the light source for the subject, and zoom in on the
white pattern so that the white color appears in the screen.
6Adjust the lens aperture.
Adjust the iris so that the brightness of Y GET is approx. 70%.
7Press the <AWB> button.
White balance is automatically adjusted.
rr White pattern
ffA white object (cloth or wall) near the subject may also be used for the white pattern.
ffRequired size of white pattern is as follows.
1/2 or more of the screen width
1/2 or more of the screen height
ffKeep bright spotlights out of the screen.
ffThe white pattern must be placed at the center of the screen.
rr Messages displayed in the viewfinder and LCD monitor
ffWhen the auto tracking white balance (ATW) function is operating, white balance cannot be adjusted.
Status
Message
Remark
During adjustment
[AWB Ach ACTIVE]
Adjustment completed
[AWB A OK 3200K]
ffThe adjusted value is automatically stored in the
specified memory (A or B).
When the color temperature of the subject is lower
than 2000 K or higher than 15000 K
[AWB NG COLOR TEMP LOW]
[AWB NG COLOR TEMP HIGH]
ff[AWB NG COLOR TEMP LOW] indicates that
the temperature is lower than the displayed
temperature. [AWB NG COLOR TEMP HIGH]
indicates that the temperature is higher than the
displayed temperature.
rr [COLOR TEMP Ach SETTING]/[COLOR TEMP Bch SETTING] setting
ffThe color hue can be changed after the white balance has been adjusted automatically, after setting each item in the main menu → [SCENE FILE] →
[COLOR TEMP Ach SETTING]/[COLOR TEMP Bch SETTING].
ffAdjusting either one of [COLOR TEMP], [R Gain], [B Gain], and [G AXIS] changes the other three values.
ffApplying white balance automatic adjustment again resets [COLOR TEMP], [R Gain], [B Gain], and [G AXIS].
– 51 –
Chapter 4 Shooting — Adjusting the white and black balance
When you have no time to adjust the white balance
Set the <WHITE BAL> switch to <PRST>.
ffEach time the <AWB> button is pressed, the values set in [3200K], [5600K], and main menu → [SW MODE] → [W.BAL VAR] are toggled in order.
When [VAR] is selected, turning the <SEL/PUSH SET> dial button can set any white balance value between [2000K] and [15000K].
ffThe value displayed as [VAR] is not always assured. Use it as a reference value.
ffThe value for [VAR] can be viewed by pressing the <AWB> button.
When the white balance has not been automatically adjusted
When the white balance has not been successfully adjusted, an error message is displayed on the viewfinder screen and LCD monitor displays.
Error message
[AWB Ach NG] or [AWB Bch NG]
[LOW LIGHT]
[LEVEL OVER]
[COLOR TEMP LOW] or [COLOR TEMP HIGH]
Meaning
Remedy
The color temperature is too high, or too low.
Select the appropriate filter.
There is insufficient light.
Increase the amount of light or increase gain.
There is too much light.
Decrease the amount of light or decrease gain.
The color temperature is too high, or too low.
Select the appropriate filter or light source.
Manual setting of color temperature
The color temperature of white balance can be adjusted by the setting menu.
1Press the <AWB> button to select [W.BAL VAR] mode.
2Set the color temperature in the main menu → [SW MODE] → [W.BAL VAR].
This can be set from [2000K] to [15000K].
@@NOTE
tt It can also be operated by the <SEL/PUSH SET> dial button. For details, refer to “Direct menu operation” (page 73).
Viewfinder and LCD monitor screen displays relating to white balance
For details, refer to “Screen status display” (page 142).
Setting the auto tracking white balance (ATW) function
The camera is equipped with the Auto Tracking White Balance (ATW) function that automatically tracks the white balance of images according to the
lighting conditions.
The auto tracking white balance function can be assigned to each of <A>, <B>, and <PRST> of the <WHITE BAL> switch. Configure the settings in the
main menu → [SW MODE] → [ATW].
Note that if the auto tracking white balance function is assigned to the USER button, the function follows the operation of the USER button.
For details, refer to “Assigning functions to the USER buttons” (page 38).
Canceling the auto tracking white balance
Press the USER button to which auto tracking white balance function is assigned again or change the position of the <WHITE BAL> switch. Note that if
the auto tracking white balance function is set to the <WHITE BAL> switch, the function cannot be canceled with the USER button.
@@NOTE
tt This function does not guarantee 100% accuracy for the white balance. Note that the tracking performance relative to changes in ambient lighting and
white balance performance has been given a certain degree of latitude.
tt Auto tracking white balance does not function when the frame rate is set to [9fps] or lower in variable frame rate, and when the shutter speed is set to
less than 1/12.
Adjusting the black balance
Black balance must be adjusted in the following instances:
ffWhen the camera is used for the first time
ffWhen the camera has not been used for a long time
ffWhen the ambient temperature has changed considerably
ffWhen super gain is set with the USER button
ffWhen changing the gain switch values
ffWhen switching the items in the main menu → [SYSTEM MODE] → [REC FORMAT]
To shoot optimum video, we recommend adjusting the black balance immediately before shooting.
Before adjusting the black balance, prepare the conditions for adjusting the white balance.
1Switch to manual mode with the <AUTO/MANUAL> switch. (page 44)
2Set the <WHITE BAL> switch to <A> or <B>.
3Press and hold the <AWB> button for approx. two seconds.
Black balance is adjusted after the white balance.
– 52 –
Chapter 4 Shooting — Adjusting the white and black balance
rr Messages displayed in the viewfinder and LCD monitor
Status
Message
During adjustment
[ABB ACTIVE]
Adjustment completed
[ABB OK]
Remark
ffThe adjusted value is automatically stored in
memory.
@@NOTE
tt During black balance adjustment, the aperture is set to automatically shut out light.
tt During recording, black balance cannot be adjusted.
tt During the automatic black balance execution, recording to the P2 card is not performed by pressing the REC button.
tt The gain switching circuit is automatically switched during black balance adjustment. Flicker or noise sometimes appears on the viewfinder screen and
LCD monitor. This is not a malfunction.
Black balance memory
Values stored to memory are saved even if the camera is turned off.
– 53 –
Chapter 4 Shooting — Using the zoom function
Using the zoom function
Adjust the angle of view you want to shoot.
The camera has a 22x optical zoom.
The zoom can be operated at the following three locations:
ffZoom lever (on the grip)
ffZoom lever (on the handle)
ffZoom ring on the lens
Select the zoom operation with the <ZOOM> switch and the HANDLE ZOOM switch.
Setting the <ZOOM> switch
Switch the <ZOOM> switch to set the zoom operation.
<MANUAL>: You can operate the zoom ring manually to adjust the angle of view.
<SERVO>: You can use the motor-driven zoom using the zoom lever.
Adjusting the zoom position
Adjust the zoom with the zoom lever.
<T>: Zoom in the image.
<W>: Zoom out the image.
Lightly pressing the zoom lever on the grip will operate the zoom at low speed. Pressing strongly will operate the zoom at high speed.
@@NOTE
tt To operate the zoom with higher speed, press the USER button where [FAST ZOOM] is assigned in the main menu → [USER SW] to enable/disable
[FAST ZOOM].
tt When [FAST ZOOM] is enabled, the motorized zoom can operated with higher speed when the zoom lever is pushed to the end. However, the zoom
sound becomes louder than usual. If the sound of the motorized zoom is obtrusive, disable [FAST ZOOM].
Using the zoom lever on the handle
You can select three shooting modes with the HANDLE ZOOM switch.
<FIX>: Zoom with the speed set in the main menu → [SW MODE] → [H.ZOOM SPEED].
<VAR>: Zoom speed changes depending on how strong the lever is pushed. (When pushed gently, the speed becomes slower, and when pushed
strongly, it becomes faster.)
<OFF>: The zoom lever does not work.
Zoom ring
Setting the <ZOOM> switch to the <MANUAL> position will allow manual zoom operation with the zoom ring.
ffWhen the <ZOOM> switch is at the <SERVO> position, do not operate the zoom manually. Doing so may result in a malfunction.
– 54 –
Chapter 4 Shooting — Adjusting image quality
Adjusting image quality
The image quality of the video to be recorded can be set in the main menu → [SCENE FILE]. To change “Advanced settings”, measuring equipment
such as vector scope is necessary.
Detail function
This function thickens or weakens the outlines of images. It effectively softens or sharpens images, but in some cases, the whole image may become
rough due to emphasized noise and edges. To avoid such problems, it is necessary not to add this effect on parts where emphasizing is not needed and
keep the details of the parts.
rr General settings
[MASTER DTL]: Sets the level of the detail effect of the whole part.
[DTL CORING]: Sets the level of signal (including noise) not to activate the detail effect.
rr Advanced settings
Set in the main menu → [SCENE FILE] → [DETAIL SETTING].
[DETAIL]: Sets [ON]/[OFF] of the detail function.
[V.DTL LEVEL]: Sets the intensity of the detail level in the vertical direction.
[H.DTL FREQ.]: Sets the thickness of the detail level in the horizontal direction.
[V. DTL FREQ.]: Sets the thickness of the detail level in the vertical direction.
[LEVEL DEPEND.]: When the detail of luminosity signal is emphasized, details in the darker parts are compressed. Details of bright areas are also
compressed more when the value set for [LEVEL DEPEND.] is larger.
[KNEE APE LVL]: Sets the detail level of high luminosity areas (high-brightness areas).
[DTL GAIN(+)]: Sets the detail level of + direction (to make brighter).
[DTL GAIN(−)]: Sets the detail level of − direction (to make darker).
Skin tone function
This function makes human skin look smoother in images.
R-Y
255
R
[I WIDTH]
[I CENTER]
[Q WIDTH]
Mg
255
Q axis
0
Yl
B-Y/0°
[Q PHASE]
B
G
Cy
I axis
Fig. 1
rr General settings
[SKIN TONE DTL A]/[SKIN TONE DTL B]/[SKIN TONE DTL C]: Selects what kind of skin color where the skin tone detail function should work from
the three data [SKIN TONE DTL A]/[SKIN TONE DTL B]/[SKIN TONE DTL C]. [SKIN TONE DTL A]/[SKIN TONE DTL B]/[SKIN TONE DTL C] can be set
alone or in combination.
[SKIN TONE ZEBRA]: When [SKIN TONE DTL A]/[SKIN TONE DTL B]/[SKIN TONE DTL C] are enabled, displays the zebra pattern in the selected skin
color field. The zebra pattern displays the area selected in [SKIN TONE DTL SETTING].
rr Advanced settings
Configure the settings in the main menu → [SCENE FILE] → [SKIN TONE DTL SETTING].
[DETECT TABLE]: Selects the skin color table of the object on which the skin tone table is applied.
[SKIN TONE GET]: Acquires the color information of [A], [B], or [C] selected in [DETECT TABLE] from the area around the center marker. By executing
this menu, [I CENTER] to [Q PHASE] data are acquired automatically.
[SKIN DTL EFFECT]: Sets the effect level of the skin tone detail.
ffThe color composition of video signal (R/G/B) can be converted to color difference signal (R-Y/B-Y) as in (Fig. 1). Within those ranges, set the area on
which the following skin tone is applied, using the axis across red and cyan (I axis) and the axis across green and magenta (Q axis).
[I CENTER]: Sets the center position on the I axis (the area where the skin tone applied).
[I WIDTH]: Sets the area width where the skin tone is applied, along the I axis with [I CENTER] in the center.
[Q WIDTH]: Sets the area width where the skin tone is applied, along the Q axis with [I CENTER] in the center.
[Q PHASE]: Sets the phase where the skin tone is applied, with the Q axis being the reference.
– 55 –
Chapter 4 Shooting — Adjusting image quality
RB gain control function
This function makes settings to add or reduce intensity of red and blue colors according to the position of the <WHITE BAL> switch.
The function works when the switch is at the <PRST> position or when automatic white balance is active. It does not work when auto tracking white
balance is activated.
rr General settings
Use the camera with the factory settings.
rr Advanced settings
Configure the settings in the main menu → [SCENE FILE] → [RB GAIN CONTROL SETTING].
ffWhen the <WHITE BAL> switch is at <PRST> position
[R GAIN AWB PRE]: Makes settings to add or reduce intensity of red color.
[B GAIN AWB PRE]: Makes settings to add or reduce intensity of blue color.
ffWhen the <WHITE BAL> switch is at <A> position
[R GAIN AWB A]: Makes settings to add or reduce intensity of red color.
[B GAIN AWB A]: Makes settings to add or reduce intensity of blue color.
ffWhen the <WHITE BAL> switch is at <B> position
[R GAIN AWB B]: Makes settings to add or reduce intensity of red color.
[B GAIN AWB B]: Makes settings to add or reduce intensity of blue color.
ffWhen setting the <WHITE BAL> switch to the <A> position and automatic white balance is performed
[AWB A GAIN OFFSET]: Sets whether to keep the values set for [R GAIN AWB A] and [B GAIN AWB A] or reset them.
ffWhen setting the <WHITE BAL> switch to the <B> position and automatic white balance is performed
[AWB B GAIN OFFSET]: Sets whether to keep the values set for [R GAIN AWB B] and [B GAIN AWB B] or reset them.
Chroma setting function
This function sets color saturation and phase. It applies effects on whole images. It cannot be set to individual color hue.
rr General settings
[CHROMA LEVEL]: Sets the chroma level of the PR signal and PB signal. When the vector scope is used, the distance from the center (no color)
increases in the whole image.
[CHROMA PHASE]: Finely adjusts the chroma phase of the PR signal and PB signal. When the vector scope is used, the whole image rotates clockwise
or counter-clockwise.
rr Advanced settings
No setting items are provided.
Matrix function
This function sets the image color representation by selecting the matrix table. If the settings are changed, the representation of all the colors in the
image will also be changed.
[MATRIX R-G] (MATRIX G-R)
[MATRIX R-B]
R
Mg
(MATRIX G-B)
(MATRIX B-R)
R
Mg
[MATRIX B-G]
Yl
B
Yl
B
[MATRIX B-R]
(MATRIX B-G)
[MATRIX G-B]
G
Cy
(MATRIX R-B)
G
Cy
[MATRIX G-R] (MATRIX R-G)
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
rr General settings
[MATRIX]: Selects the matrix table to represent the color for shooting.
rr Advanced settings
Configure the settings in the main menu → [SCENE FILE] → [MATRIX SETTING].
It performs fine adjustment relatively on the matrix table selected in [MATRIX].
Since the fine adjustment is performed relatively, if the matrix table selected in [MATRIX] differs, the color representation may differ even when the same
value is set. (Fig. 1)
Example) When adjusting [MATRIX R‑G] to the + side, and [MATRIX B‑G] to the − side (Fig. 2)
– 56 –
Chapter 4 Shooting — Adjusting image quality
Color correction function
This function sets color saturation and phase. It applies individual effect on 15 phases in a image. It can be set to individual color hue.
Yl-R
Yl-R-R
R
R-R-Mg
R-Mg
Yl-Yl-R
Mg
Yl
[(PHASE)]
G-Yl
Mg-B
[(SAT)]
B
G
Cy-G
B-Cy
Cy
rr General settings
Use the camera with the factory settings.
rr Advanced settings
[R (PHASE)]/[R‑R‑Mg (PHASE)]/[R‑Mg (PHASE)]/[Mg (PHASE)]/[Mg‑B (PHASE)]/[B (PHASE)]/[B‑Cy (PHASE)]/[Cy (PHASE)]/[Cy‑G (PHASE)]/[G
(PHASE)]/[G‑Yl (PHASE)]/[Yl (PHASE)]/[Yl‑Yl‑R (PHASE)]/[Yl‑R (PHASE)]/[Yl‑R‑R (PHASE)]: Changes the phases. + makes it rotate clockwise, and
− makes it rotate counter-clockwise.
[R (SAT)]/[R‑R‑Mg (SAT)]/[R‑Mg (SAT)]/[Mg (SAT)]/[Mg‑B (SAT)]/[B (SAT)]/[B‑Cy (SAT)]/[Cy (SAT)]/[Cy‑G (SAT)]/[G (SAT)]/[G‑Yl (SAT)]/[Yl (SAT)]/
[Yl‑Yl‑R (SAT)]/[Yl‑R (SAT)]/[Yl‑R‑R (SAT)]: Changes the saturation.
Black control function
This function sets the black level that is to be the reference of luminance.
rr General settings
[MASTER PED]: Sets the reference black level. RGB also changes by changing this setting. − makes the black color darker, and + makes it less dark.
rr Advanced settings
Configure the settings in the main menu → [SCENE FILE] → [RGB BLACK CONTROL SETTING].
[R PED]: Sets the pedestal level of Rch.
[G PED]: Sets the pedestal level of Gch.
[B PED]: Sets the pedestal level of Bch.
[PEDESTAL OFFSET]: Sets whether to keep the values set for each item of [R PED], [G PED], and [B PED] or reset them when automatic black
balance adjustment is performed.
Gamma function
This function optimizes the tone of images.
rr General settings
[GAMMA MODE SEL]: Selects a gamma mode from seven types.
rr Advanced settings
Configure the settings in the main menu → [SCENE FILE] → [GAMMA SETTING].
[MASTER GAMMA]: Sets the master gamma in 0.01 steps.
ffWhen [FILM‑REC] is selected in [GAMMA MODE SEL]
[F‑REC DYNAMIC LVL]: Sets dynamic range.
[F‑REC BLACK STR LVL]: Sets black stretch.
ffWhen [VIDEO‑REC] is selected in [GAMMA MODE SEL]
[V‑REC KNEE SLOPE]: Sets knee slope.
[V‑REC KNEE POINT]: Sets knee point.
[BLACK GAMMA]: Sets the gamma curve compression and expansion of dark areas.
[B. GAMMA RANGE]: Sets the maximum level to perform compression/expansion.
Knee function
This function sets the compression of video signals to prevent halation in images.
rr General settings
Use the camera with the factory settings.
– 57 –
Chapter 4 Shooting — Adjusting image quality
rr Advanced settings
Configure the settings in the main menu → [SCENE FILE] → [KNEE SETTING].
[KNEE MODE]: Sets the operation mode of knee function ([AUTO]/[MANUAL]/[OFF]).
ffWhen [AUTO] is selected in [KNEE SETTING]
[A.KNEE RESPONSE]: Sets the speed of response. Smaller values make the response faster.
ffWhen [MANUAL] is selected in [KNEE SETTING]
[KNEE MASTER POINT]: Sets the knee point position in 0.5% steps.
[KNEE MASTER SLOPE]: Sets the knee inclination.
[KNEE MASTER SLOPE Rch]: Sets the knee inclination of Rch.
[KNEE MASTER SLOPE Bch]: Sets the knee inclination of Bch.
High color function
This function sets the color dynamic range.
rr General settings
[HI‑COLOR SW]: Turns the mode that expands the color dynamic range [ON]/[OFF].
[HI‑COLOR LVL]: Selects the level of mode that expands the color dynamic range.
rr Advanced settings
Use the camera in a general settings.
White clip function
This function sets the brightest part of video signals to be not brighter than a certain level.
rr General settings
Use the camera with the factory settings.
rr Advanced settings
Configure the settings in the main menu → [SCENE FILE] → [WHITE CLIP SETTING].
[WHITE CLIP]: Turns the white clip function [ON]/[OFF]. When the function is [ON], the setting value of [WHITE CLIP LVL] is enabled.
[WHITE CLIP LVL]: Sets the white clip level.
[Rch CLIP LVL]: Sets the clip level of Rch for white clips.
[Bch CLIP LVL]: Sets the clip level of Bch for white clips.
– 58 –
Chapter 4 Shooting — Setting the electronic shutter
Setting the electronic shutter
Shutter mode
The shutter modes available on the electronic shutter of the camera and selectable shutter speeds are as follows.
Using a fixed shutter speed
ffTo remove flicker caused by lighting
ffTo shoot fast-moving subjects clearly
Using the synchro scan mode
ffTo shoot so that stripe patterns in the horizontal direction are reduced when shooting on the monitor screen
ffTo shoot moving subjects with special effects
Adjusting with the <SEL/PUSH SET> dial button and <MODE/MENU CANCEL> button
The shutter mode can be switched and adjusted using the <SEL/PUSH SET> dial button and <MODE/MENU CANCEL> button.
Enabling shutter mode
1Press the <SEL/PUSH SET> dial button.
[SHUTTER ON] indication appears in the center of the screen. The shutter speed value is indicated and the shutter is enabled.
If you press the dial button again, [SHUTTER OFF] indication appears in the center of the screen and the shutter mode is disabled.
Every press of the dial button switches [SHUTTER ON]/[SHUTTER OFF].
Changing the shutter mode setting
1Press the <SEL/PUSH SET> dial button and enable the shutter mode.
[SHUTTER ON] indication appears in the center of the screen.
2Press the <MODE/MENU CANCEL> button and select a shutter mode.
Every press of the button switches the modes as follows, and the selected mode is highlighted in orange.
Shutter mode → variable frame rate mode → white balance variable mode
ffVariable frame rate mode can be selected only when [ON] is set in the main menu → [SCENE FILE] → [VFR].
ffWhite balance variable mode can be selected only when [VAR] is set in the main menu → [SW MODE] → [W.BAL PRESET], and the <WHITE
BAL> switch is set to the <PRST> position.
3Press the <SEL/PUSH SET> dial button and select shutter mode or synchro shutter mode.
Each time the button is pressed, the normal shutter mode and synchro shutter mode will be toggled.
4Turn the <SEL/PUSH SET> dial button upward/downward and change the settings.
In synchro shutter mode, you can change the mode quickly by turning the button while it is pressed.
5Press the <MODE/MENU CANCEL> button several times until the highlight of the mode disappears.
@@NOTE
tt The synchro scan display can be switched to [sec] (second) or [deg] (degree) in the main menu → [SCENE FILE] → [SYNC SCAN TYPE].
tt Also, synchro scan setting can be made in the main menu → [SCENE FILE] → [SYNCHRO SCAN].
tt Once selected, the shutter speed value and synchro scan speed value are saved even after the camera is turned off.
tt Whichever mode the electronic shutter is used in, the higher the shutter speed, the lower the sensitivity of the camera becomes.
tt When the aperture is in the automatic mode, it will increasingly open and the depth of focus will become shallower as the shutter speed is increased.
tt Under lighting conditions using fluorescent lighting or other discharge tube, horizontal stripes might appear on screen. If this happens, this can be
improved by adjusting the shutter speed.
tt A subject that quickly crosses the camera may appear distorted when shot. This is due to the method applied for reading the signals from the pickup
device (MOS sensor), and is not a malfunction.
Viewfinder screen display for shutter
For details, refer to “Screen status display” (page 142).
– 59 –
Chapter 4 Shooting — Flash band compensation (FBC) function
Flash band compensation (FBC) function
The camera is equipped with a function for compensating and reducing band-like interference (called “flash band”) that occurs due to the MOS pickup
device when shooting in environments where flash strobe light such as that from still cameras is present.
Change over time
Flash firing
Shot image
(FBC OFF)
Flash band
Setting the flash band compensation function
Use after assigning the flash band compensation function to the USER button.
By pressing the USER button that is assigned with the flash band compensation function, the function turns on, and flash strobe from a still camera, etc.
can be detected and compensated.
For details, refer to “Assigning functions to the USER buttons” (page 38).
When the flash band compensation function is enabled, [FBC] is displayed on the status screen.
mP2
1 5 9 9 min
SIMUL
2 1 9 9 min
SCEN E 1
DRS
F BC
AREA
@@NOTE
tt When the flash strobe lights, the following phenomena may occur. These are due to the flash band compensation function and are not malfunctions.
- Moving subjects look as if they have been stopped for a moment.
- The resolution drops when the flash strobe lights.
- Horizontal lines appear in the video when the flash strobe lights.
Using the flash band compensation function
The flash band compensation function is activated when there are large changes in brightness at the bottom of the screen regardless of whether there
is flash strobe light. The flash band compensation function may be activated depending on the shooting environment such as where a bright window has
zoomed in and then out. So, we recommend use of this function in shooting environments where flash strobe lighting is anticipated.
Even if flash strobe lighting occurs, sufficient flash band compensation function effect may not be obtained in some shooting environments.
Flash band compensation function operation conditions
ffThe conditions the flash band compensation function can be used in are 59.94i, 59.94P, 50i, or 50P mode and when the electronic shutter, digital
zoom, and variable frame rate functions are not in operation.
ffEven if the flash band compensation function is enabled, the flash band compensation function is forcibly disabled if the camera is changed to a mode
where the flash band compensation function cannot be used.
To use the function again, return to a mode where the function can be used, and press the USER button to turn on the flash band compensation
function.
The flash band compensation function is disabled once the power is turned off.
– 60 –
Chapter 4 Shooting — Variable frame rate (VFR) recording function
Variable frame rate (VFR) recording function
This camera can shoot quick motion (undercrank) or slow motion (overcrank) video in 1080P and in the AVC‑I100 mode.
You can select native (PN) recording mode and standard (OVER) recording.
In native recording, quick motion and slow motion effects can be obtained without processing recorded images in nonlinear recording system. In
standard recording, quick motion and slow motion effects can be obtained by processing recorded images in nonlinear recording system.
Native variable frame rate recording
1Set [1080‑59.94P] ([1080‑50P]) in the main menu → [SYSTEM MODE] → [LINE&FREQ].
2Set either one of [AVC‑I100/30PN] and [AVC‑I100/24PN] ([AVC‑I100/25PN]) in the main menu → [SYSTEM MODE] → [REC
FORMAT].
3Set [ON] in the main menu → [SCENE FILE] → [VFR].
4Set the frame rate according to the shooting conditions in the main menu → [SCENE FILE] → [FRAME RATE].
[FRAME RATE] can be changed using the <SEL/PUSH SET> dial button. For details, refer to “Direct menu operation” (page 73).
5Press the recording button.
Recording starts in native variable frame rate mode.
rr Frame rate and effect
Quick motion (undercrank) or slow motion (overcrank) effect can be obtained by the following frame rate settings.
[SYSTEM MODE]
[LINE&FREQ]
Shooting frame rate that can be selected
[REC FORMAT]
[AVC‑I100/30PN]
[1fps], [2fps], [4fps], [6fps],
[9fps], [12fps], [15fps], [18fps],
[20fps], [21fps], [22fps],
[24fps], [25fps], [26fps],
[27fps], [28fps]
[AVC‑I100/24PN]
[1fps], [2fps], [4fps], [6fps],
[9fps], [12fps], [15fps], [18fps],
[20fps], [21fps], [22fps]
[AVC‑I100/25PN]
[30fps]
[32fps], [34fps], [36fps],
[40fps], [44fps], [48fps],
[54fps], [60fps]
[24fps]
[25fps], [26fps], [27fps],
[28fps], [30fps], [32fps],
[34fps], [36fps], [40fps],
[44fps], [48fps], [54fps],
[60fps]
[1fps], [2fps], [4fps], [6fps],
[9fps], [12fps], [15fps], [18fps],
[20fps], [21fps], [22fps],
[23fps], [24fps]
[25fps]
[26fps], [27fps], [28fps],
[30fps], [32fps], [34fps],
[37fps], [42fps], [45fps],
[48fps], [50fps]
Effect on playback
Quick motion
(Quicker in smaller value)
Standard
Slow motion
(Slower in smaller value)
Audio recording
Not available
Available
Not available
[1080‑59.94P]
[1080‑50P]
@@NOTE
tt During native variable frame rate recording, pre-recording, loop recording, interval recording, one-shot recording, dual codec recording, and one-clip
recording can not be performed.
tt Audio cannot be recorded. At this time, no audio is output and
is displayed over the audio level meter. When the recording starts, [VFR ON,
NO AUDIO RECORDING] is displayed.
tt Time code is fixed to recording run.
tt The screen may be distorted when changing the frame rate setting.
tt Auto iris and auto focus do not function when the frame rate is set to [9fps] or lower, and when the shutter speed is set to less than 1/12. They must be
operated manually.
tt When the frame rate is set to [9fps] or lower, the shutter setting is forcibly disabled and shutter speed settings cannot be changed.
tt Audio can be recorded when the recording format is [AVC‑I100/24PN] and the frame rate is [24fps], and when the recording format is [AVC‑I100/30PN]
([AVC‑I100/25PN]) and the frame rate is [30fps] ([25fps]). In this case, the time code can be set to free run.
When the frame rate is set to lower than [12fps], the shutter speed is forcibly set to the same time value as the frame rate. Shutter speed setting
cannot be changed.
Standard variable frame rate recording (pull-down recording)
1Set [1080‑59.94P] ([1080‑50P]) in the main menu → [SYSTEM MODE] → [LINE&FREQ].
2Set [AVC‑I100/60P] or [AVC‑I100/50P] in the main menu → [SYSTEM MODE] → [REC FORMAT].
3Set [ON] in the main menu → [SCENE FILE] → [VFR].
4Set the frame rate according to the shooting conditions in the main menu → [SCENE FILE] → [FRAME RATE].
[FRAME RATE] can be changed using the <SEL/PUSH SET> dial button. For details, refer to “Direct menu operation” (page 73).
5Press the recording button.
Recording starts in standard variable frame rate.
– 61 –
Chapter 4 Shooting — Variable frame rate (VFR) recording function
@@NOTE
tt During standard variable frame rate recording, pre-recording, loop recording, interval recording, one-shot recording, dual codec recording, and one-clip
recording can not be performed.
tt Audio can be recorded.
tt Auto iris, auto focus, and auto tracking white balance do not function when the frame rate is set to [9fps] or lower, or when the shutter speed is set to
lower than 1/12. They must be operated manually.
– 62 –
Chapter 4 Shooting — Selecting audio input and adjusting recording levels
Selecting audio input and adjusting recording levels
The camera supports independent 4-channel sound recording in all recording formats (HD, SD).
You can switch audio input recorded on the various channels between the built-in microphone, an external microphone, or a connected audio device.
Selecting audio input signals
Select the audio signal to be recorded to audio channel 1/2.
Audio channel 3/4 is automatically determined by the <CH1 SELECT> and <CH2 SELECT> settings.
<CH1 SELECT> switch
Subjects recorded on channel 1
Subjects recorded on channel 3
<INT(L)>
L audio of built-in microphone
Microphone and device connected to <AUDIO
INPUT 1>
<INPUT1>
Microphone and device connected to <AUDIO
INPUT 1>
L audio of built-in microphone
<INPUT2>
Microphone and device connected to <AUDIO
INPUT 2>
L audio of built-in microphone
<CH2 SELECT> switch
Subjects recorded on channel 2
Subjects recorded on channel 4
<INT(R)>
R audio of built-in microphone
Microphone and device connected to <AUDIO
INPUT 2>
<INPUT1>
Microphone and device connected to <AUDIO
INPUT 1>
R audio of built-in microphone
<INPUT2>
Microphone and device connected to <AUDIO
INPUT 2>
R audio of built-in microphone
You can set the number of audio bits recorded in accordance with the format.
For details, refer to “System modes and recording functions” (page 74).
Format
Number of audio bits
[AVC‑I100]
[AVC‑I50]
You can select [24BIT] and [16BIT].
You can select the main menu → [SYSTEM MODE] → [AUDIO SMPL RES].
[AVC‑G50]
[AVC‑G25]
[24BIT] fixed.
[AVC‑G12]
[DVCPRO HD]
[DVCPRO50]
[DVCPRO]
[DV]
[16BIT] fixed.
Using the built-in microphone
1Set the <CH1 SELECT> switch to the <INT(L)> position.
The L audio signal of the built-in microphone is recorded on audio channel 1.
2Set the <CH2 SELECT> switch to the <INT(R)> position.
The R audio signal of the built-in microphone is recorded on audio channel 2.
@@NOTE
tt You can switch among [STEREO], [MONO], and [OFF] of the built-in microphone in the main menu → [AUDIO SETUP] → [INPUT SETTING] → [INT
MIC].
tt To decrease wind noise in the microphone, set [ON] in the main menu → [AUDIO SETUP] → [RECORDING CH SETTING] → [MIC LOWCUT CH1] to
[MIC LOWCUT CH4].
Using the external microphone and audio device
1Connect the external microphone or audio device to the <AUDIO INPUT 1>/<AUDIO INPUT 2> terminal.
2Switch the connected audio input with the <INPUT 1>/<INPUT 2> switch.
Setting
Description
Input level
<LINE>
Use this setting when connected to an audio device.
You can select [+4dB] and [0dB].
You can select the main menu → [AUDIO SETUP] → [INPUT
SETTING] → [INPUT1 LINE LEVEL]/[INPUT2 LINE LEVEL].
The factory setting is [0dB].
<MIC>
Use this setting when connected to a dynamic microphone.
You can select [−40dB], [−50dB], and [−60dB].
You can select the main menu → [AUDIO SETUP] → [INPUT
SETTING] → [INPUT1 MIC LEVEL]/[INPUT2 MIC LEVEL].
The factory setting is [−50dB].
<+48V>
Use this setting when connected to a microphone (phantom
microphone) that requires a +48V power source.
You can select [−40dB], [−50dB], and [−60dB].
You can select the main menu → [AUDIO SETUP] → [INPUT
SETTING] → [INPUT1 MIC LEVEL]/[INPUT2 MIC LEVEL].
The factory setting is [−50dB].
– 63 –
Chapter 4 Shooting — Selecting audio input and adjusting recording levels
@@NOTE
tt Set the input level to [−50dB] when using AG‑MC200G (optional).
Adjusting the recording level
The adjustment dial on the camera has manual adjustment and auto adjustment.
Automatic adjustment
rr Setting audio channels 1/2
1Set the <CH1>/<CH2> switch to <AUTO>.
When set, the camera moves to auto adjustment mode and the audio recording level is automatically set in accordance with the input level.
ffYou can set audio channels 1/2 separately using the switch.
ffWhen set to <AUTO>, the following operations are disabled.
- Changing the recording level with the <AUDIO LEVEL CH1>/<AUDIO LEVEL CH2> dial.
- Setting in the main menu → [AUDIO SETUP] → [RECORDING CH SETTING] → [LIMITER CH1]/[LIMITER CH2].
rr Setting audio channels 3/4
1Set [ON] in the main menu → [AUDIO SETUP] → [RECORDING CH SETTING] → [AUTO LEVEL CH3]/[AUTO LEVEL CH4].
The camera moves to auto adjustment mode and the audio recording level is automatically set in accordance with the input level.
ffYou can set audio channels 3/4 separately with the switch.
ffWhen set to <AUTO>, the following operations are disabled.
- Recording level settings in the main menu → [AUDIO SETUP] → [RECORDING CH SETTING] → [LEVEL CONTROL CH3]/[LEVEL CONTROL
CH4]
- Setting in the main menu → [AUDIO SETUP] → [RECORDING CH SETTING] → [LIMITER CH3]/[LIMITER CH4].
ffRecording level of audio signal is adjusted automatically. Therefore, depending on the ambient sound, the zoom sound may be recorded during
high-speed zoom operation. In this case, adjust the recording level manually.
Manual adjustment
rr Setting audio channels 1/2
1Set the <CH1>/<CH2> switch to <MANU>.
2Set in the main menu → [AUDIO SETUP] → [OUTPUT SETTING] → [AUDIO OUT] to [CH1/CH2] so that the audio level meter
display shows [CH1] and [CH2].
Make sure that the audio level meter display is [CH1] and [CH2].
3Adjust with the <AUDIO LEVEL CH1>/<AUDIO LEVEL CH2> dial.
If the audio meter indication exceeds 0 dB, the vertical red line of 0 dB thickens to indicate that the input audio volume is excessive.
Adjust to keep lower than 0 dB.
rr Setting audio channels 3/4
1Set [OFF] in the main menu → [AUDIO SETUP] → [RECORDING CH SETTING] → [AUTO LEVEL CH3]/[AUTO LEVEL CH4].
2Set and adjust in the main menu → [AUDIO SETUP] → [RECORDING CH SETTING] → [LEVEL CONTROL CH3]/[LEVEL CONTROL
CH4].
The higher the value, the higher the level.
The factory setting is [70].
rr Recording standard level
You can select [12dB]/[18dB]/[20dB] in the main menu → [AUDIO SETUP] → [RECORDING CH SETTING] → [HEADROOM].
Common settings for channels 1 through 4.
[20dB]: Select to match to the Panasonic AJ series camera recorder for broadcasting.
[12dB]: Select to match to the Panasonic AG‑HPX170 series camera recorder for business use.
Adjustment with the <F.AUDIO LEVEL> dial
Adjust not to reach the excessive input while watching the level meter on the LCD monitor or viewfinder screen.
ffSelect the audio channel you want to adjust beforehand in the main menu → [AUDIO SETUP] → [RECORDING CH SETTING] → [FRONT VR
SELECT].
ffAdjust with the <F.AUDIO LEVEL> dial.
Displaying the audio level detailed
Press the <DISP/MODE CHK> switch towards the <CHK> side to check the display on the audio screen of the mode check screen. For details, refer to
“Mode check display” (page 147).
– 64 –
Chapter 4 Shooting — Getting position information using the GPS
Getting position information using the GPS
The GPS is built-in the camera. You can record the position information using GPS.
During playback, the recorded information can be displayed on the screen. For details, refer to “Mode check display” (page 147).
Set [ON] in the main menu → [OTHER FUNCTIONS] → [GPS].
ff[GPS] flashes on the LCD monitor and viewfinder screens and the camera gets prepared for positioning.
ffOnce positioning completes, [GPS] illuminates and GPS signal reception is indicated by bars in four levels.
ffIf [HOLD] is set in the main menu → [OTHER FUNCTIONS] → [P.OFF GPS DATA], the GPS position information can be retained.
ffLongitude, latitude, and date/time can be viewed in the mode check.
@@NOTE
tt If it cannot position even after waiting several minutes, it means that the GPS signals are weak and difficult to receive.
tt Position in the open space with a clear view of the sky.
tt The followings are locations where the signals from the GPS satellite cannot be properly received. Thus, you may not be able to position or you have
large margin of errors.
- Indoors
- Near buildings or a canyon of buildings
- In underground shopping areas
- In forests
- While moving in trains or automobiles
- Inside tunnels
– 65 –
Chapter 4 Shooting — Special recording functions
Special recording functions
You can use special recording functions such as pre-recording and loop recording by setting the menu.
Pre-recording
This function enables recording of video and audio from a fixed amount of time (approx. 3 seconds during HD recording, and approx. 7 seconds during
SD recording) before recording is actually started.
Operation to start recording
Operation to stop recording
(Time)
Actual recording time
Pre-recording time
1Check the settings of each item in the main menu → [SYSTEM MODE].
For details on system modes in which the pre-recording function can be used, refer to the table in “System modes and recording functions”
(page 74).
For details on menu operations, refer to “Setting menu basic operations” (page 116).
2Set [ON] in the main menu → [RECORDING SETUP] → [PRE REC].
3Press the REC button.
ff[P‑REC] is displayed while recording, and [P‑] is displayed while paused. (page 145)
@@NOTE
tt [P‑REC] indication when [PRE REC] is set to [OFF]
When [PRE REC] is set to [OFF], [REC] is displayed until recording of video or audio to the P2 card is completely finished after recording is stopped.
Refer to “One clip recording mode status display” (page 145) for information about the [P‑REC] indicator.
tt Press the USER button to which [PRE REC] is assigned to simply toggle between [ON]/[OFF] of [PRE REC]. For details, refer to “Assigning functions
to the USER buttons” (page 38).
tt Video and audio according to the preset time sometimes cannot be recorded in the following cases:
- Immediately after the power is turned on
- After recording-related settings have been altered in the setting menu
- Immediately after the P2 card is inserted
- After playback or recording check is performed
tt The pre-recording function does not function in the following cases:
- When an item other than [NORMAL] is selected in the main menu → [RECORDING SETUP] → [RECORDING]
Interval recording
The camera will record one frame at each set time interval.
1 frame recording
1 frame recording
1 frame recording
(Time)
[INTERVAL TIME] set time
[INTERVAL TIME] set time
1Set all items in the main menu → [SYSTEM MODE].
2Set [INTERVAL] in the main menu → [RECORDING SETUP] → [RECORDING].
3Set the time in the main menu → [RECORDING SETUP] → [RECORDING SETTING] → [INTERVAL TIME].
4Press the REC button.
ffThe camera will repeat the operation of one frame recording at each set time interval.
ffTo stop recording, press the <(> button.
ffTo clear settings, set [NORMAL] in the main menu → [RECORDING SETUP] → [RECORDING].
ffWhen [OFF] is set in the main menu → [RECORDING SETUP] → [RECORDING SETTING] → [RECORDING HOLD], interval recording settings
are cleared by turning off the camera.
ff[I‑REC] is displayed while recording, and [I‑] is displayed while paused. However, if the setting in step 3 is less than two seconds, [I‑REC] flashes
according to the set interval time.
ffWhen recording is stopped, [I‑] flashes.
@@NOTE
tt Pre-recording and one-clip recording will not operate.
tt Audio is not recorded.
tt Recorded data (data recorded until the camera was stopped) is included in one file.
– 66 –
Chapter 4 Shooting — Special recording functions
One-shot recording
Recording takes place once for the set amount of time.
1Set all items in the main menu → [SYSTEM MODE].
2Select [ONE SHOT] in the main menu → [RECORDING SETUP] → [RECORDING].
3Set the time with [ONE SHOT TIME] in the main menu → [RECORDING SETUP] → [RECORDING SETTING].
4Press the REC button.
ffOnce recording has taken place for the set amount of time, recording will pause.
ffTo stop recording, press the <(> button.
ffTo clear settings, set [NORMAL] in the main menu → [RECORDING SETUP] → [RECORDING].
ffWhen [OFF] is set in the main menu → [RECORDING SETUP] → [RECORDING SETTING] → [RECORDING HOLD], one-shot recording settings
are cleared by turning off the camera.
ff[I‑REC] is displayed while recording, and [I‑] is displayed while paused.
ffWhen recording is stopped, [I‑] flashes.
@@NOTE
tt While in operation, other operations are unavailable.
tt Pre-recording and one-clip recording will not operate.
tt Audio is not recorded.
tt Recorded data (data recorded until the camera was stopped) is included in one file.
tt When one-shot recording is continuously performed, the recording operation may be slower.
Loop recording
ffThis function successively records to two microP2 memory cards inserted in the microP2 card slots. You cannot combine microP2 cards and P2 cards.
ffWhen there is no more free space on the card, recording returns to the first card, and recording is continued while erasing existing data already saved
on that card.
For details, refer to “Dividing clips recorded on P2 cards” (page 36).
1st card
No recorded content
Before loop recording starts
2nd card
Content recorded
Start recording
A
Recording cycle 1
Recording cycle 2
C
B
B
1Check the settings of each item in the main menu → [SYSTEM MODE].
For details on system modes in which the loop recording function can be used, refer to the table in “System modes and recording functions”
(page 74).
For details on menu operations, refer to “Setting menu basic operations” (page 116).
2Set [LOOP] in the main menu → [RECORDING SETUP] → [RECORDING].
3Press the REC button.
ffRecording is started.
ffTo stop recording, press the <(> button.
ffTo clear settings, set [NORMAL] in the main menu → [RECORDING SETUP] → [RECORDING].
ffWhen [OFF] is set in the main menu → [RECORDING SETUP] → [RECORDING SETTING] → [RECORDING HOLD], loop recording settings are
cleared by turning off the camera.
ff[L‑REC] is displayed while recording, and [L‑] is displayed while paused. When loop recording cannot be performed due to memory shortage, etc.,
[LOOP] flashes.
@@NOTE
tt When this function is used, use two microP2 memory cards with at least one minute of free space each.
tt The remaining time of the microP2 memory card displayed in the mode check screen displays the standard recording time in accordance with the
recording format. When loop recording is stopped immediately after an old recording is erased, the time recorded on the card is sometimes less than
the indicated time.
tt Pre-recording and one-clip recording will not operate.
tt It may take time for recording to stop. The subsequent operation is not accepted until LED of microP2 memory card access stops blinking and stays
lighted on.
tt During loop recording, all LEDs of microP2 memory card access on the microP2 memory cards used for recording are lighted or blink orange. Loop
recording stops when these microP2 memory cards are removed. Be careful.
tt Loop recording may stop when the input reference signal of the generator lock is disrupted during loop recording.
– 67 –
Chapter 4 Shooting — Special recording functions
One-clip recording
You can record a single recording (from start to stop of recording) not as one clip but as a clip integrating several recordings.
Record start
Record start
First recording
Record start
Second recording
Record stop
Nth recording
Record stop
Record stop
A group of linked clips
* A maximum of 99 recordings can be linked. When the 99th recording is finished, linking of clips ends automatically and the next
reading will be a new clip.
1Set [ON] in the main menu → [RECORDING SETUP] → [ONE CLIP REC].
When one-clip recording mode is selected, [1‑CLIP] is displayed.
2Press the REC button.
The first recording starts and [START 1*CLIP] is displayed.
Thereafter, each time recording takes place the clips are automatically linked, making a single group up to a maximum of 99 recordings.
Recording as a new clip
When you want to split the clip as a new clip, finish linking clips using one of the following operations.
ffPress and hold the <(> button for approximately two seconds while recording is paused. (When operating while recording is paused)
ffPress and hold the REC button for approximately two seconds during recording, to end recording. (When operating while recording.)
By these operations, clip linking ends and [END 1‑CLIP] is displayed. A new separate clip will start at the next recording.
@@NOTE
tt In the following cases, the camera finishes clip linking and records as a new clip.
- When the power is turned off
- When a P2 card recorded immediately before is removed
- When the P2 card is formatted or the clips are deleted (when the original linked clip no longer exists)
tt When the menu and thumbnails are displayed, clip linking cannot be ended even if you press and hold the <(> button for approximately two seconds
or longer.
Ending one-clip recording mode
Set [OFF] in the main menu → [RECORDING SETUP] → [ONE CLIP REC].
Cueing up linked parts of clips
Each time recording starts, a text memo is automatically added to the recording start position so that you can cue up when playing back. You can also
check the thumbnail of its position.
To automatically add a text memo to the recording start point, set [ON] in the main menu → [RECORDING SETUP] → [START TEXT MEMO].
To view or play back the point of the added text memo, select [TEXT MEMO CLIPS] in the main menu → [CLIP] → [REPOSITION] and place the cursor
on the target clip.
For details, refer to “Playing back from the text memo position” (page 104).
To cue up the text memo position when playing back, set [CLIP&TEXT MEMO] in the main menu → [OTHER FUNCTIONS] → [SEEK POS SEL] and
press <%>/<)> while playback is paused.
Proxy recording in one-clip recording mode
You can carry out proxy recording in one-clip recording mode.
The group proxy data also can be combined as the same type of linked clip so that you can handle it as a single clip with the P2 Viewer Plus, etc.
However, when recording proxy data on an SD memory card, be careful of the following points.
ffWhen you remove the SD memory card and replace it while continuously making clip links, proxy recording will not take place on the SD memory card
until the subsequent clips are linked. Use after making sure that there is sufficient available space and number of files (maximum of 1000 clips can be
recorded).
ffWhen continuing proxy recording after replacing the SD memory card part-way through, carry out the following operation.
-- Press the <(> button for approximately two seconds to finish linking, and start recording as a new clip.
ffThe proxy data on the SD memory card that was discontinued during recording is not recognized as proxy data for the clip recorded on the P2 card
and will remain incomplete.
When using one-clip recording mode
ffWhen interval recording, one-shot recording, loop recording, and variable frame rate recording functions are selected, it will not operate.
ffWhile continuing clip linking, menu and thumbnail operations are subject to the following restrictions. They can be operated after pressing the <(>
button continuously for approximately two seconds and ending clip linking.
-- You cannot change the following menu items.
[LINE&FREQ], [REC FORMAT], [CAMERA MODE], [AUDIO SMPL RES], [ASPECT CONV], [SCAN REVERSE]
-- You can change the variable frame rate recording function to [ON] in the main menu → [SCENE FILE] → [VFR], even while continuously linking
clips. In this case, clip linking ends and subsequent recordings become separate clips each time.
– 68 –
Chapter 4 Shooting — Special recording functions
-- When reading/exporting to the SD memory card and reading setting files, the following menu items cannot be executed.
Main menu → [SCENE FILE] → [LOAD/SAVE/INITIALIZE]
All items in the main menu → [CARD FUNCTIONS]
Main menu → [OTHER FUNCTIONS] → [USER FILE]
Main menu → [OTHER FUNCTIONS] → [USER FILE] → [INITIALIZE]
Main menu → [OTHER FUNCTIONS] → [MENU INITIALIZE]
-- The following thumbnail items cannot be selected and operated.
Main menu → [CLIP] → [COPY]
ffIn order to make it possible to link clips in the next recording, the processing time required to end recording may take slightly longer than standard
recording.
ffWhen playing back, fade processing of unlinked audio will not be done at the time recordings are linked within clips.
ffWhen editing a clip with a large number of links using nonlinear editing software, etc., the software may not operate properly depending upon the type
of software. (As of March 2014)
ffRefer to the support desk at the following website for the latest information on software whose operability has been confirmed.
http://pro-av.panasonic.net/
Simultaneous recording
This function records the same image onto two microP2 memory cards when the two microP2 memory cards are inserted into two slots.
Memory card recording time
Start recording
End recording (no remaining space)
End recording
Start recording
Slot 1
A clip
Stand-by
Slot 2
A clip
Stand-by
B clip
B clip
C clip
Selecting [ON] in the main menu → [RECORDING SETUP] → [SIMUL REC] will set the camera to simultaneous recording mode.
The remaining time that can be simultaneously recorded (the remaining time of the memory card that has less available recording space) is displayed in
the media remaining space indicator on the screen, and [SIMUL] is displayed.
When the microP2 memory card in the slot with less remaining recording space becomes full, simultaneous recording will stop.
When starting simultaneous recording again, replace the microP2 memory card in slot 1 with a new microP2 memory card, and press the REC button.
When the simultaneous recording cannot be performed, [SIMUL] indication is displayed with a diagonal line.
If you press the REC button without replacing the microP2 memory card, normal recording will be performed on the microP2 memory card in slot 2 (the
slot with remaining memory space).
For details on system modes in which simultaneous recording can be used, refer to the table in “System modes and recording functions” (page 74).
@@NOTE
tt Start recording when two microP2 memory cards are recognized. When recording is started before both microP2 memory cards are recognized,
normal recording is performed using either microP2 memory card. The card status is checked after recording ends. At that time, if both cards are
recognized, simultaneous recording is performed.
tt When [1080‑59.94P] or [1080‑50P] is set in the main menu → [SYSTEM MODE] → [LINE&FREQ], simultaneous recording is not performed.
tt Simultaneous recording cannot be used together with loop recording, interval recording, or one-shot recording.
tt If recording stops because a recording malfunction occurs in one of the microP2 memory cards during simultaneous recording, the camera will
continue recording onto the other microP2 memory card. However, if the card is removed while accessing, recording will stop.
tt If there is space in one of the microP2 memory cards after simultaneous recording has ended, the microP2 memory card with space will automatically
be the recording target.
Press the REC button again to record normally.
tt If only one microP2 memory card is inserted when simultaneous recording mode is set, the camera will record normally.
tt The final clip delete function after simultaneous recording is disabled.
Hot swap recording
When microP2 memory cards are inserted into two microP2 memory card slots, recording can be performed continuously across two cards.
Also, the card other than the one currently being recorded to can be swapped and recording can be continued on three or more cards (hot swap
recording).
Note, however, microP2 memory card recognition might slow down depending on the timing (immediately after pre-recording or before and after
continuous recording across two card slots) when the microP2 memory card is inserted into the vacant card slot. When inserting microP2 memory card,
make sure that there is at least one minute of free space on the card to be recorded to.
Pressing the <SLOT SEL> button allows you to change the slot to be recorded to with one touch.
@@NOTE
tt You can perform hot swap recording only in the microP2 memory card slot.
tt Change slots while recording is on stand-by. You cannot change slots during recording.
tt Hot swap playback is not supported.
– 69 –
Chapter 4 Shooting — Special recording functions
Recording check function
ffAfter recording ends, press the <REC CHECK> button automatically to play back approximately three seconds of the latest video and audio.
In this way, you can check whether video has been recorded properly. After playback, the camera is again ready to start recording.
ffHold down the <REC CHECK> button for one second to play back from the last ten seconds of the latest clip. During playback at recording check,
press the <REC CHECK> button again to stop the playback.
Shot mark recording function
Shot mark is the mark added to the thumbnail of each clip to distinguish that clip from others.
Only clips with shot marks attached can be displayed or played back.
Adding shot marks
1Assign [SHOT MARK] to one of [USER1] to [USER8] in the main menu → [USER SW].
2During recording or a pause after recording, press the button to which the shot mark is assigned.
ff[MARK ON] is displayed, and the shot mark is added to the most recently recorded clip.
ffAnother press of the button displays [MARK OFF] and the shot mark disappears.
@@NOTE
tt When the shot mark is added during a recording pause, it is added to the clip recorded immediately before.
tt Shot marks can also be added while the thumbnail is being displayed. (page 104)
tt Shot marks cannot be added during loop recording, interval recording, or one-shot recording. If an operation is invalid, [SHOT MARK INVALID] is
displayed when the button is pressed.
tt During playback, setting or canceling the shot mark is not available. While pausing the playback, setting or canceling the shot mark is available.
tt The following restrictions apply when adding shot marks to combined clips, such as those recorded over multiple microP2 memory cards, or when
deleting them.
- All microP2 memory cards composed of clips must be inserted into the slots.
- A shot mark is added only to the top clip among combined clips.
Text memo recording function
Text memos can be added to any video point while a clip is being recorded or played back.
Only clips with a text memo added can be selected and displayed as thumbnails. Also, thumbnails at text memo positions can be displayed in order and
played back from text memo points, and only required portions can be selected and copied. (page 104)
Adding text memos
1Assign [TEXT MEMO] to one of [USER1] to [USER8] in the main menu → [USER SW].
2During recording or a playback, press the button to which the text memo is assigned.
[TEXT MEMO] is displayed, and the text memo is added to the video clip that was displayed when the button was pressed.
@@NOTE
tt Up to 100 text memos can be recorded to a single clip.
tt Text memos cannot be added during loop recording, interval recording, or one-shot recording. If an operation is invalid, [TEXT MEMO INVALID] is
displayed when the button is pressed.
– 70 –
Chapter 4 Shooting — Convenient shooting functions
Convenient shooting functions
Low angle shooting
When shooting at low angles, releasing the hold cover on the REC button on the handle from the <HOLD> position will allow shooting with the REC
button on the handle.
ffTo prevent accidental operation of the REC button on the handle when it is not in use, keep the hold cover to the <HOLD> position.
Scan reverse shooting
Set [ON] in the main menu → [SYSTEM MODE] → [SCAN REVERSE] to display and record the image in vertically or horizontally reverse.
Zebra patterns display
The camera can display two types of zebra patterns.
Press the <ZEBRA> button displays the zebra pattern that is set in the menu.
Zebra patterns can also be displayed in the video of the monitor output terminal (<SDI OUT>, <GENLOCK IN/VIDEO OUT>, <HDMI OUT>) according
to settings.
The level for zebra pattern display can be set in the main menu → [DISPLAY SETUP].
Item
Description of settings
[ZEBRA1 DETECT]
Sets the extraction level of zebra pattern 1.
[0%]…[109%]
ffFactory setting: [70%]
[ZEBRA2 DETECT]
Sets the extraction level of zebra pattern 2.
[0%]…[109%]
ffFactory setting: [85%]
[ZEBRA2]
Sets on/off of zebra pattern 2 and selects the type.
[ON], [SPOT], [OFF]
ffFactory setting: [SPOT]
[SPOT]: The image level from the setting value of [ZEBRA1 DETECT] to the setting value of [ZEBRA2 DETECT] is displayed in the zebra pattern.
Image level
[109%]
[ZEBRA2]
[ON]
[OFF]
[SPOT]
[ZEBRA2 DETECT]
[ZEBRA1 DETECT]
[0%]
To display the zebra patterns in the video of the monitor output terminal (<SDI OUT>, <GENLOCK IN/VIDEO OUT>, <HDMI OUT>), set in the main
menu → [OUTPUT SEL] → [VIDEO OUT ZEBRA].
Displaying the center marker
Displays when setting an item other than [OFF] in the main menu → [DISPLAY SETUP] → [CENTER MARK].
@@NOTE
tt The center marker display is not displayed in the images of terminals <SDI OUT>, <GENLOCK IN/VIDEO OUT>, and <HDMI OUT>.
Displaying the safety zone marker
The items you select the main menu → [DISPLAY SETUP] → [SAFETY MARK] are displayed.
The size of the safety zone marker can be changed in the main menu → [DISPLAY SETUP] → [SAFETY AREA].
– 71 –
Chapter 4 Shooting — Convenient shooting functions
@@NOTE
tt The safety zone marker display is not displayed in the images of terminals <SDI OUT>, <GENLOCK IN/VIDEO OUT>, and <HDMI OUT>.
Displaying frame marker
Displays when [ON] is set in the main menu → [DISPLAY SETUP] → [FRAME MARK].
Set the angle of view in the main menu → [DISPLAY SETUP] → [FRAME SIG].
Set the outside level in the main menu → [DISPLAY SETUP] → [FRAME LVL].
Checking and displaying the shooting status
<DISP/MODE CHK> switch is the spring switch to check the shooting status of the camera during recording standby or recording.
ffPushing this to the <OFF> side will hide all displays other than operation status displays on the viewfinder and LCD monitor screens, frame display of
the area, counter, marker, and safety zone displays.
ffPushing this towards the <CHK> side will display information on the screen such as setting status of all shooting functions, the list of functions
assigned to the USER buttons, etc. Each press of the button switches the information page.
Changing image size
When recording in 480i/576i mode, you can change the size (aspect ratio) of the recorded image. Select the main menu → [SYSTEM MODE] →
[ASPECT CONV].
[SIDE CROP]: Record using standard 4:3 mode. Cut both the left and right edges.
[LETTER BOX]: Record 16:9 the angle of view. A black band is recorded at the top and bottom of the screen. When set to [LETTER BOX], black bands
at the top and bottom are not displayed because the screen size of the viewfinder and LCD monitor is 16:9. [LT.BOX] is displayed on the screen.
[SQUEEZE]: Camera images are compressed in the horizontal direction when recording. Replaying recorded images on a TV monitor that supports a
wide screen will convert the images to an aspect ratio of 16:9.
Image stabilization function
The image stabilizer function will reduce the amount of hand shake on the image when you shoot while holding the camera recorder in your hand.
The image stabilizer can be switched from enabled/disabled with the <OIS> button.
When the image stabilizer is enabled,
is displayed in the viewfinder and LCD monitor.
When using a tripod, disabling the image stabilizer function will allow you to obtain natural images.
@@NOTE
tt When there is a lot of shaking while shooting and when following a moving subject, the function may not be able to stabilize the image.
Dynamic range stretcher function
You can increase the dynamic range by compressing the image signal for the extremely bright areas that are overexposed during normal shooting while
maintaining contrast.
The knee function, black gamma function, and gamma mode function do not work when the dynamic range stretcher function is activated.
Select [ON] in the main menu → [SCENE FILE] → [DRS] to operate.
You can change the level of compression in the main menu → [SCENE FILE] → [DRS EFFECT DEPTH].
[ON]/[OFF] of [DRS] can be assigned to the USER button.
Backlight compensation
When shooting a subject in backlight, press the USER button to which the [BACKLIGHT] function is assigned.
The [BACK] is displayed on the screen.
The auto iris control for the backlight compensation prevents darkening of the image of the subject.
Press the USER button again to cancel backlight compensation.
Color bars
Pressing the <BARS> button allows you to display the color bars, which are a convenient tool for adjusting image quality on a TV or external monitor.
Pressing this button again returns the view to the original image.
Four types of color bar ([SMPTE]/[FULL BARS]/[SPLIT]/[ARIB]) can be selected in the main menu → [SW MODE] → [BARS TYPE].
Time stamp function
You can record the date and time of shooting on the images.
Select [ON] in the main menu → [RECORDING SETUP] → [TIME STAMP].
When the time stamp function is [ON], [R] is displayed at the top of the date and time display on the viewfinder and LCD monitor.
ff[R] is not recorded on the actual image.
ffDepending upon the shooting format, the size and location of the lettering of the date and time recorded on the image will be different.
ffThe recorded details will change depending on the settings in the main menu → [DISPLAY SETUP] → [DATE/TIME]. It will not be recorded when the
camera is set to [OFF].
@@NOTE
tt Image on the viewfinder and LCD monitor, and the actual time stamp recorded in the video on <SDI OUT>, <GENLOCK IN/VIDEO OUT>, and <HDMI
OUT> terminals are not displayed. Video recorded in media includes time stamp.
– 72 –
Chapter 4 Shooting — Convenient shooting functions
tt Date and time is recorded at the lower right of the video. It is different from the position of the date and time displayed in the viewfinder and LCD
monitor.
Deleting last clip function
You can delete the last clip you shot.
Press the USER button to which [DEL LAST CLIP] is assigned, [YES]/[NO] appears on the screen.
Select [YES] to delete the last shot clip, [LAST CLIP DELETE OK] appears on the screen.
Not to delete the clip, select [NO].
Waveform monitor function
Press the <WFM> button to display the image waveform. Press the button again to return to the normal display.
ffThe waveform and vector displays can be switched using [WFM MODE] in the main menu → [SW MODE]. The waveform display will only be
displayed on the LCD monitor. The viewfinder does not show the waveform.
ffThe waveform is not displayed while the focus assist function [EXPAND] is active.
ffThe waveform display cannot be recorded.
Direct menu operation
This function changes the settings of values for shutter speed, synchro scan shutter speed, white balance, and frame rate that are displayed on the
screen using the <MODE/MENU CANCEL> button.
ffVariable frame rate mode can be selected only when [ON] is selected in the main menu → [SCENE FILE] → [VFR].
ffWhite balance variable mode can be selected only when [VAR] is set in the main menu → [SW MODE] → [W.BAL PRESET], and the <WHITE BAL>
switch is set to the <PRST> position.
1Press the <MODE/MENU CANCEL> button and select an item to be changed.
Every press of the button shows orange highlight on the selected mode.
2Turn the <SEL/PUSH SET> dial button upward/downward and change the settings.
3Press the <MODE/MENU CANCEL> button several times until the highlight of the mode disappears.
– 73 –
Chapter 4 Shooting — Multi formats
Multi formats
Selecting recording signals
The camera can record HD (1080P, 1080i) signals in the combined format of AVC‑Intra, AVC‑LongG, DVCPRO HD codecs, and can record SD
(480i/576i) signals in the combined format of DVCPRO50, DVCPRO, and DV codecs respectively.
Recording and shooting signals can be selected in the main menu → [SYSTEM MODE].
Setting
Description of settings
[LINE&FREQ]
Select the signal format from 1080P/1080i/720P/480i/576i.
If this setting has been changed, select [YES] on a confirmation message and restart the camera.
[REC FORMAT]
Select the codec of AVC‑Intra, AVC‑LongG, and DVCPRO HD in the HD mode, and select the
codec of DVCPRO50, DVCPRO, and DV in the SD mode.
[AUDIO SMPL RES]
Select the number of audio bits ([24BIT] or [16BIT]) when [REC FORMAT] is [AVC‑I100] or
[AVC‑I50].
At [REC FORMAT] other than these, recording is performed at the number of audio bits fixed to 24
bits or 16 bits. For details, refer to “System modes and recording functions” (page 74).
[ASPECT CONV]
In the SD mode, select the video aspect ratio for recording and output.
[SYSTEM MODE]
@@NOTE
tt When [LINE&FREQ] or [REC FORMAT] is changed, video or audio may be interrupted. This is not a malfunction.
System modes and recording functions
The following shows the relationship between system modes and recording functions on this camera.
ff“l” are supported, and “—” are not supported.
System mode
[LINE&FREQ]
[1080‑59.94P]
[1080‑50P]
[1080‑59.94i]
[1080‑50i]
[720‑59.94P]
[720‑50P]
Recording function
[REC FORMAT]
[CAMERA MODE]
[AVC‑I100/60P]
—
[AVC‑I100/30PN]
—
[AVC‑I100/24PN]
—
[AVC‑G25/60P]
—
[24BIT]
[AVC‑G12/60P]
—
[16BIT]
[AVC‑I100/50P]
—
[AVC‑I100/25PN]
—
[AVC‑G25/50P]
—
[AVC‑G12/50P]
—
[AVC‑I100/60i]
—
[AVC‑I50/60i]
—
[AVC‑G50/60i]
—
[AVC‑G25/60i]
—
[AVC‑G12/60i]
—
[DVCPRO HD/60i]
[60i]
[AVC‑I100/50i]
—
[AVC‑I50/50i]
—
[AVC‑G50/50i]
—
[AVC‑G25/50i]
—
[AVC‑G12/50i]
—
[DVCPRO HD/50i]
[50i]
[AVC‑I100/60P]
—
[AVC‑I50/60P]
—
[AVC‑G50/60P]
—
[AVC‑G25/60P]
—
[AVC‑G12/60P]
—
[DVCPRO HD/60P]
—
[AVC‑I100/50P]
—
[AVC‑I50/50P]
—
[AVC‑G50/50P]
—
[AVC‑G25/50P]
—
[AVC‑G12/50P]
—
[DVCPRO HD/50P]
—
[AUDIO SMPL RES]
Standard recording
Pre-recording
l
l
l
l
—
—
l
—
—
l
l
—
l
l
—
l
l
l
l
—
—
[24BIT]
l
l
—
[16BIT]
l
l
—
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
—
l
l
—
l
l
—
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
—
l
l
—
l
l
—
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
—
l
l
—
l
l
—
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
—
l
l
—
l
l
—
l
l
l
[24BIT]/[16BIT]
[24BIT]/[16BIT]
[24BIT]/[16BIT]
[24BIT]
[16BIT]
[24BIT]/[16BIT]
[24BIT]
[16BIT]
[24BIT]/[16BIT]
[24BIT]
[16BIT]
[24BIT]/[16BIT]
[24BIT]
[16BIT]
– 74 –
Interval recording
Chapter 4 Shooting — Multi formats
System mode
[LINE&FREQ]
[REC FORMAT]
[DVCPRO50/60i]
[480‑59.94i]
Standard recording
Pre-recording
[60i]
l
l
l
[30P]
l
—
—
[60i]
[DVCPRO/60i]
[30P]
[DV/60i]
[DVCPRO50/50i]
[576‑50i]
Recording function
[CAMERA MODE]
l
l
l
l
—
—
[60i]
l
l
l
l
—
—
[50i]
l
l
l
[25P]
l
—
—
[25P]
[DV/50i]
[16BIT]
[16BIT]
l
l
l
l
—
—
[50i]
l
l
l
[25P]
l
—
—
System mode
[LINE&FREQ]
[1080‑59.94P]
[1080‑50P]
[1080‑59.94i]
[1080‑50i]
[720‑59.94P]
[720‑50P]
[CAMERA MODE]
[AVC‑I100/60P]
—
[AVC‑I100/30PN]
—
[AUDIO SMPL RES]
One-shot recording
Loop recording
l
l
One-clip recording
l
[24BIT]/[16BIT]
—
—
—
[AVC‑I100/24PN]
—
—
—
—
[AVC‑G25/60P]
—
[24BIT]
—
l
—
[AVC‑G12/60P]
—
[16BIT]
—
l
—
[AVC‑I100/50P]
—
l
l
l
[AVC‑I100/25PN]
—
—
—
—
[AVC‑G25/50P]
—
[24BIT]
—
l
—
[AVC‑G12/50P]
—
[16BIT]
—
l
—
[AVC‑I100/60i]
—
l
l
l
[AVC‑I50/60i]
—
l
l
l
[AVC‑G50/60i]
—
—
l
—
[AVC‑G25/60i]
—
—
l
—
[AVC‑G12/60i]
—
—
l
—
[DVCPRO HD/60i]
[60i]
l
l
l
[AVC‑I100/50i]
—
l
l
l
[AVC‑I50/50i]
—
l
l
l
[AVC‑G50/50i]
—
—
l
—
[AVC‑G25/50i]
—
—
l
—
[AVC‑G12/50i]
—
—
l
—
[DVCPRO HD/50i]
[50i]
l
l
l
[AVC‑I100/60P]
—
[AVC‑I50/60P]
—
[AVC‑G50/60P]
—
[AVC‑G25/60P]
—
[AVC‑G12/60P]
—
[DVCPRO HD/60P]
—
[AVC‑I100/50P]
—
[AVC‑I50/50P]
—
[AVC‑G50/50P]
—
[AVC‑G25/50P]
—
[AVC‑G12/50P]
—
[DVCPRO HD/50P]
—
[DVCPRO/60i]
[DV/60i]
[DVCPRO50/50i]
[576‑50i]
Recording function
[REC FORMAT]
[DVCPRO50/60i]
[480‑59.94i]
Interval recording
[30P]
[50i]
[DVCPRO/50i]
[AUDIO SMPL RES]
[DVCPRO/50i]
[DV/50i]
[24BIT]/[16BIT]
[24BIT]/[16BIT]
[24BIT]
[16BIT]
[24BIT]/[16BIT]
[24BIT]
[16BIT]
[24BIT]/[16BIT]
[24BIT]
[16BIT]
[24BIT]/[16BIT]
l
l
l
l
l
l
—
l
—
—
l
—
—
l
—
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
—
l
—
—
l
—
—
l
—
l
l
l
[60i]
l
l
l
[30P]
—
—
—
[60i]
[30P]
[24BIT]
[16BIT]
[16BIT]
l
l
l
—
—
—
[60i]
l
l
l
[30P]
—
—
—
[50i]
l
l
l
[25P]
—
—
—
[50i]
[25P]
[16BIT]
l
l
l
—
—
—
[50i]
l
l
l
[25P]
—
—
—
– 75 –
Chapter 4 Shooting — Multi formats
System mode
[LINE&FREQ]
[1080‑59.94P]
[1080‑50P]
[1080‑59.94i]
[1080‑50i]
[720‑59.94P]
[720‑50P]
[REC FORMAT]
[AVC‑I100/60P]
—
—
Dual codec recording
[AUDIO SMPL RES]
—
—
—
[24BIT]/[16BIT]
—
—
—
HD proxy*1
SD proxy*2
[AVC‑I100/24PN]
—
—
—
—
[AVC‑G25/60P]
—
[24BIT]
—
—
—
[16BIT]
—
—
—
l
—
—
l
—
—
[AVC‑G12/60P]
—
[AVC‑I100/50P]
—
[AVC‑I100/25PN]
—
[24BIT]/[16BIT]
[AVC‑G25/50P]
—
[24BIT]
—
—
—
[AVC‑G12/50P]
—
[16BIT]
—
—
—
l
[AVC‑I100/60i]
—
[AVC‑I50/60i]
—
[AVC‑G50/60i]
—
[AVC‑G25/60i]
—
[AVC‑G12/60i]
—
[DVCPRO HD/60i]
[60i]
[AVC‑I100/50i]
—
[AVC‑I50/50i]
—
[AVC‑G50/50i]
—
[AVC‑G25/50i]
—
[AVC‑G12/50i]
—
[DVCPRO HD/50i]
[50i]
[AVC‑I100/60P]
—
[AVC‑I50/60P]
—
[AVC‑G50/60P]
—
[AVC‑G25/60P]
—
[AVC‑G12/60P]
—
[DVCPRO HD/60P]
—
[AVC‑I100/50P]
—
[AVC‑I50/50P]
—
[AVC‑G50/50P]
—
[AVC‑G25/50P]
—
[AVC‑G12/50P]
—
[DVCPRO HD/50P]
—
[DVCPRO/60i]
[DV/60i]
[DVCPRO50/50i]
[576‑50i]
[CAMERA MODE]
[AVC‑I100/30PN]
[DVCPRO50/60i]
[480‑59.94i]
Recording function
Simultaneous
recording
[DVCPRO/50i]
[DV/50i]
[24BIT]/[16BIT]
[24BIT]
[16BIT]
[24BIT]/[16BIT]
[24BIT]
[16BIT]
[24BIT]/[16BIT]
[24BIT]
[16BIT]
[24BIT]/[16BIT]
[24BIT]
[16BIT]
[60i]
l
l
l
—
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
—
—
l
—
—
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
—
—
l
—
—
l
—
—
l
—
—
l
—
—
l
—
—
l
—
—
l
—
—
l
—
—
l
—
—
l
—
—
l
—
—
l
—
—
l
—
—
l
—
—
[30P]
l
—
—
[60i]
l
—
—
[30P]
[16BIT]
l
—
—
[60i]
l
—
—
[30P]
l
—
—
[50i]
l
—
—
[25P]
l
—
—
[50i]
l
—
—
[25P]
[16BIT]
l
—
—
[50i]
l
—
—
[25P]
l
—
—
*1 [AVC-G6 2CH MOV]
*2 [SHQ 2CH MOV], [HQ 2CH MOV], [LOW 2CH MOV]
List of recording settings and recording functions
The recording modes of the camera act as follows depending on the setting of [RECORDING] in the main menu → [RECORDING SETUP]. Even in
“Available” cases, recording functions are restricted in some system modes. For details, refer to the table in “System modes and recording functions”.
Setting
Operation mode
Recording setting (setting menu)
Recording/operation enabled/disabled
[RECORDING]
[VFR]
Pre-recording
One-clip
recording
Simultaneous
recording
Interval recording
[INTERVAL]
Disabled
Not available
Not available
Not available
One-shot recording
[ONE SHOT]
Disabled
Not available
Not available
Not available
Loop recording
[LOOP]
Disabled
Not available
Not available
Not available
Native variable frame rate recording
[NORMAL]
[ON]
Not available
Not available
Not available
Standard variable frame rate recording
[NORMAL]
[ON]
Not available
Not available
Not available
– 76 –
Chapter 4 Shooting — Multi formats
Setting
Recording setting (setting menu)
Operation mode
[RECORDING]
[VFR]
Standard recording
[NORMAL]
[OFF]
Setting
Recording setting (setting menu)
Operation mode
Recording/operation enabled/disabled
One-clip
recording
Pre-recording
Simultaneous
recording
Refer to “System modes and recording functions”.
Recording/operation enabled/disabled
[RECORDING]
[VFR]
Dual codec
recording
Text memo
Shot mark
Interval recording
[INTERVAL]
Disabled
Not available
Not available
Not available
One-shot recording
[ONE SHOT]
Disabled
Not available
Not available
Not available
Loop recording
[LOOP]
Disabled
Not available
Not available
Not available
Native variable frame rate recording
[NORMAL]
[ON]
Not available
Available
Available
Standard variable frame rate recording
[NORMAL]
[ON]
Not available
Available
Available
Standard recording
[NORMAL]
[OFF]
Refer to “System modes and recording functions”.
Selecting video output
The video output method can be selected.
Video output, etc. can be selected by the setting of [SDI&HDMI SELECT], [3G‑SDI OUT], or [DOWNCON MODE] in the main menu → [OUTPUT SEL].
Item
Description of settings
[SDI&HDMI SELECT]
Selects output signals from the <SDI OUT> terminal and <HDMI OUT> terminal.
[3G‑SDI OUT]
Selects the 3G‑HD SDI signal type output from the <SDI OUT> terminal from [LEVEL‑A] and
[LEVEL‑B] at 1080P.
[DOWNCON MODE]
Selects the mode of the down converter output signal mode from the <SDI OUT> or
<GENLOCK IN/VIDEO OUT> terminal in HD mode (1080P, 1080i, or 720P).
Selecting video output from each terminal
ff“—” indicates an item that cannot be selected.
Setting
[LINE&FREQ]
[1080‑59.94P]
[1080‑59.94i]
[720‑59.94P]
Video output
[SDI&HDMI SELECT]
<SDI OUT> terminal
<HDMI OUT> terminal
<GENLOCK IN/VIDEO OUT>
terminal
[SYSTEM MODE]
1080/59.94P*
1080/59.94P
480/59.94i
[1080i]
1080/59.94i
1080/59.94i
480/59.94i
[DOWNCON]
480/59.94i
480/59.94P
480/59.94i
[SYSTEM MODE]
1080/59.94i
1080/59.94i
480/59.94i
—
—
—
—
[DOWNCON]
480/59.94i
480/59.94P
480/59.94i
[SYSTEM MODE]
720/59.94P
720/59.94P
480/59.94i
—
—
—
—
[DOWNCON]
480/59.94i
480/59.94P
480/59.94i
480/59.94i
480/59.94P
480/59.94i
[SYSTEM MODE]
1080/50P*
1080/50P
576/50i
[1080i]
1080/50i
1080/50i
576/50i
[DOWNCON]
576/50i
576/50P
576/50i
[SYSTEM MODE]
1080/50i
1080/50i
576/50i
—
[480‑59.94i]
—
—
[1080‑50P]
[1080‑50i]
[720‑50P]
—
—
—
—
[DOWNCON]
576/50i
576/50P
576/50i
[SYSTEM MODE]
720/50P
720/50P
576/50i
—
—
—
—
[DOWNCON]
576/50i
576/50P
576/50i
576/50i
576/50P
576/50i
—
[576‑50i]
—
—
* Output type can be selected from [LEVEL‑A] and [LEVEL‑B] in the main menu → [OUTPUT SEL] → [3G‑SDI OUT]. [LEVEL‑B] is set in the factory settings.
– 77 –
Chapter 4 Shooting — Multi formats
Recording/playback and output format list
ffFrequencies in signal methods are annotated without fractions.
-- 59.94 → 60 / 23.98 → 24 / 29.97 → 30
Setting
[LINE&FREQ]
[REC FORMAT]
[CAMERA
MODE]
[VFR]
[FRAME RATE]
[AVC‑I100/60P]
[AVC‑G25/60P]
[AVC‑G12/60P]
[AVC‑I100/30PN]
[1080‑59.94P]
Disabled
[OFF]
Disabled
[AVC‑I100/24PN]
[AVC‑I100/60P]
[AVC‑I100/30PN]
Disabled
[ON]
[1fps] - [60fps]
[AVC‑I100/24PN]
[1080‑59.94i]
[1080‑50P]
[AVC‑I100/60i]
[AVC‑I50/60i]
[AVC‑G50/60i]
[AVC‑G25/60i]
[AVC‑G12/60i]
Disabled
[DVCPRO HD/60i]
[60i]
[AVC‑I100/50P]
[AVC‑G25/50P]
[AVC‑G12/50P]
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
[OFF]
[AVC‑I100/50P]
[AVC‑I100/25PN]
[1080‑50i]
[720‑59.94P]
[AVC‑I100/50i]
[AVC‑I50/50i]
[AVC‑G50/50i]
[AVC‑G25/50i]
[AVC‑G12/50i]
Disabled
[DVCPRO HD/50i]
[50i]
[AVC‑I100/60P]
[AVC‑I50/60P]
[AVC‑G50/60P]
[AVC‑G25/60P]
[AVC‑G12/60P]
Disabled
[ON]
[1fps] - [50fps]
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
[720‑50P]
Disabled
Disabled
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
[DVCPRO50/60i]
[DVCPRO/60i]
[DV/60i]
[576‑50i]
[DVCPRO50/50i]
[DVCPRO/50i]
[DV/50i]
[60i]
[30P]
1080/59.94P
4ch
1080/30PN Native
1080/29.97P over
59.94P 2:2
4ch
1080/24PN Native
1080/23.98P over
59.94P 2:3
4ch
1080/60P VFR
1080/59.94P VFR
4ch
1080/30PN Native
1080/59.94P VFR
VFR*1
No audio*2
1080/24PN Native
1080/59.94P VFR
VFR*3
No audio*4
1080/60i
1080/59.94i
4ch
1080/60i
1080/59.94i
4ch
1080/50P
1080/50P
4ch
1080/25PN Native
1080/25P over
50P 2:2
4ch
1080/50P VFR
1080/50P VFR
4ch
1080/25PN Native
VFR*5
1080/50P VFR
No audio*6
1080/50i
1080/50i
4ch
1080/50i
1080/50i
4ch
720/60P
720/59.94P
4ch
720/60P
720/59.94P
4ch
720/50P
720/50P
4ch
720/50P
720/50P
4ch
480/60i
480/59.94i
Disabled
Disabled
480/30P over 60i
2:2 Pull Down
480/29.97PsF
over 59.94i 2:2
576/50i
576/50i
Disabled
Disabled
576/25P over 50i
2:2 Pull Down
576/25PsF over
50i 2:2
[50i]
[25P]
1080/60P
Disabled
[DVCPRO
HD/50P]
[480‑59.94i]
Audio
Disabled
[DVCPRO
HD/60P]
[AVC‑I100/50P]
[AVC‑I50/50P]
[AVC‑G50/50P]
[AVC‑G25/50P]
[AVC‑G12/50P]
Video format
Disabled
[AVC‑I100/25PN]
Disabled
<SDI OUT1> terminal
Recording
format
In 30P: 30PN Native audio can be recorded.
In 30P: 4ch available
In 24P: 24PN Native audio can be recorded.
In 24P: 4ch available
In 25P: 25PN Native audio can be recorded.
In 25P: 4ch available
– 78 –
4ch
4ch
Chapter 4 Shooting — Dual codec recording
Dual codec recording
Recording in different formats for main recording and sub recording can be performed on the camera.
For sub recording, you can select HD proxy in AVC‑LongG 6 format with 1920×1080 resolution or one of three SD proxies with different resolution.
The file format is MOV that is suitable for nonlinear editing.
For the combination with the main recording, refer to “System modes and recording functions” (page 74).
Dual codec recording setting
Setting menu
When recording proxy data with the camera, set in the main menu → [RECORDING SETUP] → [DUAL CODEC SETTING].
Item
Description of settings
[REC MEDIA]
Selects media for recording proxy data.
[P2]: Records proxy data to a P2 card.
[P2&SD]: Records proxy data to both of a P2 card and SD memory card.
[OFF]: Does not record proxy data.
ffFactory setting: [OFF]
[PROXY MODE]
Sets the recording mode of proxy data.
[LOW 2CH MOV], [HQ 2CH MOV], [SHQ 2CH MOV], [AVC-G6 2CH MOV]
ffFactory setting: [HQ 2CH MOV]
[PROXY DISP]
Selects whether to display proxy data recorded information or messages in the viewfinder and LCD
monitor.
[ON]: Displays proxy recording information and SD memory card remaining capacity at the start of
recording. Warning information is displayed at all times.
[OFF]: Displays proxy and SD memory card warning information for only three seconds when warning
occurs.
ffFactory setting: [OFF]
ffFor details on relations between dual codec recording and system mode, refer to “System modes and recording functions” (page 74).
ffWhen recording proxy data, set [SPLIT] in the main menu → [RECORDING SETUP] → [FILE SPLIT].
Checking the setting status
Push the <DISP/MODE CHK> switch on the camera towards the <CHK> side twice to check the menu values of [REC MEDIA] and [PROXY MODE]
with the mode check function.
Recording modes and recording signals (video/audio)
The following settings are available only when [1080‑59.94i] or [1080‑50i] is set in the main menu → [SYSTEM MODE] → [LINE&FREQ].
rr Video
Recording mode
File format
Resolution
Codec
Frame rate
Bitrate
[AVC-G6 2CH
MOV]
MOV
1920×1080
H.264
High Profile
60 fps/50 fps
6 Mbps
[SHQ 2CH MOV]
MOV
960×540
H.264
High Profile
30 fps/25 fps
3500 kbps
[HQ 2CH MOV]
MOV
640×360
H.264
High Profile
30 fps/25 fps
1500 kbps
[LOW 2CH MOV]
MOV
480×270
H.264
Baseline Profile
30 fps/25 fps
800 kbps
rr Audio
Recording mode
File format
Codec
Number of channels
Bitrate per channel
Sampling frequency
[AVC-G6 2CH
MOV]
MOV
AAC‑LC
2ch
64 kbps
48 kHz
[SHQ 2CH MOV]
MOV
LPCM
2ch
768 bps
48 kHz
[HQ 2CH MOV]
MOV
AAC‑LC
2ch
64 kbps
48 kHz
[LOW 2CH MOV]
MOV
AAC‑LC
2ch
64 kbps
48 kHz
Recording the proxy data
Select [P2] or [P2&SD] in the main menu → [RECORDING SETUP] → [DUAL CODEC SETTING] → [REC MEDIA] and press the REC button to start
proxy recording at the same time as recording of the sources.
Push the <DISP/MODE CHK> switch towards the <CHK> side twice to display the proxy data recording information on the viewfinder and LCD monitor.
Recording to the SD memory card
To record the proxy data, use SD, SDHC, or SDXC memory cards with an indication of class2 or higher. Refer to our support desk at the following
website for the latest information not included in these operating instructions.
http://pro-av.panasonic.net/
When recording the proxy data to an SD memory card, always format the card using the camera.
– 79 –
Chapter 4 Shooting — Dual codec recording
Checking the SD memory card
1Insert the SD memory card into the camera.
2Select the main menu → [CARD FUNCTIONS] → [SD CARD PROPERTY].
ffThe format status is displayed in [SD STANDARD].
If [NOT SUPPORTED] is displayed, format the card with the camera.
ffIn the [PROXY REM] item, check the remaining recording time of the proxy data.
The remaining SD memory card capacity displayed ([PROXY REM]) indicates the remaining proxy recording, but it may differ from the actual
available space. If short recordings are repeated, the available recording time may decrease significantly compared to the available space. When
the remaining capacity exceeds 999 min, [999min] is displayed.
If the proxy is not recorded to the SD memory card, the remaining time is not displayed.
ffIn the [NUMBER OF CLIPS] item, check the number of clips recorded in the SD memory card.
If the number of clips is 1000 or more, no additional proxy data can be recorded to the SD memory card even if there is available capacity.
ffShot marks and text memos cannot be added to the clips in the SD memory card,
ffDeleting the clips recorded on the P2 card on the thumbnail screen does not delete the proxy data recorded on the SD memory card.
ffThe proxy data cannot be recorded to the SD memory card containing data for updating.
@@NOTE
tt While recording to the SD memory card, the remaining capacity can be checked with the mode check on the viewfinder screen.
tt If proxy data cannot be recorded in the SD memory card even when the main menu → [RECORDING SETUP] → [DUAL CODEC SETTING] → [REC
MEDIA] → [P2&SD] is set, [SD WR ERR] is displayed. In this case, check the SD memory card. For details, refer to “Error displays about proxy data
recordings” (page 81).
tt Data deleted as a result of formatting cannot be restored. Always check the data before formatting.
Formatting SD memory cards
1Insert the SD memory card into the camera.
2Select [YES] in the main menu → [CARD FUNCTIONS] → [FORMAT SD CARD].
This completes formatting the SD memory card.
Proxy data recording time (approximate)
Total recording rate
Recording time
(per 1 GB)
[AVC-G6 2CH MOV]
Approx. 6 Mbps
Approx. 13 min
[SHQ 2CH MOV]
Approx. 5060 kbps
Approx. 25 min
[HQ 2CH MOV]
Approx. 1650 kbps
Approx. 78 min
[LOW 2CH MOV]
Approx. 950 kbps
Approx. 135 min
Recording mode
(These are reference values for continuous recording with Panasonic products. The recording time may differ depending on the scene or the number of
clips)
Checking the proxy data
ffThe
indicator is displayed for the material clips with the proxy data recorded.
ffThe detailed information of the recorded proxy data can be viewed in the clip property.
For details on operations, refer to “Checking detailed information of the proxy data” (page 81).
ffThe proxy data is recorded to the P2 card or SD memory card as a video/audio file and real-time metadata file.
-- Audio file: XXXXXXXX.MOV
-- Real-time metadata file:XXXXXXXX.BIN
The time code, user bits, and information are recorded to the frame unit.
Use P2 Viewer Plus to check the proxy data. Some versions of P2 Viewer Plus may not be able to check the data.
For information on P2 Viewer Plus, visit the following website:
http://pro-av.panasonic.net/
@@NOTE
tt Clips with proxy data recorded with the camera are handled as unknown clips by some P2 devices.
(unknown clip indicator) is displayed on the
thumbnail, and the following operations become unavailable.
- [DELETE]
- [REPAIR CLIP]
- [RE-CONNECTION]
- [COPY]
- [EXCH. THUMBNAIL]
- Adding and deleting [TEXT MEMO] and [SHOT MARK]
Playback is possible.
On these devices, clips with proxy data made of linked multiple clips are displayed as individual incomplete clips .
– 80 –
Chapter 4 Shooting — Dual codec recording
Checking detailed information of the proxy data
Operation methods and panels may differ by version.
1Press the <THUMBNAIL> button.
The thumbnail screen appears on the viewfinder screen and LCD monitor.
2Select [CLIP PROPERTY] in the main menu → [CLIP] → [PROPERTY].
The clip property screen is displayed.
3Select [PROXY] using the control stick.
4Press the control stick.
Detailed information about the proxy data is displayed as below.
rr Detailed information about proxy data
[FORMAT]
The file format of the recorded data is displayed.
[VIDEO CODEC]
Video codec information of the recorded data is displayed.
[VIDEO FRAME RATE]
Video frame rate information of the recorded data is displayed.
[VIDEO BIT RATE]
Video bitrate information of the recorded data is displayed.
[VIDEO RESOLUTION]
The video resolution of the recorded data is displayed.
[ASPECT RATIO]
The aspect ratio of the recorded data is displayed.
[TC SUPER]
An indication whether the TC (time code) display is superimposed over the recorded video.
[AUDIO CODEC]
Audio codec information of the recorded data is displayed.
[AUDIO BIT RATE]
Audio bitrate information of the recorded data is displayed.
[AUDIO SAMPLING RATE]
Audio sampling rate information of the recorded data is displayed.
[NUM.OF AUDIO CH]
The number of audio channels of the recorded data is displayed.
Error displays about proxy data recordings
If an error occurs during recording the proxy data, check the entries in the following table and take necessary actions.
Error displays
(viewfinder screen)
Behavior and cause
Action to take
[PROXY ERROR] or [PROXY
REC WARNING]
Proxy data recording will stop, but recording of the material will
continue.
ffAn error occurred in the internal proxy module.
[PROXY ERROR]
ffA proxy data recording error occurred.
[PROXY REC WARNING]
ffIf a proxy data recording error occurs, the proxy data currently
being recorded will be processed as below:
- The proxy data being recorded to the P2 card will be
deleted.
- The proxy data being recorded to the SD memory card will
not be restored.
The proxy data will not be properly recorded. Turn off the
camera and turn on it again to check the recording and
playback. If the error continues to occur, please consult your
dealer.
[SD 0 min]
Recording of the materials and proxy data will continue.
ffThe remaining SD memory card capacity is getting low.
(approximately shorter than one minute)
After finishing recording, insert a new SD memory card.
[SD END]
Proxy data recording to the SD memory card will stop, but
recording to the P2 card will continue.
ffNo SD memory card capacity remains.
After finishing recording, insert a new SD memory card.
ffThe proxy data being recorded to the SD memory card will
be deleted.
To restore the deleted proxy data, select clips in the P2 card
and copy them to the SD memory card. (page 82)
[SD WR ERR]
Check the status of the SD memory card and insert a
Proxy data recording to the SD memory card will stop, but
recordable card. (page 80)
recording to the P2 card will continue.
This is displayed when proxy data cannot be recorded in the SD
memory card even though [P2&SD] is set in the main menu →
[RECORDING SETUP] → [DUAL CODEC SETTING] → [REC
MEDIA].
rr If the error message is displayed when recording
starts:
ffThe SD memory card format is different.
ffThe SD memory card contains 1000 clips or more.
ffAn attempt is made to record to an SD memory card
containing data for updating the firmware of the camera.
rr If the error message is displayed during
recording:
ffThe SD memory card was ejected during recording.
ffAn error occurred in recording to the SD memory card.
– 81 –
Chapter 4 Shooting — Dual codec recording
Error displays
(viewfinder screen)
[SD --min] or [SD WP]
Behavior and cause
Action to take
Proxy data will not be recorded to the SD memory card, but
recording to the P2 card will be performed.
ffNo SD memory card is inserted. [SD --min]
ffThe SD memory card is write-protected. [SD WP]
Check the status of the SD memory card.
Copying proxy data to the SD memory card
1Press the <THUMBNAIL> button to display the thumbnail screen.
2Use the control stick to move the cursor to the clip to be copied and press the control stick.
3Select [SD CARD] in the main menu → [CLIP] → [COPY].
4Select [YES] in the confirmation message and press the control stick.
@@NOTE
tt If [SD END] is displayed and the proxy data being recorded to the SD memory card is deleted, perform this procedure to copy the proxy data from the
P2 card, and enable the deleted proxy data to be restored.
tt Source data is not copied.
– 82 –
Chapter 4 Shooting — Handling setting data
Handling setting data
Setting data file configuration
Scene files with [F1:] to [F6:] can be saved on the camera according to the settings in the main menu → [SCENE FILE].
Scene file data ([F1:] to [F6:]) can be saved as a file, and up to eight files can be saved on the SD memory card at a time, which can be loaded and
used.
Setting menu values can be saved as one user file on the camera, and up to eight files can be saved on the SD memory card.
Setting data file structure of the camera is as follows.
rr Scene file
SD memory card
The camera
(Factory settings)
[F1:] [F2:] [F3:] [F4:] [F5:] [F6:]
*1
(Current value)
*1
*1
*1
*1
*2
*2
*2
*2
[F1:] [F2:] [F3:] [F4:] [F5:] [F6:]
*1
[F1:] [F2:] [F3:] [F4:] [F5:] [F6:]
*2
Scene file 1
*3
Scene file 8
*2
[F1:] [F2:] [F3:] [F4:] [F5:] [F6:]
(Value saved on the camera)
[F1:] [F2:] [F3:] [F4:] [F5:] [F6:]
*1 Select [INITIALIZE] in the main menu → [SCENE FILE] → [LOAD/SAVE/INITIALIZE].
By scene file unit as selected in the main menu → [SCENE FILE] → [FILE SELECT]
*2 Select [LOAD] or [SAVE] in the main menu → [SCENE FILE] → [LOAD/SAVE/INITIALIZE].
By scene file unit as selected in the main menu → [SCENE FILE] → [FILE SELECT]
*3 Select [LOAD] or [SAVE] in the main menu → [CARD FUNCTIONS] → [SCENE FILE].
[F1:] to [F6:] at once
rr User file
The camera
(Factory settings)
SD memory card
[USER FILE]
*1
(Current value)
User file 1
[USER FILE]
*3
*2
(Value saved on the camera)
User file 8
[USER FILE]
*1 Select [INITIALIZE] in the main menu → [OTHER FUNCTIONS] → [USER FILE].
*2 Select [LOAD] or [SAVE] in the main menu → [OTHER FUNCTIONS] → [USER FILE].
*3 Select [LOAD] or [SAVE] in the main menu → [CARD FUNCTIONS] → [USER FILE].
Handling SD memory cards
The SD memory card can be removed and inserted, either before or after the power is turned on.
– 83 –
Chapter 4 Shooting — Handling setting data
Inserting SD memory cards
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
1Open the slot cover. (Fig. 1)
2Insert the SD memory card into the SD memory card slot with the label side of the card upward, and close the slot cover. (Fig. 2)
@@NOTE
tt The SD memory card must be inserted with the correct side facing the SD card slot. If the SD memory card is hard to insert, it may be reversed or
upside-down. Do not force it into the slot. Check the orientation of the card before reinserting it.
tt On the camera, use SD memory cards that are compliant with the SD, the SDHC, or the SDXC standards.
tt For details on handling SD memory cards, refer to “Cautions when using SD memory cards” (page 19).
Removing SD memory cards
After opening the slot cover and making sure that the busy lamp is not illuminated, push the SD memory card further into the camera and then release.
This releases the SD memory card from the card slot. Remove the SD memory card and close the slot cover.
Note the following points when using or storing memory cards.
ffAvoid high temperature and humidity.
ffAvoid water droplets.
ffAvoid charging with electricity.
Store the SD memory card with the card still inserted into the camera and with the slot cover closed.
Performing operations on SD memory cards
To perform operations such as formatting an SD memory card, writing setting data to an SD memory card, or reading the written data, use [FORMAT SD
CARD] and [SCENE FILE]/[USER FILE] in the main menu → [CARD FUNCTIONS].
If the SD memory card that was formatted in a standard other than the SD/SDHC/SDXC standards on a device other than the camera is inserted,
[LOAD] or [SAVE] operation of the file cannot be performed. Format the SD memory card again.
Formatting SD memory cards
Fig. 1
1Select the main menu → [CARD FUNCTIONS] → [FORMAT SD CARD] and press the control stick (or <SEL/PUSH SET> dial
button).
The confirmation screen is displayed.
– 84 –
Chapter 4 Shooting — Handling setting data
2Select [YES] in the confirmation screen and press the control stick (or <SEL/PUSH SET> dial button). (Fig. 1)
Not to format the memory card, select [NO] and press the control stick (or <SEL/PUSH SET> dial button).
3When the completion message is displayed, select [OK] and press the control stick (or <SEL/PUSH SET> dial button).
For details on error messages, refer to “During thumbnail and menu operation” (page 179).
@@NOTE
tt SD memory cards can also be formatted from the thumbnail screen.
For details, refer to “Formatting SD memory cards” (page 109).
tt Data deleted as a result of formatting cannot be restored. Always check the data before formatting.
How to use user data
The content of setting data can be written to and read written data from user area on the internal memory of the camera.
Use of this data allows you to quickly reproduce optimum setup states.
Writing setting data to user area
1Select [SAVE] in the main menu → [OTHER FUNCTIONS] → [USER FILE] and press the control stick (or <SEL/PUSH SET> dial
button).
The confirmation screen is displayed.
2Select [YES] and press the control stick (or <SEL/PUSH SET> dial button).
3When the completion message is displayed, press the control stick (or the <SEL/PUSH SET> dial button).
Loading written user data
1Select [LOAD] in the main menu → [OTHER FUNCTIONS] → [USER FILE] and press the control stick (or <SEL/PUSH SET> dial
button).
The confirmation screen is displayed.
If [SYSTEM RESTART] is displayed on the confirmation screen, the camera will restart after reading out is complete.
2Select [YES] and press the control stick (or <SEL/PUSH SET> dial button).
Loading of the file begins.
How to use scene file data
The content of setting data can be written to and read written data from scene file area on the internal memory of the camera. Six types of scene files
can be registered. Use of this data allows you to quickly reproduce optimum setup states.
rr Factory settings
[F1:]: File that is suitable for standard shooting.
[F2:FLUO.]: The file suitable for shooting when the characteristics of fluorescent light should be considered (such as shooting indoors).
[F3:SPARK]: The file that sharpens the color hue and contrast and that has suitable resolution for SD shooting.
[F4:B-STR]: The file suitable for shooting when the tone level of darker areas are to be stretched (such as shooting at sunset).
[F5:CINE V]: The file suitable for shooting cinematic video that has shaper contrast.
[F6:CINE D]: The file suitable for shooting cinematic video that has wider dynamic range.
@@NOTE
tt [SYSTEM MODE] does not change even if the scene file is changed. Set all items in the main menu → [SYSTEM MODE].
– 85 –
Chapter 4 Shooting — Handling setting data
Saving scene file setting data to the camera memory
Fig. 1
1Select the file to be saved in the main menu → [SCENE FILE] → [FILE SELECT] and press the control stick (or <SEL/PUSH SET>
dial button).
2Select [SAVE] in the main menu → [SCENE FILE] → [LOAD/SAVE/INITIALIZE] and press the control stick (or <SEL/PUSH SET>
dial button). (Fig. 1)
A confirmation screen is displayed.
3Select [YES] and press the control stick (or <SEL/PUSH SET> dial button).
The selected scene file is saved to the camera.
Loading the scene file saved in the camera
1Select the file to be loaded in the main menu → [SCENE FILE] → [FILE SELECT] and press the control stick (or <SEL/PUSH SET>
dial button).
2Select [LOAD] in the main menu → [SCENE FILE] → [LOAD/SAVE/INITIALIZE] and press the control stick (or <SEL/PUSH SET>
dial button).
The confirmation screen is displayed.
3Select [YES] and press the control stick (or <SEL/PUSH SET> dial button).
The selected scene file is loaded from the camera.
Restoring the scene file setting data to the factory settings
1Select the file to be restored to the factory settings in the main menu → [SCENE FILE] → [FILE SELECT] and press the control
stick (or <SEL/PUSH SET> dial button).
2Select [INITIALIZE] in the main menu → [SCENE FILE] → [LOAD/SAVE/INITIALIZE] and press the control stick (or <SEL/PUSH
SET> dial button).
The confirmation screen is displayed.
3Select [YES] and press the control stick (or <SEL/PUSH SET> dial button).
The selected scene file is restored to the factory settings.
Changing the scene file title
1Select the file to change the title in the main menu → [SCENE FILE] → [FILE SELECT] and press the control stick (or <SEL/PUSH
SET> dial button).
2Select [NAME EDIT] in the main menu → [SCENE FILE] and press the control stick (or <SEL/PUSH SET> dial button).
The title entry screen and keyboard are displayed.
3Enter desired characters on the keyboard using the control stick (or <SEL/PUSH SET> dial button).
4Select [OK] and press the control stick (or <SEL/PUSH SET> dial button).
The file name is updated.
– 86 –
Chapter 4 Shooting — Handling setting data
How to restore the scene file or menu setting status to the factory settings
All the scene files and menu settings of the camera can be collectively restored to the factory settings.
1Select [MENU INITIALIZE] in the main menu → [OTHER FUNCTIONS] and press the control stick (or <SEL/PUSH SET> dial
button).
2Select [EXECUTE] and press the control stick (or <SEL/PUSH SET> dial button).
[SYSTEM RESTART] indication appears on the confirmation screen.
3Select [YES] and press the control stick (or <SEL/PUSH SET> dial button).
The camera is restarted and data are restored to the factory settings.
Saving to an SD memory card and loading saved data
Scene files and other setting values that you have set can be saved as a file, and up to 8 files can be saved on the SD memory card, and saved data
can be loaded.
ffFor scene files, the current setting values are saved in the camera automatically, and you can write the saved data to an SD memory card. When they
are loaded from the SD memory card, the current setting values are overwritten as well as the data saved in the camera.
ffAll scene files [F1:] to [F6:] are overwritten.
Saving scene files
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
1Select [SAVE] in the main menu → [CARD FUNCTIONS] → [SCENE FILE]. (Fig. 1)
2Select a file number (1 to 8) and press the control stick (or <SEL/PUSH SET> dial button). (Fig. 2)
The title entry screen and keyboard are displayed.
3Enter desired characters on the keyboard using the control stick (or <SEL/PUSH SET> dial button).
4Select [OK] on the keyboard and press the control stick (or <SEL/PUSH SET> dial button).
A confirmation screen is displayed.
5Select [YES] and press the control stick (or <SEL/PUSH SET> dial button).
The file is written with the entered title on the SD memory card, and the screen of Fig. 2 returns.
Loading scene files
1Select [LOAD] in the main menu → [CARD FUNCTIONS] → [SCENE FILE].
2Select a file number (1 - 8) and press the control stick (or <SEL/PUSH SET> dial button).
A confirmation screen is displayed.
3Select [YES] and press the control stick (or <SEL/PUSH SET> dial button).
When loading is completed, [LOAD OK] is displayed.
Saving and loading user files
Select [SAVE] or [LOAD] in the main menu → [CARD FUNCTIONS] → [USER FILE]. The operations onward are the same as for scene files.
– 87 –
Chapter 4 Shooting — Selection of external reference signal and generator lock setting
Selection of external reference signal and generator lock setting
Locking the video signal to the external reference signal
The video signal output from the camera can be locked to the reference signal supplied from an external source.
The camera can receive external reference signals from the <GENLOCK IN/VIDEO OUT> terminal.
Generator-locking to the reference signal supplied from the <GENLOCK IN/VIDEO OUT> terminal
HD-Y or composite signal that suits the system frame frequency is supplied to the <GENLOCK IN/VIDEO OUT> terminal. To enable the reference signal
input to the <GENLOCK IN/VIDEO OUT> terminal, the <IN/OUT> switch needs to be set to <IN>. The output signal to be locked to the input reference
signal can be set in the main menu → [OTHER FUNCTIONS] → [GL PHASE] (only in 1080/59.94i and 1080/50i).
Adjust the horizontal phase of the reference signal and output signal in the main menu → [OTHER FUNCTIONS] → [H PHASE].
@@NOTE
tt The subcarrier of the composite signal of the camera is not locked to the subcarrier of the reference signal.
Output status
The output status changes as follows according to selection of the external reference signal and generator lock setting.
Set [GL PHASE] in the main menu → [OTHER FUNCTIONS].
Selection of external reference signal
System mode
Input signal
Generator lock setting
[GL PHASE]
[HD SDI]
HD-Y
[COMPOSITE]
1080i/1080P
[HD SDI]
Composite
Output signal status
(phase relationship with external reference signal)
HD SDI output matches the HD-Y input signal.
Down converter output has a delay of approx. 90 H from the HD-Y input
signal.
Down converter output matches the HD-Y input signal.
HD SDI output has an advance of approx. 90 H from the HD-Y input
signal.
HD SDI output matches the composite input signal.
Down converter output has a delay of approx. 90 H from the composite
input signal.
[COMPOSITE]
Down converter output matches the composite input signal.
HD SDI output has an advance of approx. 90 H from the composite
input signal.
[HD SDI]
HD SDI output matches the HD-Y input signal.
Down converter output has a delay of approx. 120 H from the HD-Y
input signal.
HD-Y
[COMPOSITE]
720P
[HD SDI]
Composite
[COMPOSITE]
Down converter output matches the HD-Y input signal.
HD SDI output has an advance of approx. 120 H from the HD-Y input
signal.
HD SDI output matches the composite input signal.
Down converter output has a delay of approx. 120 H from the composite
input signal.
Down converter output matches the composite input signal.
HD SDI output has an advance of approx. 120 H from the composite
input signal.
Composite
—
SD SDI output matches the composite input signal.
Composite output matches the composite input signal.
HD-Y
—
SD SDI output is not locked to the HD-Y input signal.
Composite output is not locked to the HD-Y input signal.
480i/576i
@@NOTE
tt In the system mode of [1080P], a genlock is applied to the video signal when the HD-Y signal is input. In this case, time code may shift by one frame.
tt Down converter output refers to the output from the <GENLOCK IN/VIDEO OUT> and <SDI OUT> terminals.
– 88 –
Chapter 4 Shooting — Setting the time data
Setting the time data
The camera provides time codes, user bits, and date and time (real time) data as time data, and they are recorded in the frame in sync with video. They
are also recorded as data for clip metadata files.
Definition of time data
rr Time code
It can be switched between [REC RUN] and [FREE RUN] in the main menu → [RECORDING SETUP] → [TCG].
ff[FREE RUN]: The time code always advances even when the power is turned off, and it can be handled in the same way as time. It can also be
slaved to the time code input to the <TC IN/OUT> terminal.
ff[REC RUN]: Can be regenerated and recorded into the time code of clips recorded to P2 cards as a continuous value.
@@NOTE
tt In the following case, the values are not continuous.
- When deleting recorded clips
- When switching to 24PN and 30PN (25PN)
- When recording is interrupted due to a malfunction of [REC WARNING], etc. during recording.
rr User bits
Two types of user bits are built in.
ffLTC UB: Recorded as LTC and output from the <TC IN/OUT> terminal. It is also output as LTC of the HD SDI signal.
ffVITC UB: Recorded as VITC (recorded to VIDEO AUX area by DVCPRO). It is also output as VITC of the HD SDI signal.
LTC UB can select and record user set values, time, year/month/day, the same value as time codes, camera frame rate information, and input value of
external signals from the <TC IN/OUT> terminal, etc.
VITC UB records the camera frame rate information.
The LTC UB value of the recording start time can be recorded on the user bits of the clip metadata.
rr Date/time (real time)
ffBy means of the internal clock, year, month, day, and time can be displayed on the viewfinder/LCD monitor and on the output image of the
<GENLOCK IN/VIDEO OUT> terminal, etc.
ffThe internal clock is used for measuring the free run time code while the power is off and as time and year/month/day data of the user bits. It is also
used as the reference for file generation times during clip recording, which determine the sorting order of thumbnails and the order of playback.
ffIt is also used to generate clip metadata and UMID (Unique Material Identifier).
For details, refer to “Setting the date/time of the internal clock” (page 33).
Recording of time codes and user bits
Recording of time codes
Setting
[LINE&FREQ]
[REC FORMAT]
Recording TC
[CAMERA MODE]
[FRAME RATE]
LTC
—
Recording run/free run*
[DF]/[NDF]
30 frames
[30fps]
Recording run/free run*
[DF]/[NDF]
30 valid frames
Other than [30fps]
Recording run
[DF]/[NDF]
30 valid frames
[24fps]
Recording run/free run*
[NDF]
24 valid frames
Other than [24fps]
Recording run
[NDF]
24 valid frames
[AVC‑I100/60P]
[AVC‑G25/60P]
[AVC‑G12/60P]
[AVC‑I100/30PN]
[1080‑59.94P]
—
[AVC‑I100/24PN]
[1080‑59.94i]
[AVC‑I100/60i]
[AVC‑I50/60i]
[AVC‑G50/60i]
[AVC‑G25/60i]
[AVC‑G12/60i]
—
—
[DVCPRO HD/60i]
[60i]
—
[AVC‑I100/50P]
[AVC‑G25/50P]
[AVC‑G12/50P]
[1080‑50P]
—
Recording run/free run*
[DF]/[NDF]
30 frames
—
Recording run/free run*
25 frames
[25fps]
Recording run/free run*
25 frames
Other than [25fps]
Recording run
25 valid frames
[AVC‑I100/25PN]
– 89 –
VITC
Same value as LTC
Same value as LTC
Same value as LTC
Chapter 4 Shooting — Setting the time data
Setting
[LINE&FREQ]
[1080‑50i]
[720‑59.94P]
Recording TC
[REC FORMAT]
[CAMERA MODE]
[FRAME RATE]
LTC
VITC
[AVC‑I100/50i]
[AVC‑I50/50i]
[AVC‑G50/50i]
[AVC‑G25/50i]
[AVC‑G12/50i]
—
—
Recording run/free run*
25 frames
Same value as LTC
[DVCPRO HD/50i]
[50i]
—
—
—
Recording run/free run*
[DF]/[NDF]
30 frames
Same value as LTC
—
—
Recording run/free run*
25 frames
Same value as LTC
[60i]
—
[30P]
—
Recording run/free run*
[DF]/[NDF]
30 frames
Same value as LTC
(No recording in
[DV/60i]/[DV/50i])
[50i]
—
[25P]
—
Recording run/free run*
25 frames
Same value as LTC
(No recording in
[DV/60i]/[DV/50i])
[FRAME RATE]
TC OUT
LTC, VITC of HD SDI
—
LTC is output.
LTC is output.
[30fps]
LTC is output.
LTC is output.
Other than [30fps]
Matches to the recording TC at the
top of recording.
30 frames/second
Matches to the
recording TC at the top
of recording.
30 frames/second
[24fps]
LTC is converted to 30 frames and
output.
LTC is output.
Other than [24fps]
Matches to the recording TC at the
top of recording.
30 frames/second
Matches to the
recording TC at the top
of recording.
30 frames/second
LTC is output.
LTC is output.
—
LTC is output.
LTC is output.
[25fps]
LTC is output.
LTC is output.
Matches to the recording TC at the
top of recording.
25 frames/second
Matches to the
recording TC at the top
of recording.
25 frames/second
LTC is output.
LTC is output.
LTC is output.
LTC is output.
[AVC‑I100/60P]
[AVC‑I50/60P]
[AVC‑G50/60P]
[AVC‑G25/60P]
[AVC‑G12/60P]
[DVCPRO HD/60P]
[720‑50P]
[AVC‑I100/50P]
[AVC‑I50/50P]
[AVC‑G50/50P]
[AVC‑G25/50P]
[AVC‑G12/50P]
[DVCPRO HD/50P]
[480‑59.94i]
[DVCPRO50/60i]
[DVCPRO/60i]
[DV/60i]
[576‑50i]
[DVCPRO50/50i]
[DVCPRO/50i]
[DV/50i]
* For free run, the time code is slaved to the input TC of the <TC IN/OUT> terminal.
Output of time codes
Setting
[LINE&FREQ]
[REC FORMAT]
Output TC
[CAMERA MODE]
[AVC‑I100/60P]
[AVC‑G25/60P]
[AVC‑G12/60P]
[AVC‑I100/30PN]
[1080‑59.94P]
—
[AVC‑I100/24PN]
[1080‑59.94i]
[AVC‑I100/60i]
[AVC‑I50/60i]
[AVC‑G50/60i]
[AVC‑G25/60i]
[AVC‑G12/60i]
—
—
[DVCPRO HD/60i]
[60i]
—
[AVC‑I100/50P]
[AVC‑G25/50P]
[AVC‑G12/50P]
[1080‑50P]
—
[AVC‑I100/25PN]
[1080‑50i]
[720‑59.94P]
Other than [25fps]
[AVC‑I100/50i]
[AVC‑I50/50i]
[AVC‑G50/50i]
[AVC‑G25/50i]
[AVC‑G12/50i]
—
—
[DVCPRO HD/50i]
[50i]
—
—
—
[AVC‑I100/60P]
[AVC‑I50/60P]
[AVC‑G50/60P]
[AVC‑G25/60P]
[AVC‑G12/60P]
[DVCPRO HD/60P]
– 90 –
Chapter 4 Shooting — Setting the time data
Setting
[LINE&FREQ]
[720‑50P]
[REC FORMAT]
Output TC
[CAMERA MODE]
[FRAME RATE]
TC OUT
LTC, VITC of HD SDI
—
—
LTC is output.
LTC is output.
[60i]
—
[30P]
—
LTC is output.
None
[50i]
—
[25P]
—
LTC is output.
None
[CAMERA MODE]
[FRAME RATE]
[AVC‑I100/50P]
[AVC‑I50/50P]
[AVC‑G50/50P]
[AVC‑G25/50P]
[AVC‑G12/50P]
[DVCPRO HD/50P]
[480‑59.94i]
[DVCPRO50/60i]
[DVCPRO/60i]
[DV/60i]
[576‑50i]
[DVCPRO50/50i]
[DVCPRO/50i]
[DV/50i]
Recording of user bits
Setting
[LINE&FREQ]
[REC FORMAT]
Recording TC
[AVC‑I100/60P]
[AVC‑G25/60P]
[AVC‑G12/60P]
[1080‑59.94P]
[AVC‑I100/30PN]
—
[1080‑50P]
—
—
[DVCPRO HD/60i]
[60i]
—
[720‑59.94P]
Follows [UBG MODE].*
—
—
[25fps]
Follows [UBG MODE].*
—
—
[DVCPRO HD/50i]
[50i]
—
—
Follows [VITC UBG
MODE].
Follows [VITC UBG
MODE].
Frame information lock
Other than [25fps]
[AVC‑I100/50i]
[AVC‑I50/50i]
[AVC‑G50/50i]
[AVC‑G25/50i]
[AVC‑G12/50i]
[AVC‑I100/60P]
[AVC‑I50/60P]
[AVC‑G50/60P]
[AVC‑G25/60P]
[AVC‑G12/60P]
Frame information lock
Other than [24fps]
[AVC‑I100/60i]
[AVC‑I50/60i]
[AVC‑G50/60i]
[AVC‑G25/60i]
[AVC‑G12/60i]
[AVC‑I100/50P]
[AVC‑G25/50P]
[AVC‑G12/50P]
Follows [UBG MODE].*
[24fps]
[AVC‑I100/25PN]
[1080‑50i]
[30fps]
Other than [30fps]
VITC UB
Follows [VITC UBG
MODE].
—
[AVC‑I100/24PN]
[1080‑59.94i]
LTC UB
Follows [UBG MODE].*
Follows [VITC UBG
MODE].
—
Follows [UBG MODE].*
Frame information lock
—
—
Follows [UBG MODE].*
Frame information lock
[60i]
—
[30P]
—
Follows [UBG MODE].*
Follows [VITC UBG
MODE].
[50i]
—
[25P]
—
Follows [UBG MODE].*
Follows [VITC UBG
MODE].
[DVCPRO HD/60P]
[720‑50P]
[AVC‑I100/50P]
[AVC‑I50/50P]
[AVC‑G50/50P]
[AVC‑G25/50P]
[AVC‑G12/50P]
[DVCPRO HD/50P]
[480‑59.94i]
[DVCPRO50/60i]
[DVCPRO/60i]
[DV/60i]
[576‑50i]
[DVCPRO50/50i]
[DVCPRO/50i]
[DV/50i]
* With [EXT], UB of the <TC IN/OUT> terminal is slaved.
– 91 –
Chapter 4 Shooting — Setting the time data
Output of user bits
Setting
[LINE&FREQ]
[REC FORMAT]
Output UB
[CAMERA MODE]
[AVC‑I100/60P]
[AVC‑G25/60P]
[AVC‑G12/60P]
[1080‑59.94P]
[AVC‑I100/30PN]
[1080‑50P]
—
[720‑59.94P]
[30fps]
LTC UB for HD SDI
LTC UB is output.
LTC UB is output.
VITC UB for HD SDI
VITC UB is output.
Other than [30fps]
[24fps]
Other than [24fps]
[AVC‑I100/60i]
[AVC‑I50/60i]
[AVC‑G50/60i]
[AVC‑G25/60i]
[AVC‑G12/60i]
—
—
[DVCPRO HD/60i]
[60i]
—
[AVC‑I100/50P]
[AVC‑G25/50P]
[AVC‑G12/50P]
—
Outputs along to
over 60P, based on
LTC UB.
Outputs along to
over 60P, based on
LTC UB.
LTC UB is output.
LTC UB is output.
VITC UB is output.
LTC UB is output.
LTC UB is output.
VITC UB is output.
LTC UB is output.
LTC UB is output.
VITC UB is output.
—
[AVC‑I100/25PN]
[1080‑50i]
UB for TC OUT
—
[AVC‑I100/24PN]
[1080‑59.94i]
[FRAME RATE]
[25fps]
Other than [25fps]
[AVC‑I100/50i]
[AVC‑I50/50i]
[AVC‑G50/50i]
[AVC‑G25/50i]
[AVC‑G12/50i]
—
—
[DVCPRO HD/50i]
[50i]
—
—
—
LTC UB is output.
LTC UB is output.
VITC UB is output.
—
—
LTC UB is output.
LTC UB is output.
VITC UB is output.
[60i]
—
[30P]
—
LTC UB is output.
None
None
[50i]
—
[25P]
—
LTC UB is output.
None
None
[AVC‑I100/60P]
[AVC‑I50/60P]
[AVC‑G50/60P]
[AVC‑G25/60P]
[AVC‑G12/60P]
[DVCPRO HD/60P]
[720‑50P]
[AVC‑I100/50P]
[AVC‑I50/50P]
[AVC‑G50/50P]
[AVC‑G25/50P]
[AVC‑G12/50P]
[DVCPRO HD/50P]
[480‑59.94i]
[DVCPRO50/60i]
[DVCPRO/60i]
[DV/60i]
[576‑50i]
[DVCPRO50/50i]
[DVCPRO/50i]
[DV/50i]
User bits settings
Sets the user bits to be recorded in the sub code area in the main menu → [RECORDING SETUP] → [UBG MODE].
Item
Description
[USER]
Records internal user values. You can set the user value in the main menu → [RECORDING SETUP] → [UB PRESET]. Setting
values are held even when the power is turned off.
For details, refer to “How to input user bits” (page 93).
[TIME]
Records the time measured by the internal clock.
[DATE]
Records the hour digit of year/month/day/date-time measured by the internal clock.
[EXT]
Records the user bits values currently entered to the <TC IN/OUT> terminal.
[TCG]
Records the time code value.
[FRAME RATE]
Records the camera photo frame rate information.
When playing back clips recorded in native format, the same frame rate information as VITC UB is output regardless of the
recorded value. Use at this setting when the editing device such as a computer uses the frame rate information of the user bits.
[REGEN]
Reads the user bit last recorded to P2 card that is currently to be recorded to and recording this value as it is.
@@NOTE
tt When slave-lock to the user bits value input to the <TC IN/OUT> terminal, set to [EXT].
tt During slaving, the [UB] display letters are shown with black and white reversed.
tt After executing slave once, even if input from the <TC IN/OUT> terminal stops, the slave status will continue. However, in the following cases, the
slave status of the user bits will be released.
- When [UBG MODE] is set to other than [EXT]
- When [UB PRESET] is executed
- When the power is turned off
– 92 –
Chapter 4 Shooting — Setting the time data
tt The internal [USER] value retains the slaved value even after slave lock is released.
tt To input external time codes from the <TC IN/OUT> terminal, set the <IN/OUT> switch to the <IN> side.
How to input user bits
By setting user bits, information such as memos (date, time) up to eight digits long (hexadecimal) can be recorded.
1Select [USER] in the main menu → [RECORDING SETUP] → [UBG MODE].
2Select the main menu → [RECORDING SETUP] → [UB PRESET].
3Set the user bits using the control stick.
ffScreen display
- Push it to the right to move right the digit to be set.
- Push it to the left to move left the digit to be set.
- Push it upward to increase the value of the digit to be set by one.
- Push it downward to decrease the value of the digit to be set by one.
4Press the control stick, enter the values of user bits, and exit the user bits settings screen.
5Use the <COUNTER> button to display [UBG] and confirm that the set value is displayed.
@@NOTE
tt If you exit the user bits setting screen without pressing the control stick, the set values are disabled.
Retention of user bits in memory
User bit settings are automatically recorded and are retained even if the power is turned off.
Frame rate information recorded on user bits
Saving the frame rate values for the image information shot/saved according to the frame rate set in the main menu → [SYSTEM MODE] to user bits
allows you to use the editor (personal computer editing software).
Information is always saved in VITC UB.
In addition, selecting [FRAME RATE] in the main menu → [RECORDING SETUP] → [UBG MODE] saves the information in user bits (LTC UB) as well.
The same value as in the frame rate information obtained from VITC UB playback is also output as LTC UB during playback of clips recorded in native
format.
Frame rate information
The relationship between frame rates, image pull-down, and time codes/user bits is as follows.
Verification information on the right-hand six digits
Media management information
Fixed values
Sequence No.
24P: 0-4
Other than above: F-fixed
・ Updated frame flags and valid frame flags
・ REC mark
Camera image mode
Example)・60i：600
・60P：608
・30P：308
・24P：248
・24PN：24C
・50i：502
・50P：50A
・25P：25A
・＊＊ P：＊＊ 9
・＊＊ P：＊＊ 1
・＊＊ P：＊＊ D
・＊＊ P：＊＊ B
(During shooting)
(VFR 30PN or over 60P)
(VFR over 60P)
(VFR24PN during shooting)
(VFR25PN or over 50P)
Setting the time code
1Set the mode for time code in the main menu → [RECORDING SETUP] → [DF MODE]/[TCG].
ff[TC MODE] (When 59.94 Hz)
Sets [DF] (Drop frame mode)/[NDF] (non-drop frame mode).
In 24PN, the camera always operates in [NDF].
ff[TCG]
Sets [FREE RUN] (free run)/[REC RUN] (recording run).
2Set to [TC PRESET] in the main menu → [RECORDING SETUP].
– 93 –
Chapter 4 Shooting — Setting the time data
3Set the time code using the control stick.
ffScreen display
- When pushed down to the right, the digit that has been to set (flashing) moves to the right.
- When pushed down to the left, the digit that has been to set (flashing) moves to the left.
- When pushed down toward the top, the value of the digit that has been to set (flashing) is raised by one.
- When pushed down toward the bottom, the value of the digit that has been to set (flashing) is lowered by one.
4Press the control stick, enter the values of the time code, and exit the time code settings screen.
5Use the <COUNTER> button to display [TC] and confirm that the set value is displayed.
Settable time code range
For 59.94 Hz (except for 24PN)
00:00:00:00 to 23:59:59:29
24PN
00:00:00:00 to 23:59:59:23
For 50 Hz:
00:00:00:00 to 23:59:59:24
@@NOTE
tt When using with 24P, the time code setting is adjusted in 5-frame units. When 24PN, adjusted in multiples of 4, and when 720/30PN and 720/25PN,
adjusted to even numbers. Also, the time code cannot be set during recording.
tt If you exit the time code setting screen without pressing the control stick, the set values are disabled.
Time code function during battery replacement
Even during battery replacement, the backup mechanism functions, allowing the time code generator to continue operating.
When each item of the system mode has been changed, the time code of free run may shift. Turn on the power again, check the time code, and reset it,
if necessary.
@@NOTE
tt When the power switch has been switched to <ON> → <OFF> → <ON>, the backup accuracy of the time code in the free run mode is approximately
±2 frames.
Time codes in variable frame rate
ffIn 24PN, recording is 24 frames, output is 30 frames, which matches 2:3 pull-down images.
ffThe advance rate of the recording and output time code matches real time only when the image frame rate is 24P. When 60P, recording advance rate
is 60/24 times. In this case, the camera switches to [REC RUN] fixed operation and the time code value that is output when recording starts matches
the recording time code.
ffIt is the same when shooting in modes other than 30P when in 30PN and shooting in modes other than 25P when in 25PN.
Externally locking the time code
The internal time code generator of the camera can be locked to an external generator. In addition, the time code generator of an external device can be
locked to the internal time code generator of the camera.
Example of connections for external locking
As shown in the figure, connect both the reference video signal and the reference time code.
For details on reference signal and generator lock, refer to “Selection of external reference signal and generator lock setting” (page 88).
rr When locking onto an external signal
Reference video signal
Reference time code
<GENLOCK IN/VIDEO OUT> terminal
<TC IN/OUT> terminal
@@NOTE
tt To input or genlock input external time code, set the <IN/OUT> switch to <IN> and select [FREE RUN] in the main menu → [RECORDING SETUP] →
[TCG].
tt You can input Y reference signals of HD and composite video signals as reference videos signals.
tt When the system mode is 480i (576i) (SD) and 720P, input the composite video signal.
– 94 –
Chapter 4 Shooting — Setting the time data
tt When the system mode is 720P, if you input the HD-Y signal, genlock will be applied to the image signal, but the time code may be shifted by one field.
tt If the genlock input reference signal becomes disrupted, a normal recording cannot be performed and [TEMPORARY PAUSE IRREGULAR FRM SIG]
flashes on the viewfinder and LCD monitor, then clips are divided. The synchronization with the time code is not also guaranteed. Recording will be
resumed when the signal returns to normal. However, interval recording, one-shot recording, and loop recording are not resumed.
rr When two cameras are connected and one is used as a reference camera
Reference camera
<TC IN/OUT> terminal
Slave camera
<TC IN/OUT> terminal
<GENLOCK IN/VIDEO OUT> terminal
<GENLOCK IN/VIDEO OUT> terminal
@@NOTE
tt Set the <TC IN/OUT> terminal to output or input with the <IN/OUT> switch.
tt For all devices, set [RECORDING] in the main menu → [OUTPUT SEL] → [TC OUTPUT REF] and set [COMPOSITE] in the main menu → [OTHER
FUNCTIONS] → [GL PHASE].
tt If you set [RECORDING] in the main menu → [OUTPUT SEL] → [TC OUTPUT REF], the two cameras will be able to record with the same time code
in the image.
tt You cannot externally lock the composite signal subcarrier output from the <GENLOCK IN/VIDEO OUT> terminal of the camera.
External lock operation procedure
To externally lock the time code, follow the steps below.
1Set [FREE RUN] in the main menu → [RECORDING SETUP] → [TCG].
2Display TC with the <COUNTER> button.
3Input a reference time code and reference video signal that are in a phase relationship (that conforms to time code specifications)
to the <TC IN/OUT> terminal and the <GENLOCK IN/VIDEO OUT> terminal.
The built-in time code generator is locked to the reference time code. When approximately ten seconds has elapsed after locking, the external lock
status will be held even if the reference time code from the external device is disconnected.
ffWhen the input reference signal of generator lock is disrupted, recording cannot be performed normally. [TEMPORARY PAUSE IRREGULAR SIG]
is displayed in the viewfinder screen, and the clip is divided. The continuity of the time code is not guaranteed. Recording resumes when the signal
returns to normal. However, during loop recording, recording does not resume.
ffWhen the time code is externally locked, the time code is instantaneously locked to the external time code, the same value as the value of the
external time code is output to the counter display area. Do not set to the recording mode for several seconds until the sync generator has
stabilized. Furthermore, lock the time code to the <TC IN/OUT> terminal signal.
ffWhen using the camera with [ON] set in the main menu → [RECORDING SETUP] → [PRE REC], disrupted images or stopped time codes may
be recorded if the time code is switched from recording run to free run immediately before recording or an external time code is input to be slavelocked to the <TC IN/OUT> terminal.
ffIf you execute the slave once, even if there is no longer <TC IN/OUT> terminal and <GENLOCK IN/VIDEO OUT> terminal input, the slave status is
maintained. However, in the following cases, the slave status will be released.
- When [TC PRESET] is executed
- When the power is turned off
- When switching between [DF]/[NDF] in [DF MODE]
- When [TCG] is set to [REC RUN]
- When switching between [REC FORMAT] and [CAMERA MODE]
Setting of user bits when the time code is externally locked
To lock user bits to the input values from an external source, set [EXT] in the main menu → [RECORDING SETUP] → [UBG MODE]. Regardless of the
setting of [REC RUN]/[FREE RUN], it is slaved to user bits values input to the <TC IN/OUT> terminal.
Canceling the external lock
Set [REC RUN] in the main menu → [RECORDING SETUP] → [TCG] after stopping supply of the external time code.
Cautions when switching the power supply from the battery to the AC adaptor while an external lock is active
To keep continuously on the power supply of the time code generator, connect the AC adaptor to the <DC IN 12V> terminal and then remove the battery
pack. If the battery pack is removed first, there is no guarantee that the time code will stay externally locked.
– 95 –
Chapter 4 Shooting — Setting the time data
External synchronization of the camera unit while an external lock is active
While an external lock is active, the genlock is activated on the camera unit by the reference video signal input to the <GENLOCK IN/VIDEO OUT>
terminal.
@@NOTE
tt To externally lock multiple units with the camera as the master device, set to the same setting as on the camera. Note that in a system using a mixture
of interlaced and progressive scanning, the continuity of the video and time codes is not guaranteed.
tt When the external lock is applied to 24PN Native, be sure to input non-drop frame time code. External lock is not available in drop frame. Also, at the
moment external lock is applied, the image may look corrupted. This is an operation to match the 5-frame cycle and is not a malfunction.
Supplying the time code externally
You can supply the output time codes to a VTR or other recording device from the camera by matching the camera images or the replayed images.
<GENLOCK IN/VIDEO OUT> terminal or <SDI OUT> terminal
VIDEO IN terminal
SDI IN terminal
HD SDI IN terminal
VTR, etc.
TC IN terminal
<TC IN/OUT> terminal
1Set [VIDEO OUT] in the main menu → [OUTPUT SEL] → [TC OUTPUT REF].
2Set [HD SDI] or [COMPOSITE] in the main menu → [OTHER FUNCTIONS] → [GL PHASE] to match the supplied video output.
3Set [TCG/TCR] in the main menu → [OUTPUT SEL] → [TC OUT].
@@NOTE
tt If you set [TC OUTPUT REF] to [VIDEO OUT] in the main menu → [OUTPUT SEL], the input time code will be output to match the video output delay.
Connecting and setting the genlock and time code input/output
The relationship of the connecting and settings between the genlock and time code input/output is shown in the table.
When the genlock input and the camera output phase match, l is displayed, and when they do not match, × is displayed.
rr When the camera recording format is 1080P, 1080i
Camera usage conditions
Image and standard signals
supplied externally
SDI
Genlock input
Camera settings
Genlock input and camera
output phase
VIDEO
SDI
1080i
VIDEO
SD (480i/576i)
[GL PHASE]
[HD SDI]
[COMPOSITE]
[HD SDI]
[COMPOSITE]
SDI output (HD)
l
90H advance
l
90H advance
Video output and SDI output
(SD)
90H delay
l
90H delay
l
Time code output
l
l
l
l
SDI
VIDEO
SDI
VIDEO
rr When the camera recording format is 720P
Camera usage conditions
Image and standard signals
supplied externally
Genlock input
Camera settings
Genlock input and camera
output phase
720P
SD (480i/576i)
[GL PHASE]
[HD SDI]
[COMPOSITE]
[HD SDI]
[COMPOSITE]
SDI output (HD)
l
120H advance
l
120H advance
Video output and SDI output
(SD)
120H delay
l
120H delay
l
Time code output
×
×
l
l
rr When the camera recording format is 480i/576i
Camera usage conditions
Camera settings
Image and standard signals
supplied externally
SDI
VIDEO
Genlock input
SD (480i/576i)
[GL PHASE]
Disabled
– 96 –
Chapter 4 Shooting — Setting the time data
Genlock input and camera
output phase
SDI output (HD)
None
Video output and SDI output
(SD)
l
Time code output
l
Setting and displaying the counter
If you display the counter using the <COUNTER> button, the counter value is displayed on the time code display of the viewfinder/LCD monitor. Counter
value is displayed as hour, minute, second. This is not displayed during playback.
You can set either of two types in the main menu → [DISPLAY SETUP] → [REC COUNTER].
[TOTAL]: The camera will continuously count until reset using the <RESET> button. Even if you replace the P2 card or turn off the power, the value will
be maintained.
[CLIP]: Each time you start recording the counter value will clear and the count will start from 0. You can shoot always while checking the recording time
of the clip you are currently shooting.
@@NOTE
tt If the <RESET> button is pressed while the counter value is displayed, the counter value is reset. It will start again from 0.
tt The counter value is one second of [0:00.00] to [9:59.59].
– 97 –
Chapter 5
Playback
Data including additional information such as images, audio, text memo, and metadata that are created from one shooting are saved as a clip. You can
play back and edit clips with the camera.
Chapter 5 Playback — Basic procedures
Basic procedures
Preparation
1Connect the battery or AC adaptor. (page 26)
2Set the power switch to <ON>. (page 32)
3Open the LCD monitor.
Playback
a
b
c
a: <THUMBNAIL> button
b: <=/&> button
c: Control stick
1Press the <THUMBNAIL> button.
The thumbnail screen appears on the viewfinder screen.
2Use the control stick to move the cursor over the clip to be played back.
3Press the <=/&> button.
ffPlayback starts from the beginning of the clip indicated by the cursor.
ffAfter playback of the clip indicated by the cursor ends, the clips will be played back in the order displayed on the thumbnail screen. The screen
returns to the thumbnail screen when playback of the last clip ends.
ffBy changing the thumbnail display settings, you can set it to play clips on a specified slot or clips with an inserted text memo only.
ffTo change the playback order of clips, select clips in the order you want to play back. Select [SELECTED CLIPS] in the main menu → [CLIP] →
[REPOSITION], to display the clips in selected order.
ffDuring playback of clips, press the <%> button to start 4x speed reverse playback, and the <)> button to start 4x speed fast playback. Press
the <=/&> button to return to normal playback.
ffDuring playback of clips, press the <=/&> button to pause the playback.
During a pause, press the <%> button to pause the playback at the beginning of the clip. Press the <%> button again to pause the playback at
the beginning of the previous clip.
During a pause, press the <)> button to pause the playback at the beginning of the next clip.
During a pause, press <+> of the <AUDIO MON/ADV> button to advance a frame, and press <−> to return one frame.
ffPressing the <(> button during clip playback stops the playback and returns the display to the thumbnail screen.
@@NOTE
tt When playing clips, it is not necessary to select the clips (blue frames around the thumbnails).
tt Clips with clip numbers displayed in red cannot be played back. These are the clips in different video formats (such as 1080i, 480i).
tt When playback is stopped, the cursor moves to the position of the clip that was being played back, regardless of where the playback started.
tt Press the <=/&> button again to start playback from the beginning of the clip on which the cursor is placed. To play back from the point where the
last playback has been stopped, select [RESUME] in the main menu → [CLIP] → [THUMBNAIL SETUP] → [PB POSITION].
tt Playing different compressed recording formats may cause audio and video distortions in between clips.
tt Continuously playing clips of the same format but of different audio bit rates mutes the audio in between clips.
tt You can play back clips from the text memo position by switching the thumbnail screen to the text memo display. (page 104)
tt You can select the playback start position for playback from thumbnails in the main menu → [CLIP] → [THUMBNAIL SETUP] → [PB POSITION].
Adjusting the audio
You can adjust the output volume from the built-in speaker and headphone terminal.
1Press <+>/<−> of the <AUDIO MON/ADV> button.
– 99 –
Chapter 5 Playback — Thumbnail operations
Thumbnail operations
Thumbnail operation overview
A clip is a group of data created from one shooting session, which includes additional information such as images, audio, text memo, and metadata that
are created from one shooting.
The following operations can be performed while viewing the clip thumbnails displayed on the LCD monitor.
ffPlay back, delete, copy, or restore clips.
ffAdding or deleting a shot mark and text memo to the clip
ffCopying part of a clip using the text memo
ffChanging the thumbnail image using the text memo
ffFormat P2 cards and SD memory cards.
ffUpload and edit clip metadata from the SD memory card.
Thumbnail screen
Press the <THUMBNAIL> button to display the thumbnail screen on the LCD monitor. Press the <THUMBNAIL> button again to return to the regular
display. Also, when changing from the regular display to the thumbnail screen display, all clips will be displayed on the thumbnail screen.
Press the <MENU> button on the thumbnail screen to enable thumbnail menu operations.
1
2
3
19
13 15
11
4
12 14 16
5
6
7
8
9
17
18
10
1 Status message
A message showing the process status is displayed. [UPDATING] and the icon
are displayed while the screen is being refreshed.
2 Status displays for card slot, storage device, and network connection
The status conditions of the P2 card, storage device, and network connection are displayed as follows:
(White)
The card slot number in which the P2 card is inserted is displayed in white.
(Yellow)
The card slot number of the P2 card in which the clip in the cursor position is saved is displayed in yellow. If the clips are
recorded across multiple P2 cards, all slot numbers of those cards that contain the clips are displayed.
@@NOTE
The frame turns red if the inserted P2 card is in any of the following conditions:
ff[RUNDOWN CARD]
The maximum number of overwrites on the P2 card has been exceeded.
ff[DIR ENTRY NG CARD]
The directory structure on the P2 card is not supported.
ff[AUTH NG CARD]
Indicates that the card is a microP2 memory card which cannot authenticate a CPS password.
(Gray)
Displayed in gray when a storage device is not connected.
(White)
Displayed in white when a storage device can be used.
(Yellow)
(Red)
(Gray)
Displayed in yellow when the thumbnails of clips in the storage device are displayed.
Displayed in red when a storage device is connected but cannot be used.
Displayed in gray when the wired LAN is not activated properly.
(White)
Displayed in white when the wired LAN is not connected.
(Yellow)
Displayed in yellow while the wired LAN is active.
(Red)
Displayed in red when there is a problem with the connection status of wired LAN.
(Gray)
Displayed in gray when the wireless LAN is not activated properly.
(White)
Displayed in white when the wireless LAN is not connected.
(Yellow)
Displayed in yellow while the wireless LAN is active.
(Red)
Displayed in red when there is a problem with the connection status of wireless LAN.
– 100 –
Chapter 5 Playback — Thumbnail operations
3 Display mode
Displays the types of the thumbnails to be displayed on the screen and the types of other information screens. To switch between displays, refer to
“Setting thumbnail screen display” (page 102).
[ALL]
[SAME FORMAT]
Displays all clips.
Displays clips in the same format as the system format.
[SELECT]
Displays clips selected with the control stick.
[MARKER]
Displays clips with shot marks.
[TEXT MEMO]
[SLOT n]
[P2/REMAIN]
[P2/USED]
[META DATA]
Displays clips with text memo data.
Displays clips in the specified P2 card. (n: slot numbers 1 to 3 are entered)
Displays the media information (remaining capacity).
Displays the media information (used capacity).
Displays the set metadata.
4 Simple properties display
Displays the various properties of the clip on which the pointer is positioned. You can select the items to display from the menu. For details, refer to
“Properties” (page 109).
@@NOTE
tt If the maximum number of characters is exceeded, it will only display the maximum number of characters that can be displayed.
5 Thumbnail
Displays the thumbnail recorded in each clip. You can change this thumbnail using the [EXCH. THUMBNAIL] function.
For details, refer to “Setting thumbnail screen display” (page 102).
6 Clip information display
By setting this item, displays either one of the time code [TC]/user bits [UB]/time of shooting [TIME]/date of shooting [DATE]/time and date of
shooting [DATE TIME]/clip name [CLIP NAME]/user clip name [USER CLIP NAME]/card slot number [SLOT]/time code of thumbnail [THUMBNAIL
TC] at the start of clip recording.
7 Recording mode
Displays the recording mode for the clip on which the cursor is positioned.
8 System format
Displays the format for the clip on which the cursor is positioned.
9 Duration
Displays the clip length (duration) at the cursor position and the current rough playback position against the clip length.
Playback position display is enabled when [RESUME] is selected in the main menu → [CLIP] → [THUMBNAIL SETUP] → [PB POSITION].
The approximate playback position is displayed when the playback start position is not at the beginning.
10 Number of selected clips
Shows the number of selected clips and the total number of clips.
11 Clip number
Displays the number assigned to the clip on the P2 card, normally in the order from the earliest recording date and time. The clip numbers of clips
that cannot be played are shown in red, and the unplayable indicator
is also displayed.
For details, refer to “Setting thumbnail screen display” (page 102).
12
Shot mark indicator
Displayed for the clip of a thumbnail with a shot mark attached.
For details, refer to “Shot mark recording function” (page 70).
13
Indicator for clips with proxy
Displayed for clips with proxy attached.
14
Text memo indicator
Displayed for clips with text memo data attached.
15
Edit copied clip indicator
Displayed for the edit copied clip.
16
Wide clip indicator
Displayed for clips recorded with the 16:9 aspect ratio. However, it does not accompany clips in HD format.
17
Incomplete clip indicator
Displayed when clips are saved across multiple P2 cards and either of the P2 cards is not inserted in a card slot.
18
/
Defective clip indicator,
Unknown clip indicator
Displayed for defective clips, which may result from various causes such as turning off the power during recording.
Clips with yellow defective clip indicators can sometimes be restored.
For details, refer to “Restoring clips” (page 105).
Clips with red defective clip indicators cannot be restored and must be deleted. If the clip cannot be deleted, format the P2 card.
is displayed for clips which differ in format from the P2 standard.
19 Thumbnail scroll bar
Indicates which part of the whole thumbnail is currently being viewed.
– 101 –
Chapter 5 Playback — Thumbnail operations
Selecting thumbnails
Multiple thumbnails can be randomly selected on the thumbnail screen.
Selecting clips
You can select multiple clips randomly.
1Use the control stick to move the cursor over the desired clip.
2Press the control stick.
A light blue frame and
are displayed on the clip where the cursor is put. This indicates that it is selected.
3To select additional clips, repeat steps 1 to 2.
It is possible to display only the selected clips on the thumbnail screen for playback.
@@NOTE
tt While holding down the <SHIFT> button, press the control stick upward/downward to move the cursor to the first/last clip.
tt After selecting a clip, move the cursor to another clip and press the control stick while pressing the <SHIFT> button to select all clips from the
previously selected clip to the one at cursor position.
tt As clips are selected, the number of selected clips displayed on the lower right corner of the screen changes according to the selection.
Deselecting clips
1Move the cursor to the selected clip and press the control stick.
This deselects the clip.
@@NOTE
tt While holding down the <SHIFT> button, press the <EXIT> button to deselect all the clips at once.
Setting thumbnail screen display
You can customize the thumbnail screen according to usage.
Setting example for thumbnail screen ([INDICATOR])
1Select [THUMBNAIL SETUP] in the main menu → [CLIP].
The thumbnail setting items ([INDICATOR], [DATA DISPLAY], [THUMBNAIL SIZE], [PB POSITION], [PROPERTY DISP.]) are displayed. For details,
refer to “Setting items that display properties” (page 103).
Setting thumbnails to be displayed
1Select [REPOSITION] in the main menu → [CLIP].
2Use the control stick to move the cursor to the size of the thumbnail you want to display.
3Press the control stick.
Setting the thumbnail size
You can customize the thumbnail size.
1Select [THUMBNAIL SIZE] in the main menu → [CLIP] → [THUMBNAIL SETUP].
2Use the control stick to move the cursor to the type of the clip you want to display.
3Press the control stick.
– 102 –
Chapter 5 Playback — Thumbnail operations
Setting the clip information display
You can customize the clip information display contents according to your preference.
1Select [DATA DISPLAY] in the main menu → [CLIP] → [THUMBNAIL SETUP].
2Use the control stick to move the cursor on the item you want to set.
3Press the control stick.
Setting items that display properties
You can set simple properties item displayed on the left of the thumbnail.
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
1Open the thumbnail screen. (Fig. 1)
2Select [PROPERTY DISP.] in the main menu → [CLIP] → [THUMBNAIL SETUP].
3Press the control stick to enter the item menu. (Fig. 2)
The selected item has a check mark on it.
4Press the control stick.
Pressing the control stick will check unchecked items, and uncheck the checked items.
@@NOTE
tt Property items can be displayed by selecting [SMALL] in the main menu → [CLIP] → [THUMBNAIL SETUP] → [THUMBNAIL SIZE].
tt A maximum of six items can be displayed at the same time.
tt When six items are already selected, all unchecked items cannot be selected. You can change your item selection by unchecking selected items.
Changing thumbnails
Replace thumbnails with images that include previously attached text memos while images are recorded or played back.
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
1Add text memos to images to be changed.
For details on adding text memos, refer to “Text memo recording function” (page 70).
2Select [TEXT MEMO CLIPS] in the main menu → [CLIP] → [REPOSITION] and display the thumbnails of clips with text memos.
3Move the cursor over the clip that you want to change the thumbnail and press the control stick, and then move the cursor to the
text memo display on the lower row.
4Select thumbnail to be replaced from the text memos, place the cursor on it, and select [EXCH. THUMBNAIL] in the main menu →
[CLIP]. (Fig. 1)
5Press the control stick, and on the confirmation screen displayed, select [YES] using the control stick. (Fig. 2)
The menu closes and the thumbnail for the clip is replaced.
– 103 –
Chapter 5 Playback — Thumbnail operations
@@NOTE
tt You can view the thumbnail position (number of frames from the top of the clip) from the [THUMBNAIL] item of the clip information display. Since
thumbnails usually come from the top of the clip, 0 is displayed.
tt Even if you change the thumbnail, playback from the thumbnail screen will still start from the beginning of the clip.
tt The thumbnail image with the [!] mark may be displayed for clips of a format with a different number of lines and frequencies when displaying a text
memo clip without displaying the thumbnail of the text memo position displayed at the bottom section.
Shot mark
Shot marks can be added to a clip thumbnail to distinguish the clip from others.
You must assign [SHOT MARK] to the USER button (USER1 to USER8) beforehand. For details, refer to “Assigning functions to the USER buttons”
(page 38).
1Use the control stick to move the cursor over the clip to which you want to add a shot mark.
2Press the USER button to which [SHOT MARK] is assigned.
ffA shot mark is added to the thumbnail of the clip at the cursor position.
ffTo delete a shot mark, place the cursor on the clip again and press the USER button to which [SHOT MARK] is assigned.
@@NOTE
tt You can attach a shot mark during recording.
tt Add shot marks after recording stops to attach the shot mark to the most recently recorded clip.
For details, refer to “Shot mark recording function” (page 70).
tt When adding a shot mark to or deleting the shot mark from a clip recorded across multiple P2 cards, do this with all these P2 cards inserted into card
slots.
Text memo
You can add text memos during recording or playback. Text memos can be used to play clips at some point or break clips into chunks and copy the
necessary portions.
Adding the text memo
You must assign [TEXT MEMO] to the USER button (USER1 to USER8) beforehand. For details, refer to “Assigning functions to the USER buttons”
(page 38).
1Press the USER button to which [TEXT MEMO] is assigned while recording, playback, thumbnails.
ffPressing this button while recording or playing inserts a text memo at the instance when the button was pressed. At that instance, [TEXT MEMO]
(when successful) or [TEXT MEMO INVALID] (when unsuccessful) is displayed.
ffPressing this button while the thumbnail screen is displayed inserts a text memo in the clip thumbnail (normally at the beginning) position.
@@NOTE
tt Up to 100 text memos can be recorded to a single clip.
tt Playback may stop for a moment when the USER button to which [TEXT MEMO] is assigned is pressed. This is not a malfunction.
tt You cannot record text memos during loop recording.
Playing back from the text memo position
Thumbnail display
Display still image linked to text memo
The cursor moves down
Selected number (blue) and total number (white) of text memo
clips
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
1Select [TEXT MEMO CLIPS] in the main menu → [CLIP] → [REPOSITION].
The thumbnails of the clips with text memos added are displayed in the upper section of the LCD monitor. The lower section of the LCD monitor
shows information on the text memo on the clip selected by the cursor. (Fig. 1)
– 104 –
Chapter 5 Playback — Thumbnail operations
2Move the cursor over the clip that contains the text memo to be played back and press the control stick.
The cursor moves to the lower section of the LCD monitor. (Fig. 2)
3With the cursor located in the lower section, press the control stick to the left/right to move the cursor to the text memo number
you want to play back and press the <=/&> button.
ffPlayback starts from the time code position of the text memo where the cursor is located.
If the <(> button is pressed during playback or the playback has finished at the end of the clip, the thumbnail screen appears again and the cursor
returns to the thumbnail of the text memo where the playback started.
ffWhile holding down the <SHIFT> button, press the control stick upward/downward to move the cursor to the first/last text memo.
ffPress the <EXIT> button to return the cursor to the upper section of the thumbnail screen.
@@NOTE
tt Pressing the REC button while the text memo screen is displayed does not start recording.
tt For clips in AVC‑Intra and AVC‑LongG formats with different settings (different system frequencies) in the main menu → [SYSTEM MODE], the
thumbnail of the text position may not be displayed and a thumbnail image with the [!] mark may be displayed.
Deleting text memos
1Perform steps 1 to 2 in “Playing back from the text memo position” (page 104) to select the desired text memo in a clip.
2Move the cursor over the text memo to be deleted and press the control stick.
3Select [DELETE] in the main menu → [CLIP] and press the control stick.
4Select [YES] using the control stick.
This deletes the text memo.
Using a text memo to divide a clip and copy the necessary portion
1Perform steps 1 to 2 in “Playing back from the text memo position” (page 104) to select the desired text memo in a clip.
2Move the cursor over the text memo to be copied and press the control stick.
You can select multiple text memos.
3Select [COPY] in the main menu → [CLIP].
4Select the copy target slot using the control stick and select [YES].
ffCopying starts.
ffThe portion between the selected text memo and the next one is copied. If no text memo is found after the selected one, then the part after the
selected text memo to the end of the clip is copied.
ffIf multiple text memos are selected, the selected sections are copied.
ffWhile the clip is being copied, the progress of the copy process and cancelation will be displayed. To discontinue the copy process, press the
control stick. When the [YES]/[NO] confirmation screen is displayed, use the control stick to select [YES].
@@NOTE
tt In clip division and copying using the text memo, the area copied may be automatically modified and copied depending on the recording method of the
clip.
Deleting clips
1Use the control stick to move the cursor over the clip to be deleted, and press the control stick to select the clip.
2Select [DELETE] in the main menu → [CLIP] and press the control stick.
3Select [YES] using the control stick.
The clip is deleted. All selected clips (in blue-green frames) are deleted by this operation.
@@NOTE
tt To interrupt the deletion process, press the <SHIFT> button + <EXIT> button or press the control stick to cancel the operation. Once a clip is deleted
halfway, it cannot be restored even if the deletion process is aborted.
Restoring clips
You can restore clips that were made defective as a result of sudden power-down during recording or removal of the P2 card being accessed.
1Use the control stick to move the cursor over the clip to be restored (defective clips are indicated by defective clip marks) and
press the control stick to select the clip.
2Select [REPAIR] in the main menu → [CLIP] and press the control stick.
3Select [YES] using the control stick.
This restores the clip.
– 105 –
Chapter 5 Playback — Thumbnail operations
@@NOTE
tt You can restore clips with yellow defective clip indicators. Delete clips with red defective clip indicators. If the clips cannot be deleted, format the P2
card.
During restoration of the clips, however, the defective clip indicator may change from yellow to red, and result in the inability to restore the clips.
Reconnecting incomplete clips
Incomplete clips may be generated when clips recorded on multiple P2 cards (connected clips) are separately copied from each card. The reconnection
function generates one clip (the original, connected clip) from incomplete clips.
1Use the control stick to select incomplete clips to be linked.
Usually, thumbnails of incomplete clips (clips with
indication) are displayed next to each other.
2Select [RE‑CONNECT] in the main menu → [CLIP] and press the control stick.
3Select [YES] using the control stick.
This reconnects incomplete clips.
@@NOTE
tt Incomplete clip indicators will remain displayed when only some clips are reconnected, unless all the constituent clips of the original clip are
reconnected.
Copying clips
Selected clips can be copied to a P2 card or a connected USB storage device in the desired slot.
1Use the control stick to move the cursor over the clip to be copied, and press the control stick to select the clip.
2Move the cursor to the copy target from the [COPY] list in the main menu → [CLIP] and press the control stick.
ffWhen multiple clips are selected, the number of selected clips is displayed after pressing the control stick.
ffIf the copy destination is a storage device, select the copy destination properties.
3Move the cursor to [YES] in the confirmation message and press the control stick.
This starts copying of the clip.
4When the completion message appears, press the control stick.
@@NOTE
tt Turning off the power or inserting/removing a card during copying may damage the P2 card. If you accidentally make these mistakes, it can result in
defective clips. After deleting the defective clips redo copying.
tt Copying is not performed when the following error messages are displayed.
- [LACK OF CAPACITY!]
Copying could not be performed because the recording capacity of the copy destination is insufficient.
- [UNKNOWN CONTENTS FORMAT!]
Copying could not be performed because a defective clip is selected.
- [NO COPY TO SAME CARD!]
Copying could not be performed because you are attempting to copy to the same card.
- [TOO MANY CLIPS!]
Copying could not be performed because there are too many clips selected.
tt If the copying is performed while a text memo is selected in the lower part of the text memo, the section between the selected text memo position and
the next text memo will be copied. If no text memo is found after the selected one, then the part after the selected text memo to the end of the clip is
copied. For details, refer to “Using a text memo to divide a clip and copy the necessary portion” (page 105).
tt To interrupt copying, press the <SHIFT> button + <EXIT> button, or the control stick to cancel the operation. The clip being copied will be deleted from
the copy destination.
tt When identical clips (same [GLOBAL CLIP ID]) exist on the destination, [OVERWRITE?] is displayed. Select [YES] when overwriting the clip, and
select [NO] when not overwriting the clip.
Setting clip metadata
Information such as the name of the person who shot the video, the name of the reporter, the shooting location, or text memos can be loaded from an
SD memory card, and can be recorded as clip metadata.
Clip metadata items
Clip metadata includes the following items. Underlined items can be set by loading the metadata upload file on the SD memory card. Other items are
set automatically during shooting. Using the latest update version of P2 Viewer Plus, metadata upload files can be written to SD memory cards using a
computer. Download and install the latest version of P2 Viewer Plus from the following website.
http://pro-av.panasonic.net/
For details on SD memory cards to be used, refer to “Cautions when using SD memory cards” (page 19).
@@NOTE
tt Files which were not edited by P2 Viewer Plus are displayed as [UNKNOWN DATA!] and may not be readable.
[GLOBAL CLIP ID]
Displays the global clip ID that shows the shooting status of the clip.
[USER CLIP NAME]
Displays the clip name set by the user.*1
– 106 –
Chapter 5 Playback — Thumbnail operations
[VIDEO]
Displays [FRAME RATE] (frame rate of the clip), [PULL DOWN] (pull-down format), and [ASPECT RATIO].
[AUDIO]
Displays [SAMPLING RATE] (sampling frequency of recorded audio) and [BITS PER SAMPLE] (quantizing bits for recorded audio).
[ACCESS]
Displays [CREATOR] (person who recorded the clip), [CREATION DATE] (date when the clip was recorded), [LAST UPDATE DATE]
(date of the latest update of the clip), and [LAST UPDATE PERSON] (person who made the latest update of the clip).
[DEVICE]
Displays [MANUFACTURER] (name of the device manufacturer), [SERIAL NO.] (serial number of the device), and [MODEL NAME]
(model name of the device).
[SHOOT]
Displays [SHOOTER] (name of the person who shot the video), [START DATE] (start date of shooting), [END DATE] (end date of
shooting), and [LOCATION]/[ALTITUDE]/[LONGITUDE]/[LATITUDE]/[SOURCE]/[PLACE NAME] (altitude, longitude, latitude, and
source of the information and name of the location).
[SCENARIO]
Displays [PROGRAM NAME], [SCENE NO.], and [TAKE NO.].
[NEWS]
Displays [REPORTER] (name of the reporter), [PURPOSE] (purpose of shooting), and [OBJECT] (object of shooting).
[MEMO]*2
Displays [NO.] (the number of the text memo), [OFFSET] (location of the frame where the text memo is added), [PERSON] (person
who recorded the text memo added to the clip), and [TEXT] (content of the text memo).
[THUMBNAIL]
Displays the location of the frame (frame offset) and the size (height and width) of the image selected as the thumbnail image.
[PROXY]
Displays information such as proxy format when proxy is added.
*1 You can select the [USER CLIP NAME] recording method. For details, refer to “Selecting the [USER CLIP NAME] recording method” (page 108).
*2 When entering [MEMO], make sure to enter [TEXT]. It is not possible to record only [PERSON] (the person inputting the memo), or [OFFSET] (the recording
position).
Loading clip metadata (metadata upload)
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
1Insert the SD memory card that contains the clip metadata (metadata upload file).
2Select [LOAD] in the main menu → [RECORDING SETUP] → [REC META DATA] and press the control stick.
The metadata name of the metadata upload file on the SD memory card is displayed. (Fig. 1)
3Use the control stick to select the file to be loaded, and select [YES].
ffUpload starts.
ffUploaded metadata is retained even if the power is turned off.
ffFor confirmation of uploaded data, refer to “Checking and modifying uploaded metadata” (page 107).
@@NOTE
tt While displaying metadata names, press the control stick to the right to switch to file name display. (Fig. 2)
Press the control stick to the left to return to metadata name display.
Checking and modifying uploaded metadata
Details of metadata uploaded from an SD memory card can be checked.
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
1Select [PROPERTY] in the main menu → [RECORDING SETUP] → [REC META DATA].
The metadata list is displayed.
– 107 –
Chapter 5 Playback — Thumbnail operations
2Use the control stick to move the cursor over the item to be checked, and press the control stick. (Fig. 1)
Settings of the uploaded metadata can be checked.
3While checking the settings for the metadata, use the control stick to move the cursor over the item that you want to change the
setting, and press the control stick.
ffA software keyboard screen is displayed, allowing you to modify the setting. (Fig. 2)
ffWhile holding down the <SHIFT> button, press the control stick upward/downward to move the cursor to the first/last of the setting items.
Setting whether to record the uploaded metadata
Set [ON]/[OFF] in the main menu → [RECORDING SETUP] → [REC META DATA] → [RECORD]. [OFF] is set in the factory settings.
Selecting the [USER CLIP NAME] recording method
Select the [USER CLIP NAME] recording method from the two of [TYPE1] and [TYPE2] in the main menu → [RECORDING SETUP] → [REC META
DATA] → [USER CLIP NAME].
rr [TYPE1] (factory settings)
Status of clip metadata
[USER CLIP NAME] to be recorded
When clip metadata has been loaded
Uploaded data
When no clip metadata has been loaded, or when setting disables recording of loaded clip
metadata
Same as [GLOBAL CLIP ID]
rr [TYPE2]
Status of clip metadata
[USER CLIP NAME] to be recorded
When clip metadata has been loaded
Uploaded data + [COUNT] value*
When no clip metadata has been loaded, or when setting disables recording of loaded clip
metadata
Same as [CLIP NAME]
* The [COUNT] value is indicated as a four-digit number.
The [COUNT] value is incremented each time a new clip is generated, if the clip metadata has been loaded and [TYPE2] has been selected as the recording
method.
The [COUNT] value can be reset using the following method.
When you select [PROPERTY] in the main menu → [RECORDING SETUP] → [REC META DATA] and then select [USER CLIP NAME], the following screen is
displayed. Move the cursor over [COUNT RESET], and press the control stick to reset the [COUNT] value to 1.
Initializing the metadata setting
Select [INITIALIZE] in the main menu → [RECORDING SETUP] → [REC META DATA] and press the control stick. Select [YES] when the confirmation
screen is displayed.
The settings in the main menu → [RECORDING SETUP] → [REC META DATA] and later items, including loaded metadata, are initialized.
Setting metadata display language
Set the language when displaying metadata. Select [LANGUAGE] in the main menu → [RECORDING SETUP] → [REC META DATA], then select the
display language, and press the control stick.
When you select [NTSC (J)] as a region of use, you can choose either [ENGLISH] or [JAPANESE].
@@NOTE
tt Characters that cannot be displayed in English are not displayed properly but are displayed as “*”.
tt Only alphanumeric characters can be entered.
Formatting a P2 card
1Select [FORMAT] in the main menu → [CLIP].
ffSelect the slot number where the P2 card to be formatted is inserted, and press the control stick.
– 108 –
Chapter 5 Playback — Thumbnail operations
ffSelect [EXIT] when you do not wish to format the card.
2Select [YES] using the control stick.
The selected P2 card is formatted.
@@NOTE
tt Data deleted as a result of formatting cannot be restored. Always check the data before formatting.
tt If the CPS password has been set, the confirmation message whether to select the encrypted format [CPS(ENCRYPT)] or normal format [NORMAL] is
displayed when selecting a slot. When the encrypted format is selected, the microP2 memory card is encrypted.
Formatting SD memory cards
SD memory cards can also be formatted in the thumbnail screen. With an SD memory card inserted into the camera, perform the following operation.
1Select [FORMAT] in the main menu → [CLIP].
ffSelect [SD CARD] and press the control stick.
ffSelect [EXIT] when you do not wish to format the card.
2Select [YES] using the control stick.
The SD memory card is formatted.
@@NOTE
tt SD memory cards can also be formatted in the main menu → [CARD FUNCTIONS] → [FORMAT SD CARD].
For details, refer to “Formatting SD memory cards” (page 84).
tt Data deleted as a result of formatting cannot be restored. Always check the data before formatting.
Properties
Clip properties and P2 card status are displayed.
It is possible to edit and rewrite the recorded clip metadata while clip properties are displayed.
Clip properties
Select [CLIP PROPERTY] in the main menu → [CLIP] → [PROPERTY].
1
2
3
5
4
1 Clip information
Displays the indicators added to the clip and the number of added text memos.
The
mark will be displayed if the P2 card in which the clip is recorded is write-protected.
2 Clip number
@@NOTE
tt For clips that cannot be played back, the number is displayed in red.
3 Thumbnail
4 Clip information
Displays detailed information about the clip.
[CLIP NAME]
Displays clip names.
[START TC]
Displays the time code value at the start of the recording.
[START UB]
Displays the user bit value at the start of the recording.
[DATE]
Displays the date of the recording.
[TIME]
Displays the time at the start of recording.
[DURATION]
Displays the time length of the clip.
[V_FORMAT]
Displays the recording format of the clip.
[FRAME RATE]
[REC RATE]
Displays the frame rate for playback.
Displays the recording frame rate. For the clips recorded with variable frame rate compatible devices, the frame rate at the
time of shooting is displayed.
– 109 –
Chapter 5 Playback — Thumbnail operations
5 Clip metadata
The items for referencing clip properties (clip metadata) are displayed.
For details, refer to “Setting clip metadata” (page 106).
Modifying recorded clip metadata
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
1Display the metadata details window for the clip to be modified on the clip properties screen.
2Place the cursor on the item to be modified using the control stick. (Fig. 1)
The items of the metadata with the gray buttons in background can be modified.
3Press the control stick.
Information about keyboard operation is the same as “Checking and modifying uploaded metadata” (page 107).
ffThe input window (soft keyboard) for modifying metadata is displayed. (Fig. 2)
ffEnter characters with the keyboard to modify the metadata.
4Press the [OK] button on the keyboard.
The modified metadata is written on the clip and the screen returns to the metadata details window.
@@NOTE
tt To delete each item in [LOCATION] (shooting location data) of [SHOOT], the item cannot be deleted alone. By setting the [ALTITUDE] item to empty,
other [LONGITUDE] and [LATITUDE] items are collectively deleted.
tt Metadata of clips with
(incomplete clip indicator) cannot be repaired. Repair of metadata of clips recorded across multiple P2 cards must be
performed after inserting all of the P2 cards.
tt Any [MEMO] with 101 characters or more cannot be modified.
Displaying P2 card status
rr P2 card status display settings
You can select the P2 card status display from either remaining capacity or used capacity of the P2 card.
Fig. 1
1Press the <THUMBNAIL> button.
The thumbnail screen appears on the viewfinder screen.
2Select [REMAIN] (remaining capacity) or [USED] (used capacity) in the main menu → [CLIP] → [PROPERTY] → [REMAIN SETUP].
(Fig. 1)
rr P2 card status display items
[REMAIN]
Displays remaining capacity on the P2 card as the P2 card status display. (Factory setting)
– 110 –
Chapter 5 Playback — Thumbnail operations
[USED]
Displays used memory capacity on the P2 card as the P2 card status display.
Contents of P2 card status display settings
Select [CARD STATUS] in the main menu → [CLIP] → [PROPERTY].
rr When [REMAIN] is selected
1
2
5
3
4
rr When [USED] is selected
1
2
5
3
4
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
1 Write-protected mark
The
mark appears when the P2 card is write-protected.
2 P2 card status (remaining capacity)
The remaining memory capacity of the P2 card is shown as a bar graph and percentage. The bar graph indicator moves to the left as the remaining
capacity decreases.
The following displays may also appear, depending on the card status.
[FORMAT ERROR!]
An unformatted P2 card is inserted.
[NOT SUPPORTED!]
An unsupported card is inserted.
[NO CARD]
[AUTH NG CARD]
No P2 card is inserted.
Indicates that the card is a microP2 memory card which cannot authenticate a CPS password.
Use the control stick to place the cursor on the P2 card where data to be accessed is saved and press the control stick to display detailed
information on the P2 card. Specific information such as the serial number and the user ID can be checked. (Fig. 1)
When the maximum number of clips that can be recorded in the P2 card has been reached, [OVER MAX NUMBER CLIPS] is displayed in the P2
card detailed information showing that the upper limit has been reached.
3 Warning card mark
When P2 cards are the following status, the
[RUN DOWN CARD]
mark is displayed.
The maximum number of overwrites on the P2 card has been exceeded.
– 111 –
Chapter 5 Playback — Thumbnail operations
[DIR ENTRY NG]
The directory structure on the P2 card is not supported.
The warning can be checked on the P2 card detailed information in “P2 card status (remaining capacity)” (page 111). (Fig. 2)
4 Total slot memory remaining capacity (or used capacity)
This displays the total remaining memory capacity (or used capacity) of the three slots.
The available space of a write-protected P2 card is not included in the total available space.
5 P2 card remaining capacity (or used capacity) / total capacity
This displays the remaining capacity (or used capacity) / total capacity of the P2 card. Since only the figures in minutes are displayed, the remaining
memory capacity (or used capacity) for each P2 card may not match the total capacity.
Setting CPS password
To set a CPS password, either load the password from the SD memory card or use the menu of the camera to enter the password.
Only one CPS password can be set on the camera. Loading the CPS password again overwrites the previously saved password.
Loading CPS password from SD memory card
1Download and install the latest P2 Viewer Plus into a computer.
2With P2 Viewer Plus, generate a CPS password and write it to the SD memory card.
3Load the CPS password file.
1) Start the camera, and insert the SD memory card into the SD card slot.
2) Open the thumbnail screen and select [LOAD] in the main menu → [CLIP] → [PROPERTY] → [CPS PASSWORD].
The password file list is displayed.
3) Select the file to be used and press the control stick.
ffWhen loading of the CPS password has succeeded, the message [LOADING PASSWORD COMPLETED!] is displayed.
ffWhen loading of the CPS password has failed, a warning message is displayed. For an explanation of warnings, refer to “Warning system”
(page 178).
@@NOTE
tt The CPS password file generated on the SD memory card is encrypted. If it is no longer used, format the SD memory card for security risk
management.
Setting CPS password using the menu of the camera
1Open the thumbnail screen and select [SET] in the main menu → [CLIP] → [PROPERTY] → [CPS PASSWORD].
The software keyboard to enter the CPS password is displayed.
2Enter the CPS password with the keyboard.
Enter [PASSWORD] and [RETRY PASSWORD] for verification, and select [OK] to set the CPS password.
ffWhen entry of the CPS password has succeeded, the message [SETTING PASSWORD COMPLETED!] is displayed.
ffWhen entry of the CPS password has failed, the warning message is displayed. For warnings description, refer to “During thumbnail and menu
operation” (page 179).
@@NOTE
tt Up to 16 characters can be input.
tt The entered password cannot be displayed on the device. Do not forget the password.
Deleting CPS password
When the CPS function is no longer used, delete the CPS password.
1Open the thumbnail screen and select [DELETE] in the main menu → [CLIP] → [PROPERTY] → [CPS PASSWORD].
[DELETING PASSWORD COMPLETED!] is displayed and the CPS password is deleted.
@@NOTE
tt When the CPS password is deleted, automatic authentication of the encrypted microP2 memory card and encryption format function are disabled.
Manual CPS authentication
An encrypted microP2 memory card is authenticated on the camera automatically, and can be used only if the authentication has succeeded.
Authentication fails if the CPS password set to device and the CPS password set to microP2 memory card differ. To temporarily use a microP2 memory
card whose authentication has failed, manually enter the CPS password authorized for the microP2 memory card in accordance with the following
procedures. If the code matches, you can use the card.
1Confirm that authentication has failed.
1) Open the thumbnail screen and select [CARD STATUS] in the main menu → [CLIP] → [PROPERTY].
For the card whose authentication has failed, the slot number frame at the top right of the screen turns red, and [AUTH NG CARD] is displayed on
the remaining capacity bar. Select the card by pushing the control stick upward/downward.
2Perform manual authentication.
– 112 –
Chapter 5 Playback — Thumbnail operations
1) On the card status screen, select [AUTHENTICATE] in the main menu → [CLIP].
The software keyboard to enter the CPS password is displayed.
2) Enter the password set on the microP2 memory card and select [OK].
ffWhen entry of the CPS password has succeeded, the message [AUTHENTICATED SUCCESSFULLY!] is displayed.
ffWhen entry of the CPS password has failed, the warning message (page 179) is displayed.
@@NOTE
tt Manual authentication is valid temporarily. If the target microP2 card is removed or power is turned off, the CPS password set manually is disabled.
tt Visit the following website for conditions where manual authentication is valid.
http://pro-av.panasonic.net/
tt The encrypted microP2 memory card is not recognized on the SD card slot in a computer.
tt If the card is unable to be recognized, authenticate with the correct password, or format the card and use it as recording media, or remove it from the
camera. Do not perform any operation other than manual authentication and formatting with the failed card inserted.
SD memory card status display
The status display enables confirmation of the SD memory card format condition, available memory space, etc.
Select [SD CARD] in the main menu → [CLIP] → [PROPERTY]. The same information can be displayed from the main menu → [CARD FUNCTIONS]
→ [SD CARD PROPERTY].
[SD STANDARD]
Indicates whether an SD memory card is formatted according to the SD/SDHC/SDXC standard.
ff[SUPPORTED]: Complies with SD/SDHC/SDXC standards
ff[NOT SUPPORTED]: Does not comply with SD/SDHC/SDXC standards
[USED]
Used capacity (bytes)
[BLANK]
Available space (bytes)
[TOTAL]
Total capacity (bytes)
[PROXY REM]
Remaining capacity for proxy recording
[NUMBER OF CLIPS]
The number of clips on an SD memory card when clips have been copied to an SD memory card
[PROTECT]
Write-protected status
– 113 –
Chapter 6
Menu Operations
This chapter describes how to operate the camera menus, the structure, and details of the setting menu.
Chapter 6 Menu Operations — Setting menu structure
Setting menu structure
Menu types and how to open them
Menu type
Use
How to open
[USER MENU]
In the main menu → [USER MENU SEL], you can select
the desired items and pages and register to [USER
MENU]. You can select them depending on the purpose or
frequency of use to make a unique menu structure.
For details, refer to “Setting [USER MENU]” (page 117).
Displayed by pressing the <MENU> button.
Main menu
You can set all items in the setting menu.
The main menu has a structure of categorized layers
according to intended use and setting frequency.
Displayed by pressing and holding the <MENU> button for
three seconds or more.
[OPTION MENU]
Menu items are prepared to take into account additional
functions in the future.
Please consult your vendor for more details.
Displayed by pressing the <MENU> button while pressing
and holding the <LCD BACKLIGHT> button.
Main menu structure
[SCENE FILE]
Configures the settings for scene files.
This item is used to configure detailed image quality settings of the camera images, to select scene files, and to
configure the settings for reading/writing of scene file data to the internal memory.
This menu item cannot be set when the thumbnail screen is displayed.
[SYSTEM MODE]
Configures the settings for the recording format of video and audio.
[USER SW]
Sets the functions to be assigned to the USER buttons (USER1 to USER8).
[SW MODE]
Configures the operations of each mode when switched the mode using each switch.
This menu item cannot be set when the thumbnail screen is displayed.
[AUTO SW]
Configures the settings for the auto mode.
Auto iris, auto gain control, auto tracking white balance, and auto focus functions can be set separately.
This menu item cannot be set when the thumbnail screen is displayed.
[RECORDING SETUP]
Configures various settings when performing recording and playback.
Set the system frequency, the number of lines, recording format, and recording method.
[CLIP]
Used when performing various tasks, such as playing back, deleting, and copying clips, and editing metadata, while
checking the thumbnail of the clips displayed in the viewfinder or LCD monitor.
This menu item is enabled when the thumbnail screen is displayed.
Clip operations such as [DELETE] or [COPY] are enabled when the target thumbnail is selected.
Some items are displayed only in specific situations such as in USB host mode or on the explorer screen.
[AUDIO SETUP]
Configures the settings for audio input/output.
[OUTPUT SEL]
Configures the settings for video output from the <SDI OUT>, <HDMI OUT>, <GENLOCK IN/VIDEO OUT>, and <TC IN/
OUT> terminals.
[NETWORK SETUP]
Configures the settings for network.
[DISPLAY SETUP]
Configures the settings for the details to be displayed in the viewfinder or LCD monitor.
This menu item cannot be set when the thumbnail screen is displayed.
[CARD FUNCTIONS]
Configures the settings for reading/writing of scene files and user files to SD memory cards.
[OTHER FUNCTIONS]
Configures the settings for reading/writing of user files to internal memory and initialization, and the camera settings.
[MAINTENANCE]
Used for performing maintenance of the camera. This item is used when updating the firmware version of the camera.
[DIAGNOSTIC]
Displays the firmware version, product name, serial number, and energized time of the camera.
[USER MENU SEL]
Sets the items to be displayed in [USER MENU].
– 115 –
Chapter 6 Menu Operations — Setting menu display
Setting menu display
Setting menu basic operations
You can change camera settings using the setting menu according to the shooting scene and recording details.
The menu is divided into the main menu, submenu, and setting item menu.
Set data are written and saved in the internal memory of the camera.
Menu items can be selected by control stick operation or the <SEL/PUSH SET> dial button operation.
This section describes main menu operations. Main menu operation is the same as the other menus except when opening the menu screen.
a b c d
e
f g
a: <EXIT> button
b: Control stick
c: <MENU> button (Operation panel of the LCD monitor)
d: <SHIFT> button
e: <SEL/PUSH SET> dial button
f: <MENU> button
g: <MODE/MENU CANCEL> button
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
Fig. 3
Fig. 4
rr Selecting menu item using control stick
1Press and hold the <MENU> button for three seconds or more when not recording.
ffThe main menu screen is displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD monitor.
2Press the control stick upward/downward to place the cursor on the desired menu item. (Fig. 1)
ffThe cursor moves up/down by pushing the control stick upward/downward.
– 116 –
Chapter 6 Menu Operations — Setting menu display
ffIf there is a menu in the next level, [w] is displayed in the menu items.
Pressing the control stick to the right or pressing the control stick opens the lower-level menus. (Fig. 2)
ffPressing the control stick to the left or pressing the <EXIT> button returns the upper level of menu.
3Press the control stick.
ffThe confirmation screen is displayed depending on the menu item.
Press the control stick upward/downward/to the left/to the right to select the operation, and then press the control stick.
A checkmark is placed in front of the set item.
ffIn some menus, a screen for value setting is displayed. (Fig. 3)
4Press the <MENU> button to close the menu.
ffThis brings you back automatically to the previous screen depending on the menu item.
rr Selecting menu item with the <SEL/PUSH SET> dial button
1Press and hold the <MENU> button for three seconds or more when not recording.
ffThe main menu screen is displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD monitor.
2Turn the <SEL/PUSH SET> dial button to place the cursor on the desired menu item. (Fig. 1)
ffThe cursor moves up/down by turning the <SEL/PUSH SET> dial button upward/downward.
ffIf there is a menu in the next level, [w] is displayed in the menu items.
Pressing the <SEL/PUSH SET> dial button opens the lower-level menus. (Fig. 2)
ffYou can go back to the upper levels by pressing the <EXIT> button or by placing the cursor on the topmost line ([EXIT]) then pressing the <SEL/
PUSH SET> dial button.
3Press the <SEL/PUSH SET> dial button.
ffThe confirmation screen is displayed depending on the menu item.
Turn the <SEL/PUSH SET> dial button to select the operation, and then press the <SEL/PUSH SET> dial button.
A checkmark is placed in front of the set item.
ffIn some menus, a screen for value setting is displayed. (Fig. 3)
4Press the <MENU> button to close the menu.
ffThis brings you back automatically to the previous screen depending on the menu item.
rr Performing cancellation while setting
1Press the <MODE/MENU CANCEL> button. Alternatively, press the <EXIT> button while holding down the <SHIFT> button.
[MENU CANCEL BACK TO PREV] is displayed. (Fig. 4)
2Press the <MODE/MENU CANCEL> button again. Alternatively, press the <EXIT> button while holding down the <SHIFT> button.
The changed value returns to the value before changing.
@@NOTE
tt You will need to restart the camera if the number of lines and frequency setting of the system change.
Setting [USER MENU]
1Select the main menu → [USER MENU SEL].
2Select and display various items according to level.
3Put checkmarks [l] on the items to be displayed in [USER MENU].
You can select menu items in each item or page. You can select up to 64 items.
Selected items are displayed on the main menu page or item in order.
Setting menu initialization
The values set in the setting menu are saved in the user file and scene file. Both the user file and scene file can be initialized to the factory settings.
Initializing user file (all items except for the scene file)
1Select [INITIALIZE] in the main menu → [OTHER FUNCTIONS] → [USER FILE].
Initializing selected scene file
1Select the scene file to initialize in the main menu → [SCENE FILE] → [FILE SELECT].
2Select [INITIALIZE] in the main menu → [SCENE FILE] → [LOAD/SAVE/INITIALIZE].
– 117 –
Chapter 6 Menu Operations — Setting menu display
Initializing user file and all scene files simultaneously
1Select the main menu → [OTHER FUNCTIONS] → [MENU INITIALIZE].
2Select [YES].
– 118 –
Chapter 6 Menu Operations — Menu list
Menu list
[SCENE FILE]
Configure the settings regarding scene files.
This menu is used to set fine image quality settings of the camera images, select scene files, and read/write scene file data to the internal memory.
These menu items cannot be set when the thumbnail screen is displayed.
Item
[FILE SELECT]
Description of settings
Selects the scene file (1 to 6).
[F1:], [F2:FLUO.], [F3:SPARK], [F4:B-STR], [F5:CINE V], [F6:CINE D]
ffFactory setting: [F1:]
[NAME EDIT]
Edits the name of the scene file selected in the scene file menu. (Maximum of six characters)
[LOAD/SAVE/INITIALIZE]
Loads/saves/initializes the setting values allocated on the current scene file number (any one from 1 to 6).
[LOAD]: Selects and loads a scene file saved in the camera memory.
[SAVE]: Specifies a title and file number for the current setting values and saves them as a scene file in
the camera memory.
[INITIALIZE]: Initializes the selected scene files (1 to 6) to the factory settings.
[VFR]
Sets permission/prohibition of the variable frame rate (VFR).
[ON], [OFF]
ffFactory setting: [OFF]
[FRAME RATE]
Switches the shooting interval and exposure time when [VFR] is [ON].
When [SYSTEM MODE] = 59.94 Hz:
[60fps], [54fps], [48fps], [44fps], [40fps], [36fps], [34fps], [32fps], [30fps], [28fps], [27fps], [26fps],
[25fps], [24fps], [22fps], [21fps], [20fps], [18fps], [15fps], [12fps], [9fps], [6fps], [4fps], [2fps], [1fps]
When [SYSTEM MODE] = 50 Hz:
[50fps], [48fps], [45fps], [42fps], [37fps], [34fps], [32fps], [30fps], [28fps], [27fps], [26fps], [25fps],
[24fps], [23fps], [22fps], [21fps], [20fps], [18fps], [15fps], [12fps], [9fps], [6fps], [4fps], [2fps], [1fps]
ffFactory setting: [30fps] (when [SYSTEM MODE] = 59.94 Hz), [25fps] (when [SYSTEM MODE] = 50 Hz)
[SYNC SCAN TYPE]
Switches the synchro scan display settings.
[sec]: Displays in time.
[deg]: Displays at shutter open angle.
ffFactory setting: [sec]
[SYNCHRO SCAN]
Displays the speed of the synchro scan shutter that is used when shooting video for television etc.
When [SYNC SCAN TYPE] = [sec], and [SYSTEM MODE] = 59.94 Hz:
ff60i/60p: [1/60.0]…[1/249.8]
ff30P: [1/30.0]…[1/249.8]
ff24P: [1/24.0]…[1/249.8]
When [SYNC SCAN TYPE] = [sec], and [SYSTEM MODE] = 50 Hz:
ff50i/50P: [1/50.0]…[1/250.0]
ff25P: [1/25.0]…[1/250.0]
When [SYNC SCAN TYPE] = [deg] (in 0.5 d steps, angle display): [3.0d]…[360.0d]
ffFactory setting: [1/60.0] (when [SYNC SCAN TYPE] = [sec], and [SYSTEM MODE] = 59.94 Hz)
[MASTER DTL]
Sets the level of the detail effect of the whole part.
[−31]…[31]
ffFactory setting: [0]
[DTL CORING]
Sets the level of signal (including noise) that does not activate the detail effect.
[0]…[60]
ffFactory setting: [1]
[DETAIL SETTING]
[DETAIL]
Sets [ON]/[OFF] of the detail function.
[ON], [OFF]
ffFactory setting: [ON]
[V.DTL LEVEL]
Sets the intensity of the detail level in the vertical direction.
[−7]…[7]
ffFactory setting: [0]
[H.DTL FREQ.]
Sets the thickness of the detail level in the horizontal direction.
[−7]…[7]
ffFactory setting: [0]
[V. DTL FREQ.]
Sets the thickness of the detail level in the vertical direction.
[0]…[2]
ffFactory setting: [1]
[LEVEL DEPEND.]
When the detail of luminosity signal is emphasized, details in the darker parts are compressed.
Details of bright areas are also compressed more when the value set for [LEVEL DEPEND.] is larger.
[−7]…[7]
ffFactory setting: [0]
[KNEE APE LVL]
Sets the detail level of high luminosity areas (high-brightness areas).
[0]…[5]
ffFactory setting: [2]
[DTL GAIN(+)]
Sets the detail level of + direction (to make brighter).
[−31]…[31]
ffFactory setting: [0]
[DTL GAIN(−)]
Sets the detail level of − direction (to make darker).
[−31]…[31]
ffFactory setting: [0]
– 119 –
Chapter 6 Menu Operations — Menu list
Item
Description of settings
[SKIN TONE DTL A]
Selects the skin tone table that will display the skin tone detail.
Create the skin tone table with [DETECT TABLE]. You can shoot smoother skin tones by displaying the
skin tone detail. [SKIN TONE DTL A] can be used alone or used in combination with [SKIN TONE DTL B]
and [SKIN TONE DTL C].
[ON], [OFF]
ffFactory setting: [OFF]
[SKIN TONE DTL B]
Selects the skin tone table that will display the skin tone detail.
Create the skin tone table with [DETECT TABLE]. You can shoot smoother skin tones by displaying the
skin tone detail. [SKIN TONE DTL B] can be used alone or used in combination with [SKIN TONE DTL A]
and [SKIN TONE DTL C].
[ON], [OFF]
ffFactory setting: [OFF]
[SKIN TONE DTL C]
Selects the skin tone table that will display the skin tone detail.
Create the skin tone table with [DETECT TABLE]. You can shoot smoother skin tones by displaying the
skin tone detail. [SKIN TONE DTL C] can be used alone or used in combination with [SKIN TONE DTL A]
and [SKIN TONE DTL B].
[ON], [OFF]
ffFactory setting: [OFF]
[SKIN TONE ZEBRA]
Set to display a zebra pattern in the skin tone area displayed in the viewfinder screen.
The zebra pattern is displayed when this item is set to [ON] and [SKIN TONE DTL A]/[SKIN TONE DTL B]/
[SKIN TONE DTL C] is activated.
The zebra pattern displays the area selected in [SKIN TONE DTL SETTING].
[ON], [OFF]
ffFactory setting: [ON]
[SKIN TONE DTL
SETTING]
[RB GAIN CONTROL
SETTING]
[DETECT TABLE]
Selects the skin tone table of the subject that displays the skin tone detail.
[A], [B], [C]
ffFactory setting: [A]
[SKIN TONE GET]
Obtains the color information of [A], [B], or [C] selected in [DETECT TABLE] from near the center marker.
If executed, data from [I CENTER] to [Q PHASE] are automatically obtained.
The obtained data becomes the table data of [A], [B], or [C] selected in [DETECT TABLE].
Multiple color information for [A], [B], and [C] cannot be obtained simultaneously.
[SKIN DTL EFFECT]
Sets the effective level of the skin tone detail.
[0]…[31]
ffFactory setting: [16]
[I CENTER]
Sets the center position of the upper I axis (setting the area that displays the skin tone).
[0]…[255]
ffFactory setting: [35]
[I WIDTH]
Sets the width of the area that displays the skin tone of the upper I axis that focus on [I CENTER].
[0]…[255]
ffFactory setting: [55]
[Q WIDTH]
Sets the width of the area that displays the skin tone of the upper Q axis that focus on [I CENTER].
[0]…[90]
ffFactory setting: [10]
[Q PHASE]
Sets the phase of the area that displays the skin tone regarding to the Q axis.
[−180]…[179]
ffFactory setting: [0]
[R GAIN AWB PRE]
Sets the Rch gain when the <WHITE BAL> switch is on <PRST>.
[−200]…[200]
ffFactory setting: [0]
[B GAIN AWB PRE]
Sets the Bch gain when the <WHITE BAL> switch is on <PRST>.
[−200]…[200]
ffFactory setting: [0]
[R GAIN AWB A]
Sets the Rch gain when the <WHITE BAL> switch is on <A>.
[−200]…[200]
ffFactory setting: [0]
[B GAIN AWB A]
Sets the Bch gain when the <WHITE BAL> switch is on <A>.
[−200]…[200]
ffFactory setting: [0]
[R GAIN AWB B]
Sets the Rch gain when the <WHITE BAL> switch is on <B>.
[−200]…[200]
ffFactory setting: [0]
[B GAIN AWB B]
Sets the Bch gain when the <WHITE BAL> switch is on <B>.
[−200]…[200]
ffFactory setting: [0]
[AWB A GAIN OFFSET]
Sets the Rch gain and Bch gain when performing automatic white balance after the <WHITE BAL> switch
is on <A>.
[ON]: Keeps the values set in [R GAIN AWB A] and [B GAIN AWB A].
[OFF]: Sets the value of Rch gain and Bch gain to [0].
ffFactory setting: [OFF]
[AWB B GAIN OFFSET]
Sets the Rch gain and Bch gain when performing automatic white balance after the <WHITE BAL> switch
is on <B>.
[ON]: Keeps the values set in [R GAIN AWB B] and [B GAIN AWB B].
[OFF]: Sets the value of Rch gain and Bch gain to [0].
ffFactory setting: [OFF]
– 120 –
Chapter 6 Menu Operations — Menu list
Item
[COLOR TEMP Ach
SETTING]
[COLOR TEMP Bch
SETTING]
Description of settings
[COLOR TEMP]
Displays the color temperature when the <WHITE BAL> switch is at the <A> position and automatic white
balance is working, or when it is preset. Also, in automatic white balance operation, the color temperature
can be changed by changing the output balance of Rch and Bch.
[2000K]…[15000K]
ffFactory setting: [3200K]
[R Gain]
Displays the Rch output when the <WHITE BAL> switch is at the <A> position and automatic white
balance is working, or when it is preset. Also, in automatic white balance operation, the color can be
changed on the Rch axis by changing the output of Rch.
[−400]…[400]
ffFactory setting: [0]
[B Gain]
Displays the Bch output when the <WHITE BAL> switch is at the <A> position and automatic white
balance is working, or when it is preset. Also, in automatic white balance operation, the color can be
changed on the Bch axis by changing the output of Bch.
[−400]…[400]
ffFactory setting: [0]
[G AXIS]
Displays the G axis output when the <WHITE BAL> switch is at the <A> position and automatic white
balance is working, or when it is preset. Also, in automatic white balance operation, the color can be
changed on the G axis by changing the output of Rch/Bch.
[−400]…[400]
ffFactory setting: [0]
[COLOR TEMP]
Displays the color temperature when the <WHITE BAL> switch is at the <B> position and automatic white
balance is working, or when it is preset. Also, in automatic white balance operation, the color temperature
can be changed by changing the output balance of Rch and Bch.
[2000K]…[15000K]
ffFactory setting: [3200K]
[R Gain]
Displays the Rch output when the <WHITE BAL> switch is at the <B> position and automatic white
balance is working, or when it is preset. Also, in automatic white balance operation, the color can be
changed on the Rch axis by changing the output of Rch.
[−400]…[400]
ffFactory setting: [0]
[B Gain]
Displays the Bch output when the <WHITE BAL> switch is at the <B> position and automatic white
balance is working, or when it is preset. Also, in automatic white balance operation, the color can be
changed on the Bch axis by changing the output of Bch.
[−400]…[400]
ffFactory setting: [0]
[G AXIS]
Displays the G axis output when the <WHITE BAL> switch is at the <B> position and automatic white
balance is working, or when it is preset. Also, in automatic white balance operation, the color can be
changed on the G axis by changing the output of Rch/Bch.
[−400]…[400]
ffFactory setting: [0]
[CHROMA LEVEL]
Sets the chroma level of PR and PB signals.
[−99%]…[40%], [OFF]
ffFactory setting: [0%]
[CHROMA PHASE]
Finely adjusts the chroma phase of the PR signal and PB signal.
[−31]…[31]
ffFactory setting: [0]
[MATRIX]
Selects the matrix table to display the color for shooting.
[NORM1]: Displays the color suitable for shooting outdoors of under a halogen lamp.
[NORM2]: Displays more vivid color than [NORM1].
[FLUO]: Displays the color suitable for shooting indoors under fluorescent light.
[CINELIKE]: Displays the color suitable for shooting cinematic video.
ffFactory setting: [NORM1]
[MATRIX SETTING]
[COLOR CORRECTION
SETTING]
[MATRIX R‑G]
Adjusts the linear matrix. (Red - Green)
[−63]…[63]
ffFactory setting: [0]
[MATRIX R‑B]
Adjusts the linear matrix. (Red - Blue)
[−63]…[63]
ffFactory setting: [0]
[MATRIX G‑R]
Adjusts the linear matrix. (Green - Red)
[−63]…[63]
ffFactory setting: [0]
[MATRIX G‑B]
Adjusts the linear matrix. (Green - Blue)
[−63]…[63]
ffFactory setting: [0]
[MATRIX B‑R]
Adjusts the linear matrix. (Blue - Red)
[−63]…[63]
ffFactory setting: [0]
[MATRIX B‑G]
Adjusts the linear matrix. (Blue - Green)
[−63]…[63]
ffFactory setting: [0]
[R (SAT)]
Corrects red color saturation.
[−63]…[63]
ffFactory setting: [0]
[R (PHASE)]
Corrects the red hue.
[−63]…[63]
ffFactory setting: [0]
– 121 –
Chapter 6 Menu Operations — Menu list
Item
Description of settings
[R‑R‑Mg (SAT)]
Corrects the color saturation between red and “colors between red and magenta”.
[−63]…[63]
ffFactory setting: [0]
[R‑R‑Mg (PHASE)]
Corrects the hue between red and “colors between red and magenta”.
[−63]…[63]
ffFactory setting: [0]
[R‑Mg (SAT)]
Corrects the color saturation between red and magenta.
[−63]…[63]
ffFactory setting: [0]
[R‑Mg (PHASE)]
Corrects the hue between red and magenta.
[−63]…[63]
ffFactory setting: [0]
[Mg (SAT)]
Corrects magenta color saturation.
[−63]…[63]
ffFactory setting: [0]
[Mg (PHASE)]
Corrects the magenta hue.
[−63]…[63]
ffFactory setting: [0]
[Mg‑B (SAT)]
Corrects the color saturation between magenta and blue.
[−63]…[63]
ffFactory setting: [0]
[Mg‑B (PHASE)]
Corrects the hue between magenta and blue.
[−63]…[63]
ffFactory setting: [0]
[B (SAT)]
Corrects blue color saturation.
[−63]…[63]
ffFactory setting: [0]
[B (PHASE)]
Corrects the blue hue.
[−63]…[63]
ffFactory setting: [0]
[B‑Cy (SAT)]
Corrects the color saturation between blue and cyan.
[−63]…[63]
ffFactory setting: [0]
[B‑Cy (PHASE)]
Corrects the hue between blue and cyan.
[−63]…[63]
ffFactory setting: [0]
[Cy (SAT)]
Corrects cyan color saturation.
[−63]…[63]
ffFactory setting: [0]
[Cy (PHASE)]
Corrects the cyan hue.
[−63]…[63]
ffFactory setting: [0]
[Cy‑G (SAT)]
Corrects the color saturation between cyan and green.
[−63]…[63]
ffFactory setting: [0]
[Cy‑G (PHASE)]
Corrects the hue between cyan and green.
[−63]…[63]
ffFactory setting: [0]
[G (SAT)]
Corrects green color saturation.
[−63]…[63]
ffFactory setting: [0]
[G (PHASE)]
Corrects the green hue.
[−63]…[63]
ffFactory setting: [0]
[G‑Yl (SAT)]
Corrects the color saturation between green and yellow.
[−63]…[63]
ffFactory setting: [0]
[G‑Yl (PHASE)]
Corrects the hue between green and yellow.
[−63]…[63]
ffFactory setting: [0]
[Yl (SAT)]
Corrects yellow color saturation.
[−63]…[63]
ffFactory setting: [0]
[Yl (PHASE)]
Corrects the yellow hue.
[−63]…[63]
ffFactory setting: [0]
[Yl‑Yl‑R (SAT)]
Corrects the color saturation between yellow and “colors between yellow and red”.
[−63]…[63]
ffFactory setting: [0]
[Yl‑Yl‑R (PHASE)]
Corrects the hue between yellow and “colors between yellow and red”.
[−63]…[63]
ffFactory setting: [0]
– 122 –
Chapter 6 Menu Operations — Menu list
Item
Description of settings
[Yl‑R (SAT)]
Corrects the color saturation between yellow and red.
[−63]…[63]
ffFactory setting: [0]
[Yl‑R (PHASE)]
Corrects the hue between yellow and red.
[−63]…[63]
ffFactory setting: [0]
[Yl‑R‑R (SAT)]
Corrects the color saturation between “colors between yellow and red” and red.
[−63]…[63]
ffFactory setting: [0]
[Yl‑R‑R (PHASE)]
Corrects the hue between “colors between yellow and red” and red.
[−63]…[63]
ffFactory setting: [0]
[MASTER PED]
Sets the master pedestal.
[−200]…[200]
ffFactory setting: [16]
[RGB BLACK CONTROL [R PED]
SETTING]
Sets the Rch pedestal level.
[−100]…[100]
ffFactory setting: [0]
[G PED]
Sets the Gch pedestal level.
[−100]…[100]
ffFactory setting: [0]
[B PED]
Sets the Bch pedestal level.
[−100]…[100]
ffFactory setting: [0]
[PEDESTAL OFFSET]
Sets the Rch, Gch, and Bch pedestal levels after adjusting the automatic black balance.
[ON]: Keeps each of the values set in [R PED], [G PED], and [B PED].
[OFF]: Sets the pedestal level of Rch, Gch, and Bch to [0].
ffFactory setting: [OFF]
[GAMMA MODE SEL]
[GAMMA SETTING]
[KNEE SETTING]
Selects the gamma curve.
[HD]: The video gamma feature for HD (High Definition).
[SD]: Increases gain in darker areas more than HD gamma.
[FILMLIKE1]: Feature that reproduces more highlight areas compared to HD gamma.
[FILMLIKE2]: Feature that reproduces more highlight areas compared to [FILMLIKE1].
[FILMLIKE3]: Feature that reproduces more highlight areas compared to [FILMLIKE2].
[FILM‑REC]: The cine gamma feature for film.
[VIDEO‑REC]: The cine gamma feature for video.
ffFactory setting: [HD]
[MASTER GAMMA]
Sets the master gamma in 0.01 steps.
[0.30]…[0.75]
ffFactory setting: [0.45]
[F‑REC DYNAMIC LVL]
When [FILM‑REC] is selected in [GAMMA MODE SEL], dynamic range is set. If an item other than
[FILM‑REC] is selected, no settings are changed.
[200%], [300%], [400%], [500%], [600%]
ffFactory setting: [600%]
[F‑REC BLACK STR
LVL]
When [FILM‑REC] is selected in [GAMMA MODE SEL], black stretch is set. If an item other than
[FILM‑REC] is selected, no settings are changed.
[0%]…[30%]
ffFactory setting: [0%]
[V‑REC KNEE SLOPE]
When [VIDEO‑REC] is selected in [GAMMA MODE SEL], knee slope is set. If an item other than
[VIDEO‑REC] is selected, no settings are changed.
[150%], [200%]…[500%]
ffFactory setting: [500%]
[V‑REC KNEE POINT]
When [VIDEO‑REC] is selected in [GAMMA MODE SEL], knee point is set. If an item other than
[VIDEO‑REC] is selected, no settings are changed.
[30%]…[107%]
ffFactory setting: [30%]
[BLACK GAMMA]
Sets the gamma curves of dark areas.
[−8]…[−1]: Compresses the dark areas.
[OFF]: Standard state
[1]…[8]: Expands the dark areas.
ffFactory setting: [OFF]
[B. GAMMA RANGE]
Sets the maximum level of compression/expansion.
[1]: About 20%
[2]: About 30%
[3]: About 40%
ffFactory setting: [1]
[KNEE MODE]
Sets the knee operation mode.
[AUTO], [MANUAL], [OFF]
ffFactory setting: [AUTO]
[A.KNEE RESPONSE]
Sets the auto knee response speed. The smaller the setting value, the faster the response speed is.
[1]…[8]
ffFactory setting: [4]
[KNEE MASTER POINT] Sets the knee point position in 0.5% steps.
[70.0%]…[107.0%]
ffFactory setting: [93.0%]
– 123 –
Chapter 6 Menu Operations — Menu list
Item
[KNEE MASTER
SLOPE]
Description of settings
Sets the knee inclination.
[0]…[99]
ffFactory setting: [85]
[KNEE MASTER SLOPE Sets the knee inclination of Rch.
Rch]
[−31]…[31]
ffFactory setting: [0]
[KNEE MASTER SLOPE Sets the knee inclination of Bch.
Bch]
[−31]…[31]
ffFactory setting: [0]
[HI‑COLOR SW]
Turns the mode that expands the color dynamic range [ON]/[OFF].
[ON], [OFF]
ffFactory setting: [ON]
[HI‑COLOR LVL]
Selects the level of the mode that expands the color dynamic range.
[1]…[32]
ffFactory setting: [32]
[WHITE CLIP SETTING]
[WHITE CLIP]
Turns the white clip function [ON]/[OFF]. This enables the [WHITE CLIP LVL] setting value when the
function is [ON].
[ON], [OFF]
ffFactory setting: [ON]
[WHITE CLIP LVL]
Sets the white clip level.
[90%]…[109%]
ffFactory setting: [109%]
[Rch CLIP LVL]
Sets the clip level Rch for the white clips.
[−31]…[31]
ffFactory setting: [0]
[Bch CLIP LVL]
Sets the clip level Bch for the white clips.
[−31]…[31]
ffFactory setting: [0]
[DRS]
Enables/disables the dynamic range stretcher function.
[ON], [OFF]
ffFactory setting: [OFF]
If functions are assigned to the USER buttons, switches [ON]/[OFF] using the USER button operations.
[DRS EFFECT DEPTH]
Sets the compression level of the high-brightness areas of the dynamic range stretcher function. By
compressing the video signal levels of the high-brightness areas that are blown out in normal shooting, the
dynamic range can be expanded.
[1], [2], [3]
ffFactory setting: [1]
[A.IRIS LEVEL]
Enables/disables the auto iris level function.
[ON], [OFF]
ffFactory setting: [ON]
If functions are assigned to the USER buttons, switches [ON]/[OFF] using the USER button operations.
[A.IRIS LEVEL EFFECT]
Adjusts the brightness in the auto iris mode. Increase the value to brighten, and decrease the value to
darken the convergence of auto iris.
[−50]…[50]
ffFactory setting: [0]
[SYSTEM MODE]
Configure the settings regarding the recording format of video and audio.
Item
Description of settings
[LINE&FREQ]
Sets the signal format of the camera. If this setting has been changed, select [YES] on a confirmation
message and restart the camera.
[1080‑59.94P], [1080‑50P], [1080‑59.94i], [1080‑50i], [720‑59.94P], [720‑50P], [480‑59.94i], [576‑50i]
[REC FORMAT]
Selects the codec for recording and the mode for shooting and recording.
[AVC‑I100/60P], [AVC‑I100/60i], [AVC‑I100/50P], [AVC‑I100/50i], [AVC‑I100/30PN], [AVC‑I100/24PN],
[AVC‑I100/25PN], [AVC‑I50/60P], [AVC‑I50/60i], [AVC‑I50/50P], [AVC‑I50/50i], [AVC‑G50/60P],
[AVC‑G50/60i], [AVC‑G50/50P], [AVC‑G50/50i], [AVC‑G25/60P], [AVC‑G25/60i], [AVC‑G25/50P],
[AVC‑G25/50i], [AVC‑G12/60P], [AVC‑G12/60i], [AVC‑G12/50P], [AVC‑G12/50i], [DVCPRO HD/60P],
[DVCPRO HD/60i], [DVCPRO HD/50P], [DVCPRO HD/50i], [DVCPRO50/60i], [DVCPRO50/50i],
[DVCPRO/60i], [DVCPRO/50i], [DV/60i], [DV/50i]
[CAMERA MODE]
Sets the camera shooting mode when using the 1080i [DVCPRO HD] codec and in SD mode.
[60i], [50i], [30P], [25P]
[AUDIO SMPL RES]
Selects the number of audio bits ([24BIT] or [16BIT]) when [REC FORMAT] is [AVC‑I100] or [AVC‑I50].
At [REC FORMAT] other than these, recording is performed at the number of audio bits fixed to 24 bits or
16 bits.
[16BIT], [24BIT]
[ASPECT CONV]
Selects the aspect ratio of the video to be recorded in 480i, 576i.
[SIDE CROP], [LETTER BOX], [SQUEEZE]
ffFactory setting: [SIDE CROP]
[SCAN REVERSE]
Enables/disables the scan reverse shooting function for vertical/horizontal inversion of images.
[ON], [OFF]
ffFactory setting: [OFF]
[SETUP]
Sets the setup level of 480i video signals.
[0%], [7.5%A]
– 124 –
Chapter 6 Menu Operations — Menu list
Item
[SHOOTING MODE]
Description of settings
Sets the shooting mode according to the shooting environment.
[NORMAL]: Selects the shooting mode for an environment at normal brightness.
[HIGH SENS.]: Selects high-sensitivity. (Appropriate when shooting in a dark environment.) The LCD
monitor shows [H.SENS.].
ffFactory setting: [NORMAL]
[USER SW]
Set the functions to be assigned to the USER buttons (USER1 to USER8).
Item
Description of settings
[USER1]
Sets the function to be assigned to the <FOCUS ASSIST> button.
[INHIBIT], [SCENE FILE SEL], [LEVEL GAUGE RESET], [WFM], [D.ZOOM], [DRS], [FBC], [S.GAIN],
[1S.EXP.], [ATW], [ATW LOCK], [SPOTLIGHT], [BACKLIGHT], [BLACKFADE], [WHITEFADE], [A.IRIS.
LEVEL], [IRIS], [Y.GET], [FOCUS ASSIST], [FOCUS MACRO], [OIS], [FAST ZOOM], [ZEBRA], [EVF
ON/OFF], [PRE REC], [TEXT MEMO], [SHOT MARK], [DEL LAST CLIP], [SLOT SEL], [REC MEDIA],
[AUDIO MON SEL], [REC CHECK], [USB MODE]
ffFactory setting: [FOCUS ASSIST]
[USER2]
Sets the function to be assigned to the <MACRO> button.
[INHIBIT], [SCENE FILE SEL], [LEVEL GAUGE RESET], [WFM], [D.ZOOM], [DRS], [FBC], [S.GAIN],
[1S.EXP.], [ATW], [ATW LOCK], [SPOTLIGHT], [BACKLIGHT], [BLACKFADE], [WHITEFADE], [A.IRIS.
LEVEL], [IRIS], [Y.GET], [FOCUS ASSIST], [FOCUS MACRO], [OIS], [FAST ZOOM], [ZEBRA], [EVF
ON/OFF], [PRE REC], [TEXT MEMO], [SHOT MARK], [DEL LAST CLIP], [SLOT SEL], [REC MEDIA],
[AUDIO MON SEL], [REC CHECK], [USB MODE]
ffFactory setting: [FOCUS MACRO]
[USER3]
Sets the function to be assigned to the <OIS> button.
[INHIBIT], [SCENE FILE SEL], [LEVEL GAUGE RESET], [WFM], [D.ZOOM], [DRS], [FBC], [S.GAIN],
[1S.EXP.], [ATW], [ATW LOCK], [SPOTLIGHT], [BACKLIGHT], [BLACKFADE], [WHITEFADE], [A.IRIS.
LEVEL], [IRIS], [Y.GET], [FOCUS ASSIST], [FOCUS MACRO], [OIS], [FAST ZOOM], [ZEBRA], [EVF
ON/OFF], [PRE REC], [TEXT MEMO], [SHOT MARK], [DEL LAST CLIP], [SLOT SEL], [REC MEDIA],
[AUDIO MON SEL], [REC CHECK], [USB MODE]
ffFactory setting: [OIS]
[USER4]
Sets the function to be assigned to the <ZEBRA> button.
[INHIBIT], [SCENE FILE SEL], [LEVEL GAUGE RESET], [WFM], [D.ZOOM], [DRS], [FBC], [S.GAIN],
[1S.EXP.], [ATW], [ATW LOCK], [SPOTLIGHT], [BACKLIGHT], [BLACKFADE], [WHITEFADE], [A.IRIS.
LEVEL], [IRIS], [Y.GET], [FOCUS ASSIST], [FOCUS MACRO], [OIS], [FAST ZOOM], [ZEBRA], [EVF
ON/OFF], [PRE REC], [TEXT MEMO], [SHOT MARK], [DEL LAST CLIP], [SLOT SEL], [REC MEDIA],
[AUDIO MON SEL], [REC CHECK], [USB MODE]
ffFactory setting: [ZEBRA]
[USER5]
Sets the function to be assigned to the <WFM> button.
[INHIBIT], [SCENE FILE SEL], [LEVEL GAUGE RESET], [WFM], [D.ZOOM], [DRS], [FBC], [S.GAIN],
[1S.EXP.], [ATW], [ATW LOCK], [SPOTLIGHT], [BACKLIGHT], [BLACKFADE], [WHITEFADE], [A.IRIS.
LEVEL], [IRIS], [Y.GET], [FOCUS ASSIST], [FOCUS MACRO], [OIS], [FAST ZOOM], [ZEBRA], [EVF
ON/OFF], [PRE REC], [TEXT MEMO], [SHOT MARK], [DEL LAST CLIP], [SLOT SEL], [REC MEDIA],
[AUDIO MON SEL], [REC CHECK], [USB MODE]
ffFactory setting: [WFM]
[USER6]
Sets the function to be assigned to the <A.IRIS.LEVEL> button.
[INHIBIT], [SCENE FILE SEL], [LEVEL GAUGE RESET], [WFM], [D.ZOOM], [DRS], [FBC], [S.GAIN],
[1S.EXP.], [ATW], [ATW LOCK], [SPOTLIGHT], [BACKLIGHT], [BLACKFADE], [WHITEFADE], [A.IRIS.
LEVEL], [IRIS], [Y.GET], [FOCUS ASSIST], [FOCUS MACRO], [OIS], [FAST ZOOM], [ZEBRA], [EVF
ON/OFF], [PRE REC], [TEXT MEMO], [SHOT MARK], [DEL LAST CLIP], [SLOT SEL], [REC MEDIA],
[AUDIO MON SEL], [REC CHECK], [USB MODE]
ffFactory setting: [A.IRIS.LEVEL]
[USER7]
Sets the function to be assigned to the <SLOT SEL> button.
[INHIBIT], [SCENE FILE SEL], [LEVEL GAUGE RESET], [WFM], [D.ZOOM], [DRS], [FBC], [S.GAIN],
[1S.EXP.], [ATW], [ATW LOCK], [SPOTLIGHT], [BACKLIGHT], [BLACKFADE], [WHITEFADE], [A.IRIS.
LEVEL], [IRIS], [Y.GET], [FOCUS ASSIST], [FOCUS MACRO], [OIS], [FAST ZOOM], [ZEBRA], [EVF
ON/OFF], [PRE REC], [TEXT MEMO], [SHOT MARK], [DEL LAST CLIP], [SLOT SEL], [REC MEDIA],
[AUDIO MON SEL], [REC CHECK], [USB MODE]
ffFactory setting: [SLOT SEL]
[USER8]
Sets the function to be assigned to the <IRIS> button.
[INHIBIT], [SCENE FILE SEL], [LEVEL GAUGE RESET], [WFM], [D.ZOOM], [DRS], [FBC], [S.GAIN],
[1S.EXP.], [ATW], [ATW LOCK], [SPOTLIGHT], [BACKLIGHT], [BLACKFADE], [WHITEFADE], [A.IRIS.
LEVEL], [IRIS], [Y.GET], [FOCUS ASSIST], [FOCUS MACRO], [OIS], [FAST ZOOM], [ZEBRA], [EVF
ON/OFF], [PRE REC], [TEXT MEMO], [SHOT MARK], [DEL LAST CLIP], [SLOT SEL], [REC MEDIA],
[AUDIO MON SEL], [REC CHECK], [USB MODE]
ffFactory setting: [IRIS]
– 125 –
Chapter 6 Menu Operations — Menu list
[SW MODE]
Configure the settings of each mode when switched using each switch.
These menu items cannot be set when the thumbnail screen is displayed.
Item
Description of settings
[LOW GAIN]
Sets the gain value to be assigned to the <L> position of the <GAIN> switch. (Negative value of gain is
only in [HIGH SENS.] mode.)
[−3dB]…[18dB]
ffFactory setting: [0dB]
[MID GAIN]
Sets the gain value to be assigned to the <M> position of the <GAIN> switch. (Negative value of gain is
only in [HIGH SENS.] mode.)
[−3dB]…[18dB]
ffFactory setting: [6dB]
[HIGH GAIN]
Sets the gain value to be assigned to the <H> position of the <GAIN> switch. (Negative value of gain is
only in [HIGH SENS.] mode.)
[−3dB]…[18dB]
ffFactory setting: [12dB]
[SUPER GAIN]
Sets the super gain to be assigned to the USER button.
[24dB], [30dB], [36dB]
[ALL]: Each time the USER button is pressed, the camera toggles [24dB] → [30dB] → [36dB] → (off) in
order.
ffFactory setting: [36dB]
[OIS]
Enables/disables the image stabilizer function.
[ON]: Enables the image stabilizer function.
[OFF]: Disables the image stabilizer function.
ffFactory setting: [ON]
If functions are assigned to the USER buttons, switches [ON]/[OFF] using the USER button operations.
[ATW]
Assigns the auto tracking white balance function to the <WHITE BAL> switch.
[Ach], [Bch], [PRE], [OFF]
ffFactory setting: [OFF]
[ATW SPEED]
Sets the control speed of the auto tracking white balance function.
[FAST], [NORMAL], [SLOW]
ffFactory setting: [NORMAL]
[ATW TARGET R]
Finely adjusts the Rch output for convergence with auto tracking white balance operation.
[−10]…[10]
ffFactory setting: [0]
[ATW TARGET B]
Finely adjusts the Bch output for convergence with auto tracking white balance operation.
[−10]…[10]
ffFactory setting: [0]
[W.BAL PRESET]
Sets the color temperature to be assigned to the <PRST> position of the <WHITE BAL> switch.
[3200K], [5600K], [VAR]
ffFactory setting: [3200K]
[W.BAL VAR]
Sets the value of [VAR] in [W.BAL PRESET].
It can also be operated by the <SEL/PUSH SET> dial button.
Enabled when [W.BAL PRESET] is set to [VAR] and the <WHITE BAL> switch is at <PRST>.
[2000K]…[15000K]
ffFactory setting: [3200K]
[H.ZOOM SPEED]
Sets the zoom speed when the HANDLE ZOOM switch is <FIX>.
[1]…[99]
ffFactory setting: [50]
[PUSH AF MODE]
Assigns the operation mode when the <PUSH AUTO> button is pressed.
[TURBO]: Performs high-speed focusing automatically until the image is focused, once the button is
pressed.
[NORMAL]: Performs automatic focusing while pressing the button.
ffFactory setting: [TURBO]
[MF ASSIST]
Sets whether to adjust the last focus automatically when in the manual focus mode.
[ON]: Adjusts the last focus automatically.
[OFF]: Does not adjust the focus automatically.
ffFactory setting: [OFF]
If the image is largely out of focus, the focus may not be adjusted properly.
Operations with a remote control connected to the <CAM REMOTE> terminal are not available.
[FOCUS ASSIST MODE]
Sets the operation mode of the focus assist function.
[EXPAND]: Expands the center part of the screen of the LCD monitor.
[IN RED]: Outlines the contour of the video in red.
ffFactory setting: [EXPAND]
If functions are assigned to the USER buttons, on and off of the function can be switched using the USER
button operations.
[MACRO]
Enables/disables the focus macro function.
[ON]: Enables the focus macro function.
[OFF]: Disables the focus macro function.
ffFactory setting: [ON]
If functions are assigned to the USER buttons, switches [ON]/[OFF] using the USER button operations.
[MACRO MODE]
Sets the operation mode when the focus macro function is enabled.
[TELE OFF]: Does not use the tele macro area.
[ALL OFF]: Does not use all of the macro area.
ffFactory setting: [TELE OFF]
– 126 –
Chapter 6 Menu Operations — Menu list
Item
Description of settings
[A.IRIS SPEED]
Sets the control speed of the auto iris function.
[FAST], [NORMAL], [SLOW]
ffFactory setting: [NORMAL]
[A.IRIS WINDOW]
Selects the auto iris detection window.
[NORM1]: Window that is near screen center.
[NORM2]: Window that is near screen bottom.
[CENTER]: Window that is a spot in the screen center.
ffFactory setting: [NORM1]
[AREA MODE]
Assigns the function to be performed within the area selected using the control stick during shooting.
[INHIBIT]: Does not allocate a function.
[FOCUS]: Auto focus/focus bar function
[IRIS]: Auto iris function
[Y GET]: Brightness display function
[FOCUS/IRIS]: Activates [FOCUS] and [IRIS] simultaneously.
[FOCUS/Y GET]: Activates [FOCUS] and [Y GET] simultaneously.
ffFactory setting: [INHIBIT]
[WFM MODE]
Selects the type of waveform to be displayed on the LCD monitor when the <WFM> button is pressed.
[WAVE]: Displays as a waveform.
[VECTOR]: Displays as a vector.
[WAVE/VECT]: Each time the <WFM> button is pressed, the display changes in order from (no display) →
[WAVE] (waveform) → [VECTOR] (vector) → (no display).
ffFactory setting: [WAVE]
[ZEBRA]
Displays/hides zebra patterns.
[ON]: Displays zebra patterns.
[OFF]: Does not display zebra patterns.
ffFactory setting: [OFF]
If functions are assigned to the USER buttons, switches [ON]/[OFF] using the USER button operations.
[ZEBRA MODE]
Selects whether to keep displaying zebra patterns.
[CONTINUE]: Keep the display of zebra patterns.
[MOMENT]: Displays zebra patterns for approximately five seconds.
ffFactory setting: [MOMENT]
[BARS TYPE]
Selects the color bar to use.
[SMPTE]: Uses the color bar in the SMPTE standard.
[FULL BARS]: Uses full color bars.
[SPLIT]: Uses SPLIT color bars for SNG (Satellite News Gathering).
[ARIB]: Uses ARIB standard color bars.
ffFactory setting: [SMPTE]
[FRONT REC]
Sets operation of the REC button on the front of the camera.
[INHIBIT]: Does not activate the operation.
[ACTIVE]: Activates the operation.
ffFactory setting: [ACTIVE]
[AUTO SW]
Configure the settings regarding the auto mode.
Auto iris, auto gain control, auto tracking white balance, and auto focus functions can be set separately.
These menu items cannot be set when the thumbnail screen is displayed.
Item
Description of settings
[A.IRIS]
Enables/disables the auto iris control.
[ON]: Performs the auto iris control operation when in auto mode. The <IRIS> button does not work.
[OFF]: Does not perform the auto iris control operation when in auto mode. Activates the iris control
selected with the <IRIS> button.
ffFactory setting: [ON]
[AGC]
Sets the auto gain control operations when [ON] is selected in [A.IRIS].
[ON]: Performs the operation of the [AGC] function that automatically adjusts camera gain when in auto
mode.
[OFF]: Does not perform the operation of the [AGC] function that automatically adjusts camera gain when
in auto mode.
ffFactory setting: [ON]
[AGC LIMIT]
Sets the maximum gain value during [AGC] operation.
[3dB], [6dB], [12dB], [18dB]
ffFactory setting: [6dB]
[AGC POINT]
Sets the F value to switch control to [AGC] from auto iris during [AGC] operation.
[F4.0], [F5.6]
ffFactory setting: [F4.0]
[A.SHUTTER]
Sets the auto shutter control operations when [ON] is selected in [A.IRIS].
[ON]: Performs the operation of auto shutter when in auto mode.
[OFF]: Does not perform the operation of auto shutter when in auto mode.
ffFactory setting: [ON]
[A.SHUTTER LIMIT]
Sets the maximum shutter value during [A.SHUTTER] operation.
[1/100], [1/120], [1/250]
ffFactory setting: [1/250]
[A.SHUTTER POINT]
Sets the F value to switch control from auto iris to [A.SHUTTER] during [A.SHUTTER] operation.
[F8.0], [F9.6]
ffFactory setting: [F8.0]
– 127 –
Chapter 6 Menu Operations — Menu list
Item
Description of settings
[ATW]
Sets the operations of the auto tracking white balance function.
[ON]: Activates the auto tracking white balance function when in auto mode. The [ATW] function cannot be
enabled/disabled with the <WHITE BAL> switch or USER buttons. However, if [ATW LOCK] is assigned to
a USER button, the white balance value can be fixed with the USER button.
[OFF]: Does not perform the operation of the [ATW] function when in auto mode. Performs the operation of
the white balance function selected with the <WHITE BAL> switch.
ffFactory setting: [ON]
[AF]
Sets the operation of the auto focus.
[ON]: Performs the operation of auto focus when in auto mode. The <FOCUS> switch does not work.
[OFF]: Does not perform the operation of auto focus when in auto mode. Activates the focus function
selected with the <FOCUS> switch.
ffFactory setting: [ON]
[RECORDING SETUP]
These are various types of setting items when performing camera recording and playback.
Set the system frequency, the number of lines, recording format, and recording method.
Item
Description of settings
[REC MEDIA]
Selects the slot for the media to be recorded.
[microP2]: Uses microP2 memory cards (slots 1 and 2).
[P2]: Uses P2 memory card (card slot 3).
ffFactory setting: [microP2]
[FILE SPLIT]
Selects whether to divide the recording file in 4 GB units or one file when recording in the microP2 memory
card (that exceeds 32 GB) in AVC‑LongG format.
[ONE FILE]: Records in one file.
[SPLIT]: Splits the clip every 4 GB.
ffFactory setting: [ONE FILE]
[RECORDING]
Selects the recording format.
[NORMAL]: Performs standard recording.
[INTERVAL]: Performs interval recording.
[ONE SHOT]: Performs one-shot recording.
[LOOP]: Performs loop recording.
ffFactory setting: [NORMAL]
[RECORDING
SETTING]
[RECORDING HOLD]
Selects whether to hold [RECORDING] settings.
[ON]: Holds the settings.
[OFF]: Does not hold the settings. It will always be [NORMAL] the next time when the power is turned on.
ffFactory setting: [OFF]
[ONE SHOT TIME]
Sets the recording duration of one-shot recording.
[1frm], [2frm], [4frm], [8frm], [16frm], [1s]
ffFactory setting: [1frm]
[INTERVAL TIME]
Sets the interval duration for interval recording.
[2frm], [4frm], [8frm], [16frm], [1s], [2s], [5s], [10s], [30s], [1min], [5min], [10min]
ffFactory setting: [2frm]
[START DELAY]
Selects whether to delay the recording start time by approximately one second when performing interval
recording or one-short recording.
[ON], [OFF]
ffFactory setting: [OFF]
[PRE REC]
Selects whether to perform pre-recording. If [ON] is selected, pre-recording is performed for approximately
three seconds in HD, and for approximately seven seconds in SD.
[ON], [OFF]
ffFactory setting: [OFF]
[ONE CLIP REC]
Selects whether to perform one-clip recording.
[ON], [OFF]
ffFactory setting: [OFF]
[SIMUL REC]
Selects whether to perform simultaneous recording.
[ON], [OFF]
ffFactory setting: [OFF]
[DUAL CODEC
SETTING]
[START TEXT MEMO]
[REC MEDIA]
Selects media for recording proxy data.
[P2]: Records proxy data to a P2 card.
[P2&SD]: Records proxy data to both of a P2 card and SD memory card.
[OFF]: Does not record proxy data.
ffFactory setting: [OFF]
[PROXY MODE]
Sets the recording mode of proxy data.
[LOW 2CH MOV], [HQ 2CH MOV], [SHQ 2CH MOV], [AVC-G6 2CH MOV]
ffFactory setting: [HQ 2CH MOV]
[PROXY DISP]
Selects whether to display proxy data recorded information or messages in the viewfinder and LCD
monitor.
[ON]: Displays proxy recording information and SD memory card remaining capacity at the start of
recording. Warning information is displayed at all times.
[OFF]: Displays proxy and SD memory card warning information for only three seconds when warning
occurs.
ffFactory setting: [OFF]
Selects whether to automatically add a text memo at recording start position each time recording is started.
[ON], [OFF]
ffFactory setting: [OFF]
– 128 –
Chapter 6 Menu Operations — Menu list
Item
Description of settings
[TIME STAMP]
Selects whether to superimpose [DATE]/[TIME] information on shot videos.
[ON]: Superimposes information set in the [DATE]/[TIME] item on video.
[OFF]: Does not superimpose information set in the [DATE]/[TIME] item on video.
ffFactory setting: [OFF]
[DF MODE]
Sets the counting method of the built-in time code generator.
[DF]: Uses the drop frame mode.
[NDF]: Uses the non-drop frame mode.
ffFactory setting: [DF]
[TCG]
Sets the operation mode to advance the built-in time code generator.
[FREE RUN]: Advances regardless of the operation mode.
[REC RUN]: Advances when recording is in process.
ffFactory setting: [REC RUN]
In native recording in variable frame rate mode, if the number of frames differs for shooting and recording,
the time code operation will be [REC RUN].
[TC PRESET]
Sets the default value of the time code to record.
[UBG MODE]
Selects the user bits mode.
[USER]: Selects the user bits value that has been set.
[TIME]: Selects the local time. (hh, mm, ss)
[DATE]: Selects the local date and time. (YY, MM, DD, hh)
[EXT]: Records the user bits values currently input to the <TC IN/OUT> terminal.
[TCG]: The value of [TCG] is recorded as user bits.
[FRAME RATE]: Selects camera imaging information (such as frame rate).
[REGEN]: Reads the value recorded to the card and continuously records that value.
ffFactory setting: [USER]
[UB PRESET]
Sets user bits. Note that [USER] must be set for [UBG MODE].
[VITC UBG MODE]
Selects the VITC user bits mode.
[USER/EXT]: When [UBG MODE] is [EXT], follows the value and when other than [EXT], records the user
value set in [USER].
[TIME]: Selects the local time. (hh, mm, ss)
[DATE]: Selects the local date and time. (YY, MM, DD, hh)
[TCG]: The value of time code generator is recorded as user bits.
[FRAME RATE]: Selects camera imaging information (such as frame rate).
[REGEN]: Reads the value recorded to the card and continuously records that value.
ffFactory setting: [USER/EXT]
[REC META DATA]
[LOAD]
Loads the metadata upload file saved to the SD memory card.
[RECORD]
Sets whether to add loaded metadata at a recording.
[ON]: Adds metadata.
[OFF]: Does not add metadata.
ffFactory setting: [OFF]
[USER CLIP NAME]
Sets data to be recorded to [USER CLIP NAME].
(When [RECORD] is [ON])
[TYPE1]: Records setting values of the loaded data.
[TYPE2]: Records the loaded data and counter value.
(When [RECORD] is [OFF])
[TYPE1]: Records the same value as [GLOBAL CLIP ID].
[TYPE2]: Records the same value as [CLIP NAME].
ffFactory setting: [TYPE1]
[INITIALIZE]
Deletes all loaded metadata and initializes.
[PROPERTY]
Checks and corrects loaded metadata.
[LANGUAGE]
Sets the language used to display metadata. (Only when [NTSC(J)] is selected as the region of use)
[ENGLISH], [JAPANESE]
[CLIP]
This menu is used when performing various tasks, such as playing back, deleting, copying clips, and editing metadata, while viewing the thumbnail of
the clips displayed in the viewfinder or LCD monitor.
These menu items are enabled when the thumbnail screen is displayed.
Clip operations such as [DELETE] or [COPY] are enabled when the target thumbnail is selected.
Some items are displayed only in specific situations such as in USB host mode or on the explorer screen.
Item
Description of settings
[REPOSITION]
Selects a clip to be displayed on the thumbnail screen.
[ALL CLIP]: Displays all clips as thumbnails.
[SAME FORMAT CLIPS]: Displays only the clips recorded in the same format as the system format as
thumbnails. Clips recorded in the same format means that each item of [LINE&FREQ], [REC FORMAT],
and [AUDIO SMPL RES] in the main menu → [SYSTEM MODE] matches the current setting status.
Example) [1080‑59.94i], [AVC‑I100], [24BIT]
[SELECTED CLIPS]: Displays only the clips selected with the control stick as thumbnails. The thumbnails
appear in selected order.
[MARKED CLIPS]: Displays only the clips with shot marks added as thumbnails.
[TEXT MEMO CLIPS]: Displayed only clips with text memo data attached as thumbnails.
[SLOT CLIPS]: Displays only the clips of the selected slot as thumbnails.
ffFactory setting: [ALL CLIP]
[DELETE]
Deletes selected clips.
– 129 –
Chapter 6 Menu Operations — Menu list
Item
Description of settings
[FORMAT]
When the [FORMAT] menu is selected, format the P2 card of the specified slot.
[SLOT 1], [SLOT 2], [SLOT 3], [SD CARD]
ffWhen a CPS password is set, you can select [NORMAL] (normal unencrypted format) or
[CPS(ENCRYPT)] (encrypted format).
ffData deleted as a result of formatting cannot be restored. Always check the data before formatting.
[FORMAT(STORAGE)]
When in USB host mode, formats a storage device connected to the <USB3.0 HOST> terminal using the
specified file system.
[TYPE S]: Formats in the [TYPE S] format.
[FAT]: Formats in the [FAT] format.
This item is enabled only while the storage explorer screen or storage thumbnail screen is displayed.
[COPY]
Copies the selected clip to a P2 card in any card slot or a storage device.
[SLOT 1], [SLOT 2], [SLOT 3], [SD CARD], [STORAGE], [FTP], [FTP(PROXY)]
[EXPORT]
When in USB host mode, exports (writes) from the P2 card or SD memory card to a storage device or FTP
by units of card.
[ALL SLOT], [SLOT 1], [SLOT 2], [SLOT 3]: Exports from the P2 card to a storage device.
[SD CARD]: Exports from the the SD memory card to FTP.
[IMPORT]
When in USB host mode, imports (writes back) clips etc. from a storage device or FTP to the P2 card or
SD memory card in units of card.
[SLOT 1], [SLOT 2], [SLOT 3], [SD CARD]
[REPAIR]
Repairs a clip displayed in the defective clip indicator (yellow) occurring as a result of sudden power loss
during recording or other reasons.
[RE‑CONNECT]
If clips that were recorded over multiple P2 cards are not recognized as consecutive clips and the
is displayed, use this function to restore the clips to the consecutive clips (the
incomplete clip indicator
original combined clips).
[EXCH. THUMBNAIL]
Changes the clip thumbnail to an image with any text memo. This can be executed while the text memo
clip is displayed.
[EXPLORE]
When in USB host mode, switches to the information display screen for storage device and network
connection.
[STORAGE]: Switches to the information display screen for storage device.
[FTP]: Switches to the information display screen for FTP server.
[AUTHENTICATE]
When this menu is selected from the card status screen, a software keyboard is displayed to enter the
CPS password. If the password is entered and [OK] is selected, the CPS password is set to the camera.
When the set CPS password is successfully authenticated, the message [AUTHENTICATED
SUCCESSFULLY!] is displayed.
When the set CPS password authentication fails, a warning message is displayed.
[CHANGE PARTITION NAME]
When in USB host mode, sets/changes the partition name of the storage device.
ffThe default value is the date and time when the partition was created.
ffThis item is enabled only for the [TYPE S] storage device.
ffThis item is displayed only when the storage explore screen is displayed.
[DELETE LAST PARTITION]
When in USB host mode, deletes the last storage partition.
ffThe partition can be deleted only when the cursor is placed on the last partition.
ffThis item is displayed only when the storage explore screen is displayed.
[DELETE FOLDER]
Delete folders in the storage device in the FAT format.
[PROPERTY]
[THUMBNAIL SETUP]
[CLIP PROPERTY]
Detailed clip information is displayed on the screen. Items can be individually corrected.
[CARD STATUS]
Displays the card status of a card slot.
[CPS PASSWORD]
Sets the CPS encrypted password of the microP2 memory card.
[LOAD]: Loads CPS password from an SD memory card.
[SET]: Enters the CPS password.
[DELETE]: Deletes the password saved to the device, and disables encrypted formats.
[SD CARD]
Displays SD memory card information.
[REMAIN SETUP]
Sets which is displayed, remaining capacity or used capacity, when P2 card information is displayed.
[REMAIN]: Displays remaining capacity.
[USED]: Displays used capacity.
ffFactory setting: [REMAIN]
[FREE CAP. OF
PARTITION]
Displays available space in a partition.
[INDICATOR]
Selects an item to display and press the control stick. Checked items are displayed. When [ALL HIDE] is
selected, other items cannot be selected.
[ALL HIDE]: Hides all indicators.
[MARKER]: Displays the shot mark indicator.
[TEXT MEMO]: Displays the text memo indicator.
[WIDE]: Displays the wide indicator.
[PROXY]: Displays the proxy indicator.
ffFactory setting: [MARKER], [TEXT MEMO], [WIDE], [PROXY]
– 130 –
Chapter 6 Menu Operations — Menu list
Item
[STORAGE COPY
SETUP]
Description of settings
[DATA DISPLAY]
Selects the content to be displayed in the time code display area.
[TC]: Displays the time code.
[UB]: Displays the user bits.
[TIME]: Displays the record time.
[DATE]: Displays the record date.
[DATE TIME]: Displays the record date and time.
[CLIP NAME]: Displays clip names.
[USER CLIP NAME]: Displays a maximum of the first 15 letters (for an English language display) of a user
clip name.
[SLOT]: Displays slot number.
[THUMBNAIL TC]: Displays the time code of the thumbnail position.
ffFactory setting: [TC]
[THUMBNAIL SIZE]
Sets the thumbnail size displayed in a thumbnail on the screen.
[SMALL]: Small (thumbnail display: with 4×3 and property display)
[MEDIUM]: Standard (thumbnail display: 4×3)
[LARGE]: Large (thumbnail display: 3×2)
ffFactory setting: [MEDIUM]
[PB POSITION]
Sets the playback start position during playback from the thumbnail screen.
[RESUME]: Plays back from the position where playback stopped.
[THUMBNAIL TC]: Plays back from the time code of the thumbnail position.
[START TC]: Plays back from the start time code (beginning of the clip).
ffFactory setting: [START TC]
[PROPERTY DISP.]
Sets simple properties item displayed on the left of the thumbnail when [SMALL] is selected for
[THUMBNAIL SIZE].
[USER CLIP NAME]: Displays the user clip name.
[START TC]: Displays the start time code.
[REC DATE]: Displays the recorded date.
[REC TIME]: Displays the recorded time.
[NUM. OF AUDIO CH]: Displays the number of audio channels.
[AUDIO RATE]: Displays the audio sampling rate.
[AUDIO BIT]: Displays the audio bitrate.
[CREATOR]: Displays the person who recorded the clip.
[SHOOTER]: Displays the videographer.
[PLACE NAME]: Displays the shooting location.
[PROGRAM NAME]: Displays the program name.
[SCENE NO.]: Displays the scene number.
[TAKE NO.]: Displays the take number.
[REPORTER]: Displays the reporter.
[PURPOSE]: Displays the purpose of shooting.
[OBJECT]: Displays the object of shooting.
[START UB]: Displays the start user bits.
[REC RATE]: Displays the recording frame rate.
[LAST UPDATE]: Displays the date of last update.
[LAST UP PERSON]: Displays the last person who updated.
[MANUFACTURER]: Displays the equipment manufacturer name.
[SERIAL NO.]: Displays the serial number.
[MODEL NAME]: Displays the model name.
[ALTITUDE]: Displays an altitude.
[LONGITUDE]: Displays a longitude.
[LATITUDE]: Displays a latitude.
[1ST TEXT MEMO]: Displays the first text memo content.
[THUMBNAIL OFFSET]: Displays the thumbnail recording position.
[VERIFY]
Sets whether to verify or not when exporting in USB host mode.
[ON]: Verifies.
[OFF]: Does not verify.
[AUDIO SETUP]
Configure the settings regarding audio input/output.
Item
[INPUT SETTING]
Description of settings
[INT MIC]
Sets built-in microphone on/off and selects the directionality.
[STEREO]: Records audio from two directions in the front with the stereo microphone.
[MONO]: This mode records clearer audio from the front by enhancing the directionality forward like a
shotgun microphone. Audio recorded on the left and right are the same.
[OFF]: Disables audio of the built-in stereo microphone.
ffFactory setting: [STEREO]
[INPUT1 MIC LEVEL]
Sets the level of an external microphone connected to the <AUDIO INPUT 1> terminal. Enabled only when
a microphone is connected.
[−40dB], [−50dB], [−60dB]
ffFactory setting: [−50dB]
[INPUT2 MIC LEVEL]
Sets the level of an external microphone connected to the <AUDIO INPUT 2> terminal. Enabled only when
a microphone is connected.
[−40dB], [−50dB], [−60dB]
ffFactory setting: [−50dB]
– 131 –
Chapter 6 Menu Operations — Menu list
Item
[RECORDING CH
SETTING]
Description of settings
[INPUT1 LINE LEVEL]
Sets the level of an external line input to be connected to the <AUDIO INPUT 1> terminal. Enabled only for
externally connected devices.
[4dB], [0dB]
ffFactory setting: [0dB]
[INPUT2 LINE LEVEL]
Sets the level of an external line input to be connected to the <AUDIO INPUT 2> terminal. Enabled only for
externally connected devices.
[4dB], [0dB]
ffFactory setting: [0dB]
[FRONT VR SELECT]
Sets the allocation to the <F.AUDIO LEVEL> dial. Enabled when the setting is other than <AUTO>.
[0dB] to [−c] can be adjusted.
[CH1], [CH2], [CH3], [CH4], [CH1/CH2], [CH3/CH4][ALL], [OFF]
ffFactory setting: [OFF]
[AUTO LEVEL CH3]
Selects the level setting method for audio channel 3.
[ON]: Sets the mode to adjust automatically. The limiter does not work.
[OFF]: The audio level follows the value for [LEVEL CONTROL CH3].
ffFactory setting: [ON]
[AUTO LEVEL CH4]
Selects the level setting method for audio channel 4.
[ON]: Sets the mode to adjust automatically. The limiter does not work.
[OFF]: The audio level follows the value for [LEVEL CONTROL CH4].
ffFactory setting: [ON]
[LEVEL CONTROL CH3] Can be manually adjusted with this item when automatic level adjustment of audio channel 3 is [OFF].
[0]…[100]
ffFactory setting: [70]
[LEVEL CONTROL CH4] Can be manually adjusted with this item when automatic level adjustment of audio channel 4 is [OFF].
[0]…[100]
ffFactory setting: [70]
[OUTPUT SETTING]
[MIC LOWCUT CH1]
Enables/disables the lowcut filter for audio channel 1.
[ON], [OFF]
ffFactory setting: [OFF]
[MIC LOWCUT CH2]
Enables/disables the lowcut filter for audio channel 2.
[ON], [OFF]
ffFactory setting: [OFF]
[MIC LOWCUT CH3]
Enables/disables the lowcut filter for audio channel 3.
[ON], [OFF]
ffFactory setting: [OFF]
[MIC LOWCUT CH4]
Enables/disables the lowcut filter for audio channel 4.
[ON], [OFF]
ffFactory setting: [OFF]
[LIMITER CH1]
Enables/disables the limiter for audio channel 1.
[ON], [OFF]
ffFactory setting: [OFF]
[LIMITER CH2]
Enables/disables the limiter for audio channel 2.
[ON], [OFF]
ffFactory setting: [OFF]
[LIMITER CH3]
Enables/disables the limiter for audio channel 3.
[ON], [OFF]
ffFactory setting: [OFF]
[LIMITER CH4]
Enables/disables the limiter for audio channel 4.
[ON], [OFF]
ffFactory setting: [OFF]
[HEADROOM]
Sets the headroom (standard level).
[12dB], [18dB], [20dB]
[AUDIO OUT]
Sets the audio signal output from the <AUDIO OUT> terminal, headphone terminal, <HDMI OUT>terminal,
and built-in speaker.
[CH1/CH2], [CH1], [CH2], [CH3/CH4], [CH3], [CH4]
ffFactory setting: [CH1/CH2]
[TEST TONE]
Outputs rated level 1 kHz tone signal according to the reference level.
The standard level varies depending on the setting of [HEADROOM].
[ON], [OFF]
ffFactory setting: [ON]
[OUTPUT SEL]
Configure the settings regarding video output from <SDI OUT>, <HDMI OUT>, <GENLOCK IN/VIDEO OUT>, or <TC IN/OUT> terminal.
Item
[SDI OUT]
Description of settings
Selects video output from the <SDI OUT> terminal.
[ON]: Outputs video.
[OFF]: Does not output video.
ffFactory setting: [OFF]
– 132 –
Chapter 6 Menu Operations — Menu list
Item
Description of settings
[SDI&HDMI SELECT]
Selects output signals from the <SDI OUT> terminal and <HDMI OUT> terminal.
[SYSTEM MODE]: Follows the setting in [SYSTEM MODE] → [LINE&FREQ].
[1080i]: Converts into interlaced signals and outputs them when [1080‑59.94P] or [1080‑50P] is selected
in [SYSTEM MODE] → [LINE&FREQ]. This cannot be selected when other settings are made.
[DOWNCON]: Down converts to SD signal and outputs.
ffFactory setting: [SYSTEM MODE]
[3G‑SDI OUT]
Selects 1080P signals of the HD SDI output in 1080P mode.
[LEVEL‑A]: Selects the LEVEL‑A method.
[LEVEL‑B]: Selects the LEVEL‑B DL method.
ffFactory setting: [LEVEL‑B]
[SDI OUT CHAR]
Selects whether to superimpose characters on <SDI OUT> terminal output images.
[ON]: Superimposes.
[OFF]: Does not superimpose.
ffFactory setting: [OFF]
[SDI EDH]
Selects whether to superimpose EDH when output from the <SDI OUT> terminal is SD signal (480i and
576i).
[ON]: Superimposes.
[OFF]: Does not superimpose.
ffFactory setting: [ON]
[HD SDI REMOTE]
Sets whether to use the control function of recording operation for an external device (such as a recorder)
connected to the <SDI OUT> terminal at HD SDI output.
[ON]: Controls the recording operation of the external device.
[OFF]: Does not control the recording operation of the external device.
ffFactory setting: [OFF]
[DOWNCON MODE]
Selects the mode of the down converter output signal mode from the <SDI OUT> or <GENLOCK IN/
VIDEO OUT> terminal in HD mode (1080P, 1080i, or 720P).
[SIDE CROP], [LETTER BOX], [SQUEEZE]
ffFactory setting: [LETTER BOX]
[DOWNCON SETTING]
[DETAIL]
Turns detail function for the down converter output signal [ON]/[OFF].
[ON], [OFF]
The down converter output signal contains detail components set during HD signal processing.
This setting superimposes the detail components exclusive to down converter output to that signal.
ffFactory setting: [ON]
[H.DTL LEVEL]
Sets horizontal detail correction level for the down converter output signal.
[0]…[31]
ffFactory setting: [8]
[V.DTL LEVEL]
Sets vertical detail correction level for the down converter output signal.
[0]…[31]
ffFactory setting: [4]
[DTL CORING]
Sets the detail noise removal level.
[0]…[15]
ffFactory setting: [1]
[H.DTL FREQ]
Selects the horizontal detail frequency.
[2.5MHz], [3MHz], [3.5MHz], [4MHz], [4.5MHz]
ffFactory setting: [3.5MHz]
[VIDEO OUT]
Selects the <GENLOCK IN/VIDEO OUT> terminal output [ON]/[OFF].
[ON]: Performs output.
[OFF]: Stops output.
ffFactory setting: [OFF]
[VIDEO OUT CHAR]
Selects whether to superimpose characters on <GENLOCK IN/VIDEO OUT> terminal output images.
[ON]: Superimposes.
[OFF]: Does not superimpose.
ffFactory setting: [ON]
[VIDEO OUT ZEBRA]
Selects whether the zebra pattern is superimposed over the output video signals from the<GENLOCK IN/
VIDEO OUT> terminal.
[ON]: Superimposes.
[OFF]: Does not superimpose.
ffFactory setting: [OFF]
[TC OUT]
Sets the type of time code output from the <TC IN/OUT> terminal.
[TCG]: Outputs the time code generator value of the camera at all times.
[TCG/TCR]: Outputs the time code generator value for camera image output, and the time code value of
the video being played back for video playback output.
ffFactory setting: [TCG]
[TC OUTPUT REF]
Sets the output delay of time code output from the <TC IN/OUT> terminal.
[RECORDING]: Outputs the recorded time code with no delay. This is used when performing simultaneous
recording on two cameras with the time code of this camera as the master.
[VIDEO OUT]: Matches to output images.
ffFactory setting: [VIDEO OUT]
– 133 –
Chapter 6 Menu Operations — Menu list
[NETWORK SETUP]
Configure the settings regarding the network.
Item
Description of settings
[USB MODE SELECT]
Sets the camera operation mode when an external device is connected to the USB.
[STORAGE]: Sets the mode to use with connected devices such as an external hard disk drive.
[DEVICE]: Selects the USB device mode that uses computers, etc. connected via USB 2.0, using P2
cards as mass storage.
ffFactory setting: [STORAGE]
[USB MODE]
Enables/disables the mode selected in [USB MODE SELECT].
[ON], [OFF]
ffFactory setting: [OFF]
[NETWORK SEL]
Sets the connection method when connecting the camera with an external device (such as a computer) via
network.
[WLAN]: Connects via wireless LAN.
[LAN]: Connects via the <LAN> terminal.
[OFF]: Does not connect.
ffFactory setting: [OFF]
[NETWORK FUNC]
[CLIENT SERVICE]
[LAN PROPERTY]
[WIRELESS
PROPERTY]
[HTTP SERVER]
Configures the settings regarding the HTTP server.
[BROWSE]: Enables the P2 browser function.
[BROWSE (+CTRL)]: Enables the HTTP server function, starting and stopping recording at the terminal
side, and preset control of time code or user bits.
[DISABLE]:HTTP Disables the server function.
ffFactory setting: [DISABLE]
[USER ACCOUNT]
Sets the user account name.
[ACCOUNT LIST]
Displays the currently set user account name. Registering of new accounts, deleting accounts, or changing
password can also be performed.
[FTP SERVER URL]
Sets the server name or an address to connect to.
[LOGIN USER]
Sets the user ID to connect to.
[LOGIN PASSWORD]
Sets the password to connect to.
[SSH]
Sets when transferring files using SSH.
[ENABLE]: Uses SSH.
[DISABLE]: Does not use SSH.
ffFactory setting: [DISABLE]
[MAC ADDRESS]
Displays the MAC address of the <LAN> terminal on the camera. (Cannot be changed.)
[DHCP]
Sets whether to use automatic acquisition via DHCP. (Mutually exclusive with [DHCP SERVER] setting)
[ENABLE]: Uses automatic acquisition.
[DISABLE]: Does not use automatic acquisition. Set [IP ADDRESS], [SUBNET MASK], [DEFAULT
GATEWAY], [PRIMARY DNS], and [SECONDARY DNS].
ffFactory setting: [ENABLE]
[IP ADDRESS]
Sets the IP address when [DISABLE] is selected in [DHCP].
ffFactory setting: [192.168.0.1]
[SUBNET MASK]
Sets the subnet mask when [DISABLE] is selected in [DHCP].
ffFactory setting: [255.255.255.0]
[DEFAULT GATEWAY]
Sets the default gateway when [DISABLE] is selected in [DHCP].
ffFactory setting: [192.168.0.254]
[PRIMARY DNS]
Sets the primary DNS server when [DISABLE] is selected in [DHCP].
ffFactory setting: [0.0.0.0]
[SECONDARY DNS]
Sets the secondary DNS server when [DISABLE] is selected in [DHCP].
ffFactory setting: [0.0.0.0]
[DHCP SERVER]
Sets whether to use the DHCP SERVER function when connected via wired LAN. (Mutually exclusive with
[DHCP] setting)
[ENABLE]: Uses the DHCP SERVER function.
[DISABLE]: Does not use the DHCP SERVER function.
ffFactory setting: [DISABLE]
[MAC ADDRESS]
Displays the MAC address of the wireless LAN of the camera. (Cannot be changed.)
[TYPE]
Sets the connection method.
[DIRECT]: Accesses to the network function of the camera directly from a smartphone, tablet, or computer.
[INFRA]: Connects to the wireless access point.
ffFactory setting: [DIRECT]
[SSID]
Displays network name (SSID).
[CHANNEL]
Sets the channels to be used when [DIRECT] is selected in [TYPE] and the camera is connected via
wireless LAN.
[AUTO], [CH1], [CH6], [CH11]
ffFactory setting: [AUTO]
[ENCRYPTION]
Sets the encryption format.
[WPA-TKIP], [WPA-AES], [WPA2-TKIP], [WPA2-AES]
ffFactory setting: [WPA2-AES]
[ENCRYPT KEY]
Sets the encryption key. Set the key using a string of 8 to 63 characters or a hexadecimal number with 64
digits.
ffFactory setting: [01234567890123456789abcdef]
– 134 –
Chapter 6 Menu Operations — Menu list
Item
[NETWORK TOOL]
Description of settings
[DHCP]
Sets whether to use automatic acquisition via DHCP when [INFRA] is selected in [TYPE].
[ENABLE]: Uses automatic acquisition.
[DISABLE]: Does not use automatic acquisition. Set [IP ADDRESS], [SUBNET MASK], [DEFAULT
GATEWAY], [PRIMARY DNS], and [SECONDARY DNS].
ffFactory setting: [ENABLE]
[IP ADDRESS]
Sets the IP address when [DISABLE] is selected in [DHCP].
ffFactory setting: [192.168.0.1]
[SUBNET MASK]
Sets the subnet mask when [DISABLE] is selected in [DHCP].
ffFactory setting: [255.255.255.0]
[DEFAULT GATEWAY]
Sets the default gateway when [INFRA] is selected in [TYPE] and [DISABLE] is selected in [DHCP].
ffFactory setting: [192.168.0.254]
[PRIMARY DNS]
Sets the primary DNS server when [INFRA] is selected in [TYPE] and [DISABLE] is selected in [DHCP], or
when [ENABLE] is selected in [DHCP] and the primary DNS server cannot be obtained.
ffFactory setting: [0.0.0.0]
[SECONDARY DNS]
Sets the secondary DNS server when [INFRA] is selected in [TYPE] and [DISABLE] is selected in [DHCP],
or when [ENABLE] is selected in [DHCP] and the primary DNS server cannot be obtained.
ffFactory setting: [0.0.0.0]
[DHCP SERVER]
Sets whether to use the DHCP SERVER function when [DIRECT] is selected in [TYPE] and the camera is
connected via wireless LAN.
[ENABLE]: Uses the DHCP SERVER function.
[DISABLE]: Does not use the DHCP SERVER function.
ffFactory setting: [ENABLE]
[LOG DISPLAY]
Displays the connection log.
[STATUS DISPLAY]
Displays the network status.
[INITIALIZE]
Restores the network setting status to the factory settings.
[PING]
Checks network connection using PING commands.
[DISPLAY SETUP]
Configure the settings regarding the details to be displayed on the viewfinder or LCD monitor.
These menu items cannot be set when the thumbnail screen is displayed.
Item
Description of settings
[MENU DISPLAY]
Selects the LCD monitor or the view finder as the location where the menu is displayed.
[LCD&EVF]: Displays the menu both on the LCD monitor and the viewfinder.
[LCD]: Displays the menu only on the LCD monitor.
ffFactory setting: [LCD&EVF]
[ZEBRA1 DETECT]
Sets the extraction level of zebra pattern 1.
[0%]…[109%]
ffFactory setting: [70%]
[ZEBRA2 DETECT]
Sets the extraction level of zebra pattern 2.
[0%]…[109%]
ffFactory setting: [85%]
[ZEBRA2]
Sets on/off of zebra pattern 2 and selects the type.
[ON], [SPOT], [OFF]
ffFactory setting: [SPOT]
[CENTER MARK]
Controls the center mark.
[1]: + (large)
[2]: Open center (large)
[3]: + (small)
[4]: Open center (small)
[OFF]: Does not display.
ffFactory setting: [1]
[SAFETY MARK]
Selects the type of frame for the safety zone marker.
[1]: Box
[2]: Corners
[OFF]: Does not display.
ffFactory setting: [2]
[SAFETY AREA]
Sets the size of the safety zone marker.
The constant ratio of length to width can be set in 1% increments.
[80%]…[100%]
ffFactory setting: [90%]
[FRAME MARK]
Enables/disables frame marker.
[ON], [OFF]
ffFactory setting: [OFF]
[FRAME SIG]
Sets frame marker aspect ratio.
[4:3], [13:9], [14:9], [1.85:1], [2.35:1]
ffFactory setting: [4:3]
[FRAME LVL]
Sets the level of the outside of the frame marker.
[0]…[15]
ffFactory setting: [15]
[LEVEL GAUGE]
Enables/disables level gauge.
[ON], [OFF]
ffFactory setting: [OFF]
– 135 –
Chapter 6 Menu Operations — Menu list
Item
Description of settings
[FOCUS BAR]
Displays/hides the focus bar indicating the degree of focus.
[ON], [OFF]
ffFactory setting: [OFF]
[ZOOM/FOCUS]
Selects the unit of zoom and focus values.
[NUMBER]: Displays position values of zoom and focus from [0] to [99].
[mm/feet]: Zoom is displayed in units of millimeters, and focus in units of feet.
[mm/m]: Zoom is displayed in units of millimeters, and focus in units of meters.
[OFF]: Neither zoom nor focus is displayed.
ffFactory setting: [NUMBER]
[LEVEL METER]
Displays/hides audio level meter.
[ON], [OFF]
ffFactory setting: [ON]
[DATE/TIME]
Sets date and time display.
[TIME]: Displays the hour, minute, and second.
[DATE]: Displays the year, month, and date.
[TIME&DATE]: Displays the hour, minute, and second, as well as year, month, and date.
[OFF]: Does not display.
ffFactory setting: [OFF]
[REC COUNTER]
Sets operation of the counter for recording.
[TOTAL]: Performs continuous counting until it is reset by the <RESET> button.
[CLIP]: Clears the counter value at the start of recording and counts the time for each recording.
ffFactory setting: [TOTAL]
[P2CARD REMAIN]
Turns display of the remaining recording capacity for the P2 card [ON]/[OFF].
[ON], [OFF]
ffFactory setting: [ON]
[BATTERY]
Turns the battery charge level indicator [ON]/[OFF].
[ON], [OFF]
ffFactory setting: [ON]
[OTHER DISPLAY]
Sets display details of other information.
[PARTIAL]: Displays information partly.
[ALL]: Displays all information.
[USER]: Displays the information set in [DISPLAY SETTING].
ffFactory setting: [PARTIAL]
[DISPLAY SETTING]
[IRIS]
Displays/hides F value and auto iris control status.
[ON], [OFF]
ffFactory setting: [ON]
[GAIN]
Displays/hides gain value.
[ON], [OFF]
ffFactory setting: [ON]
[SHUTTER]
Displays/hides shutter speed.
[ON], [OFF]
ffFactory setting: [ON]
[WHITE BALANCE]
Displays/hides the <WHITE BAL> switch position.
[ON], [OFF]
ffFactory setting: [ON]
[ND]
Displays/hides the set value of ND filter.
[ON], [OFF]
ffFactory setting: [ON]
[Y GET]
Displays/hides brightness of Y GET.
[ON], [OFF]
ffFactory setting: [ON]
[D.ZOOM]
Displays/hides digital zoom display.
[ON], [OFF]
ffFactory setting: [ON]
[SCENE FILE]
Displays/hides scene file name.
[ON], [OFF]
ffFactory setting: [ON]
[DRS]
Toggles whether to display when the dynamic range stretcher function is activated.
[ON], [OFF]
ffFactory setting: [ON]
[FBC]
Toggles whether to display when the flash band compensation function is activated.
[ON], [OFF]
ffFactory setting: [ON]
[AREA]
Toggles whether to display when the area mode function is activated.
[ON], [OFF]
ffFactory setting: [ON]
[OIS]
Displays/hides image stabilizer display.
[ON], [OFF]
ffFactory setting: [ON]
[FULL AUTO]
Displays/hides the display when the <AUTO/MANUAL> switch is at <AUTO>.
[ON], [OFF]
ffFactory setting: [ON]
[SHOOTING MODE]
Displays/hides high-sensitivity mode.
[ON], [OFF]
ffFactory setting: [ON]
– 136 –
Chapter 6 Menu Operations — Menu list
Item
Description of settings
[PB MODE]
Displays/hides the operation status of playback.
[ON], [OFF]
ffFactory setting: [ON]
[SYSTEM MODE]
Displays/hides system mode.
[ON], [OFF]
ffFactory setting: [OFF]
[REC FORMAT]
Displays/hides recording format.
[ON], [OFF]
ffFactory setting: [ON]
[FRAME RATE]
Displays/hides frame rate.
[ON], [OFF]
ffFactory setting: [ON]
[ASPECT]
Displays/hides letterbox recording display.
[ON], [OFF]
ffFactory setting: [ON]
[REC MEDIA]
Displays/hides recording media.
[ON], [OFF]
ffFactory setting: [ON]
[ONE CLIP REC]
Displays/hides the status of one-clip recording mode.
[ON], [OFF]
ffFactory setting: [ON]
[REC MODE]
Displays/hides recording format display.
[ON], [OFF]
ffFactory setting: [ON]
[PROXY]
Displays/hides proxy information.
[ON], [OFF]
ffFactory setting: [ON]
[GPS]
Displays/hides GPS signal reception status.
[ON], [OFF]
ffFactory setting: [ON]
[EVF DETAIL]
Adjusts the contour of the video in the viewfinder or LCD monitor to make it easier to focus.
[ON], [OFF]
ffFactory setting: [ON]
If the function is assigned to the USER button, [ON]/[OFF] can be switched using the USER button.
[EVF PEAK LEVEL]
Adjusts the peaking level of the viewfinder and LCD monitor.
[−7]…[7]
ffFactory setting: [0]
[EVF PEAK FREQ]
Adjusts the peaking frequency of the viewfinder and LCD monitor.
[HIGH], [LOW]
ffFactory setting: [LOW]
[EVF SETTING]
[EVF BRIGHTNESS]
Adjusts the brightness of the viewfinder.
[−15]…[15]
ffFactory setting: [0]
[EVF CONTRAST]
Adjusts the contrast of the viewfinder.
[−30]…[30]
ffFactory setting: [0]
[EVF COLOR LEVEL]
Adjusts the color level of the viewfinder.
[−15]…[15]
ffFactory setting: [0]
[EVF COLOR]
Selects whether to display video in the viewfinder in color or in black and white.
[ON]: Displays in color.
[OFF]: Displays in black and white.
ffFactory setting: [ON]
[EYE SENSOR]
[LCD SETTING]
[SELF SHOOT]
Selects sensitivity of eye sensor.
[HIGH], [LOW]
ffFactory setting: [HIGH]
[LCD BRIGHTNESS]
Adjusts the brightness of the LCD monitor.
[−15]…[15]
ffFactory setting: [0]
[LCD CONTRAST]
Adjusts the contrast of the LCD monitor.
[−30]…[30]
ffFactory setting: [0]
[LCD COLOR LEVEL]
Adjusts the color level of the LCD monitor.
[−15]…[15]
ffFactory setting: [0]
[LCD BACKLIGHT]
Adjusts the brightness of the LCD monitor backlight.
[1]…[−3]
[1]: Brightens more than normal.
[−3]: Becomes the darkest.
ffFactory setting: [0]
Sets the display of the LCD monitor when mirror shooting is performed.
[NORMAL]: Does not invert the left and right sides.
[MIRROR]: Inverts the left and right sides.
ffFactory setting: [MIRROR]
– 137 –
Chapter 6 Menu Operations — Menu list
[CARD FUNCTIONS]
Configure the settings regarding reading/writing of the scene files and user files to SD memory cards.
Item
Description of settings
[SCENE FILE]
Loads scene files from an SD memory card or saves them to an SD memory card.
[LOAD]: Loads scene files.
[SAVE]: Saves scene files.
[USER FILE]
Loads user files from an SD memory card or saves them to an SD memory card.
[LOAD]: Loads user files.
[SAVE]: Saves user files.
[SD CARD PROPERTY]
Displays the SD memory card status. The format condition, available space, etc. can be checked.
[FORMAT SD CARD]
Formats an SD memory card.
[OTHER FUNCTIONS]
Configure these items to make settings for reading/writing, initialization of user file data on the internal memory, and the camera settings.
Item
Description of settings
[USER FILE]
Loads/saves/initializes user files on the camera memory.
[LOAD]: Loads user files.
[SAVE]: Saves user files.
[INITIALIZE]: Restores user files to the factory settings.
[ACCESS LED]
Selects whether to light the access LED of the P2 card.
[ON], [OFF]
ffFactory setting: [ON]
[TALLY LAMP]
Sets up the tally lamp lighting conditions.
[FRONT]: The front tally lamp lights up.
[REAR]: The rear tally lamp lights up.
[BOTH]: Both the front and rear tally lamps light up.
[OFF]: The tally lamp does not light up.
ffFactory setting: [OFF]
[CLOCK SETTING]
Sets the built-in calendar (date and time) and time zone.
[TIME ZONE]
For GMT, set using 30 minute intervals from −12:00 to +13:00 (however, +12:45 is possible). After setting
the time, when changing the setting value for [TIME ZONE], the displayed and registered times switch to
the time with the time difference.
[GL PHASE]
When in HD (1080i, 720P) mode, selects the output signal of phase to be locked to the signal input to the
<GENLOCK IN/VIDEO OUT> terminal.
[HD SDI]: Locks the HD SDI output signal to genlock input.
[COMPOSITE]: Locks the down-converted composite output signals (signal from the <GENLOCK IN/
VIDEO OUT> terminal and signal of 480i, 576i from the <SDI OUT>terminal) to genlock input.
ffFactory setting: [HD SDI]
[H PHASE]
Adjusts the horizontal phase when the phase is to be locked to the signal input to the <GENLOCK IN/
VIDEO OUT> terminal.
[−512]…[512]
ffFactory setting: [0]
[SEEK POS SEL]
Selects the position to move when the <)>/<%> button is pressed while playback is paused.
[CLIP]: Top of the clip
[CLIP&TEXT MEMO]: Top of the clip and text memo location
ffFactory setting: [CLIP]
[GPS]
Configures internal GPS settings.
[ON]: Activates the GPS operation. Outputs the location information as a signal to the <SDI OUT> terminal
and records it as clip metadata.
[OFF]: Does not activate the GPS operation. Does not output and record the location information.
ffFactory setting: [OFF]
[P.OFF GPS DATA]
Retains the GPS location information when the camera is turned off. Sets whether to record the retained
data at the next turning on until a positioning is performed.
[HOLD]: Retains and records data.
[CLEAR]: Clears the data at the time when the camera is turned off. Records 0 (No-Info) at the next
turning on until a positioning is performed.
ffFactory setting: [CLEAR]
[MENU INITIALIZE]
Restores the whole setting menu including all scene files (1 to 6) and user files to the factory settings.
[MAINTENANCE]
These are items for performing maintenance inspection of the camera. This menu is used for updating the firmware version of the camera.
Item
Description of settings
[UPDATE]
Performs an update of the camera firmware. (Enabled only when there is a dedicated update file on the SD
memory card.)
[ACTIVATE]
This menu activates optional functions (separate fees required).
– 138 –
Chapter 6 Menu Operations — Menu list
[DIAGNOSTIC]
This menu is used to display the firmware version, product name, serial number, and operation time of the camera.
Item
Description of settings
[VERSION]
Displays the information of the camera.
[MODEL NAME]: Displays the product name of the camera.
[SERIAL NO.]: Displays the serial number of the camera.
[MAC ADDRESS]: Displays the MAC address of the camera (Media Access Control address).
[UID]: Displays the unique ID of the camera.
[OPERATION]
Displays the operation time of the camera.
[USER MENU SEL]
Configure the items to be displayed in [USER MENU].
– 139 –
Chapter 6 Menu Operations — [OPTION MENU] list
[OPTION MENU] list
[AREA SELECT]
Before you use the camera, select a region in which you use the camera.
[NTSC]: Select an NTSC region other than Japan.
[NTSC (J)]: Select Japan.
[PAL]: Select a PAL region.
[AWB PRE CONTROL]
Change the output display or output value for the white balance preset value [3200K].
Item
Description of settings
[R Gain]
Displays the output of Rch of preset [3200K].
The color can be changed on the Rch axis by changing the output of Rch.
[−400]…[400]
ffFactory setting: [0]
[B Gain]
Displays the output of Bch of preset [3200K].
The color can be changed on the Bch axis by changing the output of Bch.
[−400]…[400]
ffFactory setting: [0]
[G AXIS]
Displays the output of G axis of preset [3200K].
The color can be changed on the G axis by changing the output of Rch/Bch.
[−400]…[400]
ffFactory setting: [0]
[CAM REMOTE ADJ.]
Configure settings when a remote control is used.
Item
Description of settings
[FOCUS ADJ.]
Adjusts the focus when the remote control is used.
[−20]…[20]
ffFactory setting: [0]
[IRIS ADJ.]
Adjusts the iris when the remote control is used.
[−20]…[20]
ffFactory setting: [0]
[ZOOM ADJ.]
Adjusts the zoom when the remote control is used.
[−20]…[20]
ffFactory setting: [0]
[ENG SECURITY]
Select whether to place restrictions on opening and closing the menu screen.
[ON]: Disables opening of menu items other than [USER MENU]. To release, consult your dealer.
[OFF]: Opening and closing are not restricted.
– 140 –
Chapter 7
Display
This chapter describes the screen displayed on the viewfinder or LCD monitor.
Chapter 7 Display — Screen status display
Screen status display
In addition to video, the viewfinder and LCD monitor display messages that indicate the camera settings and operation status, a center marker, safety
zone marker, zebra patterns, and other information.
Configuration of status display on screen
The screen displayed in normal status is displayed as shown below.
TCG
12 : 34 : 56 : 28
A
mP2
P-
1 5 9 9 min
2 1 9 9 min
MF 9 9 . 9 f t
CH1
CH2
STD F 5 . 6 + 9 9
Z 9 9 . 9 mm
Selecting display items on screen
To select display items on the viewfinder or LCD monitor screen, switch [ON]/[OFF] or switch the type of the respective item in the main menu →
[DISPLAY SETUP].
For details, refer to “Setting menu basic operations” (page 116).
Displaying screen
41 40 39 38
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
TCG
12 : 34 : 56 : 28
A
GP S
37 36 35
H.SENS.
P1 - CL I P
1 2 : 2 4 PN
34
mP2
1 5 9 9 min
SIMUL
2 1 9 9 min
PROXY P 2 & S D
SD 1 2 3 min
33
32
31
30
29
28
SCEN E 1
DRS
1 0 8 0 - 5 9 . 9 4P
F BC
AREA
AVC - I 1 0 0
L T . BOX
8
9
10
11
12
CH1
CH2
13
CH1
CH2
U 2 : S HO T M AR K
27
26
25
ND : OF F
24
R
DEC
31
2037
23 : 59 : 59
D1 0
A.REC
V O L U ME [
14
X
9 9%
Bch19425K
36dB
MF 9 9 . 9 f t
N D 1 / 6 4 ( 1 / 1 2 3 . 5 ) STD F 5 . 6 + 9 9
15
16
17
19
18 20
]
21
[
F . L E VE L [ 0 ]
[ 10 ]
1 Time code display
Every press of the <COUNTER> button switches to the next data (or no display).
ffCounter: Counter value (recording mode only)
– 142 –
Z 9 9 . 9 mm
22
]
23
42
43
Chapter 7 Display — Screen status display
ff[CLIP]: Clip counter value (recording mode only)
Clip counter value for each recording
Displayed when [CLIP] is set in the main menu → [DISPLAY SETUP] → [REC COUNTER].
ff[TCG]: Time code value
When operating in drop frame mode, the “:” (colon) mark between the second and frame changes to “.” (dot).
During playback, [TCR] is displayed.
ff[UBG]: User bits value
During playback, [UBR] is displayed.
ff[VUBG]: User bits value of VITC
During playback, [VUBR] is displayed.
@@NOTE
tt For [TCG] and [UBG], if they are locked to the input signal from the <TC IN/OUT> terminal, [TCG] and [UBG] are displayed in white letters with
outlines.
2 Shooting/recording and playback frame rate display
For variable frame rate recording, the number of frames for shooting and the number of frames for recording/playback are displayed.
Example) 60:24PN (variable frame rate in 60P shooting, 24PN recording)
For playback, 2:3 pull-down is performed to make the video 24P over 60P, and playback in 24/60 times speed is indicated.
For standard recording, only the shooting frame rate is displayed.
3 Proxy information display
Displays the proxy recording information.
ff[PROXY P2 (P2&SD)]: Displayed when proxy recording is started.
ff[PROXY ERR]: Displayed when there is an error in proxy recording.
4 SD memory card status display
ff[WP]: Write protected
ff[END]: No remaining free space
ff[WR ERR]: Write error
ff[SD ***min]: The remaining free space is displayed when proxy is recorded to an SD memory card. (Displayed only in the regular mode check.)
Flashing when the remaining capacity is one minute or less. [−−min] is displayed when there is no SD memory card.
5 System mode display
Displays the mode in which the camera is operating.
ff[1080‑59.94P]: 1080/59.94 progressive mode
ff[1080‑59.94i]: 1080/59.94 interlaced mode
ff[1080‑50P]: 1080/50 progressive mode
ff[1080‑50i]: 1080/50 interlaced mode
ff[720‑59.94P]: 720/59.94 progressive mode
ff[720‑50P]: 720/50 progressive mode
ff[480‑59.94i]: 480/59.94 interlaced mode
ff[576‑50i]: 576/50 interlaced mode
6 Recording format display
Displays the recording method.
ff[AVC‑I100]
ff[AVC‑I50]
ff[AVC‑G50]
ff[AVC‑G25]
ff[AVC‑G12]
ff[DVCPRO HD]
ff[DVCPRO50]
ff[DVCPRO]
ff[DV]
7 Letterbox recording display
Displayed while letterbox recording is performed when the recording format is 480i/576i and [LETTER BOX] is set in the main menu → [SYSTEM
MODE] → [ASPECT CONV].
8 USER button information display
When the USER button is pressed, “USER button name: assigned function name” is displayed for three seconds. The USER button name is
indicated by [U1] to [U8].
9 Focus bar display
Displays the following items in the bottom left of the viewfinder. The high-frequency component of the video is displayed in a numerical value.
ffWhite bar: Focus bar display
ffGreen line: Peak display
10 Time stamp recording display
Displays [R] when time stamp recording is set.
– 143 –
Chapter 7 Display — Screen status display
11 Date and time display
The display order is determined by the area setting.
[NTSC]: “mmm dd yyyy hh:mm:ss”
[NTSC (J)]: “yyyy mmm dd hh:mm:ss”
[PAL]: “dd mmm yyyy hh:mm:ss”
ffmmm: Month (JAN (January), FEB (February), MAR (March), APR (April), MAY (May), JUN (June), JUL (July), AUG (August), SEP (September),
OCT (October), NOV (November), DEC (December))
ffdd: Date
ffyyyy: Year (2000 to 2037)
ffhh: Hour
ffmm: Minute
ffss: Second
12 Audio level meter display
Switches between level meter display and audio output channels 1/2 and 3/4 while holding down the USER button where [AUDIO MON SEL] is
assigned.
13 Audio recording not possible display
Displayed when audio recording is not possible during variable frame rate mode native recording, interval recording, or one shot recording.
14 Digital zoom display
Displays the digital zoom ratio.
ff[D2×]: two times
ff[D5×]: five times
ff[D10×]: ten times
15 Y GET brightness display
In the Y GET mode, the image level in the frame displayed near the center of the screen is displayed as 0% to 109%.
16 ND filter display
Displays the selected ND filter.
17 Shutter speed display
Displays the shutter speed. When synchro scan is performed, the display shows the content set in the main menu → [SCENE FILE] → [SYNC SCAN
TYPE] (time (minutes) or open angle image).
18 <WHITE BAL> switch position display
Displays the position currently selected. Also, the white balance operation is indicated when the automatic white balance is preset. In auto tracking
white balance (white balance with automatic tracking) mode, [ATW] is indicated, and when auto tracking white balance mode is locked, [LOCK] is
indicated.
19 Auto iris control display
ff[STD]: Standard auto iris control
ff[SPOT]: Auto iris control for spotlighting
ff[BACK]: Auto iris control for the backlight compensation
20 Gain display
Displays the gain value of the image amplifier configured.
21 Iris display
Displays the F value.
22 Zoom position display
Displays the zoom position with [Z000] (maximum wide angle) to [Z999] (maximum telephoto).
Change the unit to millimeters in the main menu → [DISPLAY SETUP] → [ZOOM/FOCUS].
@@NOTE
tt When the USER button where [FAST ZOOM] is assigned is pressed to switch the status, [Z] is displayed in white letter with outline.
23 Focus control information display
Displays the focus control information with [99] to [00]. [AF] is indicated for auto focus, and [MF] is indicated for manual focus. Also, when [MF
ASSIST] is set to [ON] in the main menu → [SW MODE] while in manual focus mode, [MA] is indicated.
[95] (distance to the subject: infinity) to [00] (distance to the subject: approx. 5 cm)
Depending on the zoom position, the subject may not be within the macro range.
Also, depending on the zoom position, the lowest value of the macro range may vary. The display unit can be changed to feet or meters from the
main menu → [DISPLAY SETUP] → [ZOOM/FOCUS].
24 Macro display
Displayed while macro shooting is performed.
25 Recommended ND filter display
Displays the ND filter recommended for the current shooting conditions.
26 Camera warning, notification display area (pages 178, 146)
27 Area frame display
Displayed when the control stick is pressed when the function is assigned in the main menu → [SW MODE] → [AREA MODE].
28 Area display
Displayed when in area mode.
29 Flash band compensation function display
Displayed when the flash band compensation function is activated.
30 Dynamic range stretcher function display
Displayed when the dynamic range stretcher function is working.
– 144 –
Chapter 7 Display — Screen status display
31 Scene file name display
Indicates the scene file name [F1:] to [F6:].
32 Image stabilization display
Displayed when the <OIS> button is pressed and the image stabilizer mode has been set.
33 Battery charge level indicator
As the battery level decreases, the indication changes
→
→
→
→
→
.
When the battery runs out,
(
) flashes.
(While the AC adaptor is connected,
is displayed.)
The battery charge level may not be indicated correctly in a place where the temperature is extremely low or high, or when the camera has not been
used for a long period of time. To display the remaining battery level correctly, fully charge the battery, use the camera until the battery runs out, and
then charge again. (Even after performing the procedure, the remaining battery may not be indicated correctly if the battery is used under extremely
low or high temperature for a long period of time or if the battery has been repeatedly recharged.)
Note that the time in the battery charge level indicator is an approximate estimate as it changes according to the conditions of use.
34 P2 card remaining free space
ff : This is the slot No. This is displayed in black and white inversion when the slot No. is recording destination. It flashes while the card is being
recognized.
ff[***min]: Displays the remaining space on the media in each slot. During a near end, it flashes.
ff(No display): Not displayed when a card is not inserted.
ff[END]: Displayed when there is no space remaining on each card.
ff[WP]: Displayed when the P2 card is write-protected.
ff[ERR]: Displayed in case of format errors or authentication errors.
ff[LOOP ***min]: Displayed when the loop recording mode is set. During the mode check, the second line displays the standard recording time of
loop recording. [LOOP] flashes when loop recording is not possible, for example, when there is no more space remaining on the microP2 memory
card.
35 Recording media display
Among P2 and microP2 memory card slots, displays the slot that can perform recording and playback operations set in the main menu →
[RECORDING SETUP] → [REC MEDIA].
ff[mP2]: microP2 memory card slot
ff[P2]: P2 memory card slot
36 Simultaneous recording mode display
ff[SIMUL]: Displayed when the simultaneous recording is set. When the simultaneous recording cannot be performed, [SIMUL] indication is
displayed with a diagonal line.
37 High-sensitivity mode display
Displayed when [HIGH SENS.] is set in the main menu → [SYSTEM MODE] → [SHOOTING MODE].
38 One clip recording mode status display
ff[1‑CLIP]: The status where a new clip is to be recorded in one-clip recording
ff[1*CLIP]: The status where recording can be performed by combining to the previous clip in one-clip recording
39 Recording/playback operation status display
ff[REC]*1: Recording
ff[PAUSE]: Recording standby
ff[&]: Playback pause
ff[=]: Playback
ff[&=] ([~&]): Frame-by-frame playback (frame-by-frame rewind)
ff[)] ([%]): Fast-forwarding/fast-forward playback (fast-reversing/fast-reverse playback)
ff[CLIP&=] ([CLIP~&]): Clip forwarding (clip rewinding), cueing up by clips
ff[CLIP&T&=] ([CLIP&T~&]): Cueing up (rewinding) by clip and text memo (when [CLIP&TEXT MEMO] is set in the main menu → [OTHER
FUNCTIONS] → [SEEK POS SEL])
ff[START]*1: Displayed when recording of a new clip is started in one-clip recording.
ff[END]*1: Displayed when combining of clips is ended in one-clip recording.
ff[L‑]*2: Loop recording
ff[I‑]*2: Interval recording, one-shot recording
ff[P‑]*2: Pre-recording
*1If the display is set to [OFF], only [REC], [START], and [END] are displayed. Also, when pre-recording, loop recording, interval recording, or one-shot
recording is set, it is displayed.
*2Displayed when [INTERVAL], [ONE SHOT], or [LOOP] is set in the main menu → [RECORDING SETUP] → [RECORDING], or when [ON] is set in the main
menu → [RECORDING SETUP] → [PRE REC].
40 <AUTO/MANUAL> switch operation display
Displayed when the <AUTO/MANUAL> switch is set to <AUTO>.
41 GPS display
Displays the strength of the GPS signal reception in four levels. The GPS signal strength is indicated by the number of vertical bars. It is not
displayed when GPS is disabled.
42 Audio monitor volume adjustment display
Displayed when the <AUDIO MON/ADV> button is pressed for volume adjustment of speaker or headphones. The display disappears three seconds
after the operation.
43 Front audio level volume display
The volume is displayed for three seconds when it is adjusted with the <F.AUDIO LEVEL> dial.
– 145 –
Chapter 7 Display — Screen status display
Camera status display
These are indicated in the information display area in the center.
[ABB]: Displayed while automatic black balance operation is active.
[ATW ACTIVE]: Displayed when the <AWB> button is pressed while auto tracking white balance is active.
[ATW]/[ATW LOCK]: Displayed when the <WHITE BAL> switch is turned to <B> if [ATW] is allocated.
[AWB]: Displayed while automatic white balance operation is active.
[AWB P3200K]/[AWB P5600K]: When the <WHITE BAL> switch is at <PRST> position, displays the color temperature assigned to <PRST>. It is also
displayed when you attempt to perform automatic white balance with the switch at <PRST> position.
[BACK LIGHT]: Displayed when pressing the USER button to which [BACK LIGHT] is allocated for iris control and switching the status.
[GAIN**dB]: Displayed when gain is switched.
[IRIS:MANUAL]/[IRIS:AUTO]: Displayed when you switch the iris operation.
[SHUTTER 1/****]/[SHUTTER OFF]: Displayed when you switch the shutter speed.
[SPOT LIGHT]: Displayed when pressing the USER button to which [SPOT LIGHT] is allocated for iris control, and switching the status.
Checking and displaying shooting status
Also, the mode check [STATUS] screen is displayed when the <DISP/MODE CHK> switch is pushed towards the <CHK> side. During mode check,
almost all items are displayed including usually hidden items so that the shooting status can be checked. For details on the mode check, refer to “Mode
check display” (page 147).
The list shows the display/hide status of each item in the [STATUS] screen. The display/hide status differ depending on the <DISP/MODE CHK> switch
settings and settings in the main menu → [DISPLAY SETUP] → [OTHER DISPLAY].
ff“l” indicates displaying, and “—” indicates hiding.
ff[ON]/[OFF] for each item can be selected in the main menu → [DISPLAY SETUP] → [DISPLAY SETTING].
No
Item
Shooting
Playback
<DISP/
<DISP/MODE
MODE CHK>:
CHK>: <OFF>
<CHK>
<DISP/MODE CHK>: <ON>
[OTHER DISPLAY]
[PARTIAL]
[USER]
l
—*1
—*1
—*1
—*1
—*1
l
l
l
—
l
l
l
Proxy information display
l
—
SD memory card status display
l
—
1
Time code display
l
2
Shooting/recording and playback frame
rate display
3
4
[ALL]
l
—*
2
—*
l
—*2
l
1
—*
1
l
l
l
5
System mode display
l
l
l
—
l
—
l
6
Recording format display
l
l
l
—
l
—
l
7
Letterbox recording display
l
—
l
—
l
—
l
8
USER button information display
l
—
—*1
—*1
—*1
—*1
—*1
9
Focus bar display
l
—
—*1
—*1
—*1
—*1
—*1
l
—
l
—
—*1
—*1
—*1
11 Date and time display
l
—
l
—
—*1
—*1
—*1
12 Audio level meter display
l
l
l
—
—*1
—*1
—*1
—*1
10 Time stamp recording display
13 Audio recording not possible display
l
—
l
—
—*1
—*1
14 Digital zoom display
l
—
l
—
l
l
l
15 Y GET brightness display
l
—
l
—
l
l
l
16 ND filter display
l
—
l
—
l
—
l
17 Shutter speed display
l
—
l
—
l
l
l
18 <WHITE BAL> switch position display
l
—
l
—
l
l
l
19 Auto iris control display
l
—
l
—
l
l
l
20 Gain display
l
—
l
—
l
l
l
21 Iris display
l
—
l
—
l
l
l
22 Zoom position display
l
—
l
—
—*1
—*1
—*1
23 Focus control information display
l
—
l
—
—*
—*
—*1
1
1
24 Macro display
l
—
l
—
l
l
l
25 Recommended ND filter display
l
—
l
—
l
—
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
27 Area frame display
l
—
—*1
—*1
—*1
—*1
—*1
28 Area display
l
—
l
—
l
l
l
Flash band compensation function
29
display
l
—
l
—
l
l
l
l
—
l
—
l
l
l
26
30
Camera warning, notification display
area
Dynamic range stretcher function
display
31 Scene file name display
l
—
l
—
l
—
l
32 Image stabilization display
l
—
l
—
l
l
l
33 Battery charge level indicator
l
l
l
—*2
—*1
—*1
—*1
34 P2 card remaining free space
l
l
l
—*
—*
—*
—*1
– 146 –
2
1
1
Chapter 7 Display — Screen status display
No
Item
Shooting
Playback
<DISP/
<DISP/MODE
MODE CHK>:
CHK>: <OFF>
<CHK>
<DISP/MODE CHK>: <ON>
[OTHER DISPLAY]
[ALL]
[PARTIAL]
[USER]
35 Recording media display
l
—
l
—
l
l
l
36 Simultaneous recording mode display
l
—
l
—
l
—
l
37 High-sensitivity mode display
l
—
l
—
l
l
l
38 One clip recording mode status display
l
—
l
—
l
l
l
39
Recording/playback operation status
display
l
l
l
—*3
l
l
l
40
<AUTO/MANUAL> switch operation
display
l
—
l
—
l
l
l
41 GPS display
l
—
l
—
l
—
l
Audio monitor volume adjustment
42
display
l
l
—*1
—*1
—*1
—*1
—*1
43 Front audio level volume display
l
—
—*1
—*1
—*1
—*1
—*1
*1 May be displayed depending on other settings.
*2 Displayed when the remaining capacity becomes smaller.
*3 Displayed during shooting.
Mode check display
The camera settings and status can be displayed on the viewfinder or LCD monitor screen for check.
Each time the <DISP/MODE CHK> switch on the camera is pushed towards the <CHK> side, the five screens are switched.
[STATUS] screen display → [FUNCTION] screen display → [AUDIO] screen display → [USER SW] screen display → [META INFO] screen display → no
display
Each screen is displayed for approximately five seconds. Pushing the <DISP/MODE CHK> switch towards the <CHK> side while the screen is displayed
moves to the next screen.
[FUNCTION] screen
Displays the video output status and information of the recording media.
[SDI OUT]
—
[TYPE]
Displays the format of the signal output from the <SDI OUT> terminal by [HD‑SDI]/
[SD‑SDI].
[CHAR]
Displays the superimposition status of characters selected in the main menu → [OUTPUT
SEL] → [SDI OUT CHAR] by [ON]/[OFF].
[P2CARD STATUS]
[PROXY]
—
Displays the status of the P2 card inserted in the card slot, remaining capacity, and total
used capacity.
The statuses of cards to be displayed are as follows:
[ACTIVE]/[ACCESSING]/[INFO READING]/[FULL]/[PROTECTED]/[NOT SUPPORTED]/
[FORMAT ERROR]/[AUTH NG]/[REC IMPOSSIBLE]/[NO CARD]
For details, refer to “P2 card access LEDs and status of P2 cards” (page 35).
[TOTAL P2/mP2]
Displays the remaining capacity/total capacity totaled for slots 1 and 2 (or slots 3) and the
recording media ([P2] or [mP2]).
[SLOT1]
Displays the status of the microP2 memory card in slot 1 and remaining capacity/total
capacity.
[SLOT2]
Displays the status of the microP2 memory card in slot 2 and remaining capacity/total
capacity.
[SLOT3]
Displays the status of the P2 memory card in slot 3 and remaining capacity/total capacity.
[MEDIA]
Displays the media selection status for proxy recording.
[P2]/[P2&SD]/[OFF]
[MODE]
Displays the setting status for proxy recording mode.
[AVC-G6 2CH MOV]/[SHQ 2CH MOV]/[HQ 2CH MOV]/[LOW 2CH MOV]
[PROXY ERROR]
[NETWORK]
Displays the status of the signal output from the <SDI OUT> terminal.
[NETWORK]
Displays the operation error on the proxy module.
Displays the network to be used and its status.
[AUDIO] screen
Displays audio settings and the selection status of each recording channel.
[AUDIO]
[INT MIC]
[AUDIO OUT]
[A.IN]
[CH1/2/3/4]
Displays the built-in microphone status set in the main menu → [AUDIO SETUP] → [INPUT
SETTING] → [INT MIC].
ff[STEREO]: Records audio from two directions in the front with the 2ch stereo
microphone.
ff[MONO]: This mode records clearer audio from the front by enhancing the directionality
forward like a shotgun microphone. Audio recorded on the left and right are the same.
ff[OFF]: Disables audio of the built-in microphone.
Displays the audio input signal status set in the main menu → [AUDIO SETUP] →
[OUTPUT SETTING] → [AUDIO OUT].
[CH1/CH2]/[CH1]/[CH2]/[CH3/CH4]/[CH3]/[CH4]
Displays the input status of each channel.
[INT(L)]/[INT(R)]/[INPUT1]/[INPUT2]
– 147 –
Chapter 7 Display — Screen status display
[LEVEL]
[F.VR]
[CH1/2/3/4]
Displays the recording level adjustment method currently selected on each channel.
ff[VR]: Displayed when manual adjustment using the adjustment dial is set.
ff[MENU]: Displayed when manual adjustment using [LEVEL CONTROL CH3]/[LEVEL
CONTROL CH4] is set in the main menu → [AUDIO SETUP] → [RECORDING CH
SETTING].
ff[AUTO]: Displayed when automatic adjustment is set.
[CH1/2/3/4]
Displays by [ON]/[OFF] whether the <F.AUDIO LEVEL> dial is enabled on the channel to
which [VR] (manual adjustment by adjustment dial) is displayed in [LEVEL].
[LIMITER]
[CH1/2/3/4]
Displays the limiter settings of each channel.
[LOWCUT]
[CH1/2/3/4]
Displays the lowcut filter status of each channel.
[USER SW] screen
Displays the assignment status of each USER button. For details, refer to “Assigning functions to the USER buttons” (page 38).
[OTHER ASSIGN]
[GAIN L]
Displays the gain value assigned to <L> of the <GAIN> switch.
[GAIN M]
Displays the gain value assigned to <M> of the <GAIN> switch.
[GAIN H]
Displays the gain value assigned to <H> of the <GAIN> switch.
[S.GAIN]
Enumerates and displays the gain value assigned as super gain.
[WHITE BAL A]
Displays the color temperature assigned to <A> of the <WHITE BAL> switch.
[WHITE BAL B]
Displays the color temperature assigned to <B> of the <WHITE BAL> switch.
[WHITE BAL PRE]
[USER SW]
[USER1] to [USER8]
Displays the color temperature assigned to <PRST> of the <WHITE BAL> switch.
Displays the assignment to the USER1 to USER8 buttons.
[META INFO] screen
Display the information added as metadata.
[META INFO]
[POSITION]
Displays the location information acquired with GPS.
– 148 –
Chapter 8
Connecting to External Devices
This chapter describes the external devices that can be connected to the camera.
Chapter 8 Connecting to External Devices — Connecting with headphones, remote control, or TV/monitor
Connecting with headphones, remote control, or TV/monitor
Headphones
Headphones (optional) can be connected to the headphone terminal (3.5 mm stereo mini jack).
Headphone terminal
@@NOTE
tt When headphones are connected, audio is not output from the speaker.
Remote control
Remote control (optional) can be connected to the <CAM REMOTE> terminals (<FOCUS IRIS>, <ZOOM S/S>).
When the remote control is connected to the <FOCUS IRIS> terminal (3.5 mm mini jack), you can remotely control the focus and iris operations.
When the remote control is connected to the <ZOOM S/S> terminal (2.5 mm super mini jack), you can remotely control the zoom and recording start/
stop operations.
<ZOOM S/S> terminal
<FOCUS IRIS> terminal
@@NOTE
tt Do not connect a device other than a remote control to the <CAM REMOTE> terminals. Connecting a device other than a remote control may change
the brightness or cause defocus of images.
TV/monitor
A TV or monitor can be connected as shown in the following figure.
Audio cable (optional)
3.5 mm diameter jack-pin conversion cable
HDMI cable (optional)
BNC cable (optional)
BNC cable (optional)
TV/monitor
@@NOTE
tt VIERA Link is not supported on the camera. Please be aware that when using an HDMI cable and connecting this camera to a device that supports
VIERA Link, the VIERA Link of other devices may not work in some cases.
tt SD signals (480i, 576i) output from the <HDMI OUT> terminal are converted to progressive signals (480P, 576P) then output.
tt For the BNC cable (optional) connected to the <SDI OUT> terminal, prepare a double-shielded cable equivalent to 5C‑FB.
– 150 –
Chapter 8 Connecting to External Devices — Connecting with headphones, remote control, or TV/monitor
tt Prepare the HDMI cable (optional) with double shielded. For the HDMI cable, using Panasonic HDMI cable is recommended.
– 151 –
Chapter 8 Connecting to External Devices — Connection function via <USB2.0 DEVICE> or <USB3.0 HOST> terminal
Connection function via <USB2.0 DEVICE> or <USB3.0 HOST> terminal
Connecting to a computer in the USB device mode
By connecting the camera to a computer via USB 2.0, the P2 card inserted in the camera can be used as mass storage.
Connecting to a computer
USB cable (optional)
Mini-B
Computer
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
Fig. 3
1Connect the USB cable to the <USB2.0 DEVICE> terminal (device). (Fig. 1)
2Set [DEVICE] in the main menu → [NETWORK SETUP] → [USB MODE SELECT]. (Fig. 2)
For details, refer to “Setting menu basic operations” (page 116).
3Set [ON] in the main menu → [NETWORK SETUP] → [USB MODE]. (Fig. 3)
During USB connection, [USB DEVICE CONNECTED] is displayed in the center of the viewfinder or LCD monitor.
If it is not connected properly, [USB DEVICE DISCONNECTED] is displayed.
4Exit the USB device mode.
There are three methods:
ffTurn the power switch of the camera to <OFF>.
ffPress the <EXIT> button.
While in USB device mode, [Push EXIT to Return to CAMERA MODE] is displayed at the lower of the LCD monitor or viewfinder or screen.
ffPress the USER button to which [USB MODE] has been assigned.
Returns to camera shooting status in approx. five seconds when the USB device mode ends.
@@NOTE
tt The USB 2.0 cable is not supplied with the camera. Prepare a commercial USB 2.0 cable (double-shielded for noise suppression).
tt A USB connection cable of up to 5 m is supported, however, a cable of 3 m or shorter is recommended as preferable.
tt Before making USB connection for the first time, install P2 Viewer Plus software to your computer.
tt Download the USB driver from the website and install it into your computer. For installation procedure of the driver, refer to the installation manual on
the website.
For the latest information on the driver, visit the following website.
http://pro-av.panasonic.net/
tt The camera supports only USB 2.0. Ensure your computer supports USB 2.0.
tt When connecting the camera to a computer via USB, ensure that no other device is connected to the computer via USB.
tt When connecting the camera via USB, do not eject the P2 card.
tt When USB is connected, the P2 card access LED turns off when not accessed.
tt When the camera is operating in the USB device mode, no camera shooting, recording/playback operation or clip thumbnail operation is allowed.
tt When the camera is operating in the USB device mode, the P2 card remaining capacity and status are not displayed. Also, video/audio cannot be
output or displayed.
Connecting to external devices in USB host mode
You can save data on cards or other operations by connecting a storage device such as hard disk drive or solid-state drive that can be connected via
USB 2.0 or USB 3.0 to the <USB3.0 HOST> terminal.
– 152 –
Chapter 8 Connecting to External Devices — Connection function via <USB2.0 DEVICE> or <USB3.0 HOST> terminal
Switching to the USB host mode
USB cable (optional)
External storage device
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
Fig. 3
1Connect the storage device to the <USB3.0 HOST> terminal. (Fig. 1)
ffWhen connecting a storage device which supports USB 3.0, use a cable that conforms to the USB 3.0 standard.
ffWhen a USB 2.0 cable is used, the transfer rates cannot be faster than the ability of USB 2.0.
ffIf the storage device is recognized and is usable,
(gray) on the top right of the thumbnail screen changes to
(white).
2Set [STORAGE] in the main menu → [NETWORK SETUP] → [USB MODE SELECT]. (Fig. 2)
For details, refer to “Setting menu basic operations” (page 116).
3Set [ON] in the main menu → [NETWORK SETUP] → [USB MODE]. (Fig. 3)
ffThe camera is switched to the USB host mode.
ffWhile in USB host mode, [USB STORAGE CONNECTED] is displayed in the center of the viewfinder or LCD monitor. If hard disk drive is not
connected properly, [USB STORAGE DISCONNECTED] is displayed.
4Press the <THUMBNAIL> button.
ffThe thumbnail screen is displayed.
ffEnsure that [USB] is displayed at the top right of the screen.
ffIf a storage device is connected, the icon that indicates storage device status at the top right illuminates. However, a red mark indicates that the
device cannot be used.
For details on USB host mode, refer to “Connecting to external devices in USB host mode” (page 152).
5Exit the USB host mode.
There are two methods:
ffTurn the power switch of the camera to <OFF>.
ffWith the thumbnail screen closed, set [OFF] in the main menu → [NETWORK SETUP] → [USB MODE].
ffPress the USER button to which [USB MODE] has been assigned. Note that this is disabled when a menu or thumbnail is open.
@@NOTE
tt In USB host mode, a P2 card can be played back. Camera image and external input cannot be recorded.
Clips written to the hard disk drive cannot be played back on the camera.
tt A storage device cannot be connected to the <USB2.0 HOST> terminal (page 20).
tt While connecting a storage device, use the fully charged battery or connect an AC adaptor to the camera to avoid problems in copying or formatting
operations.
tt The <USB3.0 HOST> terminal also supports USB bus power (5 V, 0.9 A). However, there are certain devices that cannot run depending on the
storage device used. In such cases, add a separate power supply to the storage device.
tt Some storage devices may not function properly depending on the storage device and cable used.
tt Do not connect multiple storage devices using a hub even if the storage devices are turned off. Do not connect other devices together with your
storage device using a hub.
tt During a format or copy operation, do not unplug the cable, eject the target P2 card, or turn off the camera or the storage device. Rebooting the
camera and the storage device is required.
tt A storage device with the SATA (Serial ATA) or PATA (Parallel ATA) interface connected using a USB conversion cable may not be recognized.
tt Do not connect or disconnect the cable during playback on the camera. Playback may not be performed properly.
– 153 –
Chapter 8 Connecting to External Devices — Connection function via <USB2.0 DEVICE> or <USB3.0 HOST> terminal
Storage device types and available functions
The available functions differ depending on the storage device you will use. The storage device type is displayed after [PARTITION] on the left side of
the storage device explorer screen.
For details, refer to “Storage device information display (explorer screen)” (page 156).
rr Storage device type
Storage device type
[TYPE S]
Features
A special format to read/write data with high speed by card.
[P2STORE]
Indicates P2 STORE (AJ‑PCS060G). Writing is disabled.
Storage devices where the primary partition is FAT16 or FAT32. The partition root or CONTENTS folder
under any folders* is the target.
[FAT]
Indicates other storage devices other than the above. File systems other than FAT16 and FAT32, such as
NTFS.
[OTHER]
* The hierarchy of folders is down to the third level and the maximum number of folders is 100. Long file names and file names with double-byte characters are not
supported. Examples of folder displays are shown below.
/CONTENTS
Can be displayed.
/SAMPLE/CONTENTS
Can be displayed.
/SAMPLE/20140101/CONTENTS
Can be displayed.
/SAMPLE/20140101/1200/CONTENTS
Cannot be displayed. (Cannot be displayed since this is a fourth level folder)
rr Storage device types and available functions
Available functions
[P2STORE]
[FAT]
l
l
l
—
Card*1 → Storage
l
—
l
—
Card*2 → Storage
—
—
—
—
Storage → Card*1
l
l
—
—
Thumbnail display
Card unit
Clip unit
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
Storage device type
[TYPE S]
[OTHER]
Storage → Card*2
—
—
—
—
Card → Storage
l*4
—
l
—
l
l
l
—
Playback check*3
—
—
—
—
Clip image display
l
l
l
—
Format
l
—
l
l*5
Storage → Card
P2 or microP2 memory cards with 32 GB or lower capacity
microP2 memory cards that exceed 32 GB
Playback from the storage device cannot be performed on the camera. Import the contents to the P2 card to play them back.
If you perform additional clip writing, you will not be able to write back to that partition by card.
Storage devices with a capacity of 2 TB or more cannot be formatted.
@@NOTE
tt Storage devices with capacities exceeding 2 TB (2048 GB) are not supported.
tt Use a storage device within its guaranteed operational range (temperature, etc.).
tt Do not place the storage device in a location that is unstable or subject to vibration.
tt Use a storage device with sufficient capacity for copying.
tt Because the storage device is very sensitive, reading, and writing data may become invalid depending on your usage. Please note that Panasonic has
no responsibility for data loss caused from a storage device failure or other defects and any direct or indirect damage related to these.
tt If the contents of the storage device used for copying data from the camera are replaced using another computer, the camera operations and storage
device data cannot be guaranteed.
tt For P2 cards containing defective clips, it is recommended that you copy data to a storage device after restoring in advance.
Formatting a storage device
You can initialize the storage device to a usable format using the [TYPE S] or the [FAT] file system.
– 154 –
Chapter 8 Connecting to External Devices — Connection function via <USB2.0 DEVICE> or <USB3.0 HOST> terminal
Fig. 1
1Select [STORAGE] in the main menu → [CLIP] → [EXPLORE] and press the control stick.
This opens the explorer screen.
2Select the desired format ([TYPE S], [FAT]) in the main menu → [CLIP] → [FORMAT(STORAGE)] and press the control stick. (Fig.
1)
3Select [YES] in the confirmation message and press the control stick.
4Select [YES] again when the confirmation message appears, and press the control stick.
This formats the storage device.
@@NOTE
tt Formatting the storage devices erases all of its contents. Data cannot be recovered once it is formatted. Always check the data before formatting.
Exporting to a storage device by card
You can export to a storage device (write to a storage device from a P2 card) by P2 card. The copy results and the maximum number of items that can
be copied vary depending on format type of the storage device. You cannot perform copying once the capacity of the storage device is exceeded.
Fig. 1
rr [TYPE S]
A partition is created for each card, and all data included in the card are copied there. You can check the part numbers and serial numbers of the P2
cards that have been copied on the explorer screen of the camera.
The maximum number of items that can be copied is 23.
rr [FAT]
A folder is created for each card. All data included in the card are copied there. You can check the folder names in the explorer screen of the camera.
Folders are created in two levels; the date folders on the first level and the time folders on the second.
Example) August 30, 2013, 12:34:56: /13-08-30/12-34-56
The maximum number of items that can be copied is 100.
1Select [EXPORT] in the main menu → [CLIP] and press the control stick.
2Move the cursor to the card slot number of the copy source and press the control stick.
For [TYPE S], selecting [ALL SLOT] exports all cards currently inserted.
– 155 –
Chapter 8 Connecting to External Devices — Connection function via <USB2.0 DEVICE> or <USB3.0 HOST> terminal
3Select [YES] in the confirmation message and press the control stick.
Exporting begins. A progress bar appears during exporting. (Fig. 1)
[COPY COMPLETED!] will be displayed when exporting is completed.
@@NOTE
tt For export with [TYPE S], P2 card data and copied data can be verified (compared) automatically after exporting. Verification at the time of export
is enabled in the factory setting. When you set to disable verification at the time of export, exported data is not verified, and the time until export
completes will shorten. To disable verification, set [VERIFY] to [OFF] in the main menu → [CLIP] → [STORAGE COPY SETUP]. For [FAT], verification
is not performed regardless of this setting.
tt To discontinue the export process, press the control stick. A [CANCEL] confirmation message will appear. Select [YES] and press the control stick.
tt Even if you cancel the process during verification, copying to the P2 card will continue until it is completed.
tt microP2 memory cards that exceed 32 GB cannot be exported and imported. Use copied clips.
Copying to a storage device by clip
You can copy only the selected clips to a storage device.
1Go to the thumbnail screen. Use the control stick to place the cursor on a clip you want to copy and press the control stick.
You can also select multiple clips.
2Select [STORAGE] in the main menu → [CLIP] → [COPY] and press the control stick.
A list of folders or partitions in the storage device is displayed.
3Select the copy destination and press the control stick.
4Select [YES] in the confirmation message and press the control stick.
This starts the copying process. A progress bar is displayed during copying.
[COPY COMPLETED!] will be displayed when copying is completed.
@@NOTE
tt When the storage device has a [FAT] file system, the folders displayed are as follows:
- Root
- Folders down to the third level including the CONTENTS folder
tt To copy to a [TYPE S] storage device, one or more partitions are required. You can either format the storage device to [FAT] or perform copying after
creating a partition through the export process.
tt To cancel the copy process, use the control stick to place the cursor on [CANCEL] and press the control stick. A [CANCEL] confirmation message will
appear. Select [YES] and press the control stick. Clips copied halfway to the copy destination are deleted.
tt If you have copied clips to a [TYPE S] storage device, you will not be able to import to that partition by card. Also, the part number display of the card
at that instance will display [UNKNOWN].
Storage device information display (explorer screen)
You can perform the following operations in the explorer screen display.
ffStorage device information display
ffStorage device partition or folder thumbnail display and selection
ffTarget partition or folder selection
To display the explorer screen, select [STORAGE] in the main menu → [CLIP] → [EXPLORE] and press the control stick.
1
2
4
3
1 Storage device indicator
This displays the connected / not connected status and the storage device type.
2 Display mode
This indicates that the explorer screen of the storage device is currently displayed.
3 Device information
For [TYPE S] and [P2STORE] (storage devices that allow reading/writing by card)
[PARTITION]
[TYPE S]/[P2STORE]
[VENDOR]
Vendor name
[MODEL]
Model name
[SIZE]
Total capacity (unit: GB)
– 156 –
Chapter 8 Connecting to External Devices — Connection function via <USB2.0 DEVICE> or <USB3.0 HOST> terminal
[USED]
Used capacity (unit: GB)
Used P2 card area (unit: number of clips), maximum of 23
[FREE CAP.]
Remaining capacity (unit: GB)
[SELECTED PART.]
Number of partitions selected
For [FAT] and [OTHER] (other storage devices)
[PARTITION]
[FAT]/[OTHER]
[VENDOR]
Vendor name
[MODEL]
Model name
[SIZE]
[FREE CAP.]
[SELECTED PART.]
Total capacity (unit: GB)
Remaining capacity (unit: GB)
Number of folders selected
4 Partition or folder information
For [TYPE S] and [P2STORE] (partition information)
Displays a checkmark when a target partition is selected
[NO.]
[MODEL]
[PARTITION NAME]
Partition number
P2 card model name
Name assigned to the partition
[DATE]
Partition record date
[TIME]
Partition record time
[SERIAL]
P2 card serial number
For [FAT] and [OTHER] (folder information)
Displays a checkmark when a target partition is selected
[NO.]
[FOLDER NAME]
Folder number
Folder name (excluding the CONTENTS folder)
[DATE]
Folder creation date
[TIME]
Folder creation time
@@NOTE
tt For [TYPE S] storage devices, you can switch the display between the partition name and serial name using the control stick.
tt If there is an invalid partition in [P2STORE], the partition information is displayed in gray.
tt The remaining free space of the corresponding partition can be checked in the main menu → [CLIP] → [PROPERTY] → [FREE CAP. OF
PARTITION].
Selecting the target folder/partition in the explorer screen
You can display all clips included in the selected partition/folder as thumbnails by selecting partitions/folders as targets. You can display up to six
partitions/folders. When the seventh partition/folder is specified, setting is disabled and a warning is displayed.
Fig. 1
1In the explorer screen, place the cursor on the partition/folder.
2Press and hold the control stick (for one second or more).
The partition/folder is selected and a checkmark is displayed. (Fig. 1)
The selected target partition/folder is valid until the storage device is disconnected or the power is turned off. To release the selected partition/folder,
hold down the control stick (for one second or more) again on the selected partition.
Press the <CANCEL> button to deselect all partitions/folders.
– 157 –
Chapter 8 Connecting to External Devices — Connection function via <USB2.0 DEVICE> or <USB3.0 HOST> terminal
@@NOTE
tt In [TYPE S] storage devices, [MODEL] is [UNKNOWN] and clips recorded across other partitions will not be one normal clip. Copying clips to a [TYPE
S] storage device changes the partition of the copy destination [MODEL] to [UNKNOWN].
tt The partition name can be set when a [TYPE S] storage device is used. The partition name that has been set is displayed in [PARTITION NAME] on
the explorer screen.
Setting a partition name in the explorer screen
When the storage device is [TYPE S], the name (up to 20 characters) can be set to the partition. The preset partition name is displayed in [PARTITION
NAME] on the explorer screen.
1In the explorer screen, place the cursor on the partition you want to set up.
You can display the thumbnail list and set names for partitions by pressing the control stick.
2Select [CHANGE PARTITION NAME] in the main menu → [CLIP] and press the control stick.
This displays the soft keyboard.
3Enter the partition name and select [OK].
The partition name is set.
Deleting the last partition in the explorer screen
You can delete the last partition on a [TYPE S] type storage device.
1In the explorer screen, place the cursor on the last partition.
2Select [DELETE LAST PARTITION] in the main menu → [CLIP] and press the control stick.
@@NOTE
tt You can only delete the last partition when using a [TYPE S] storage device. You can only delete the last partition. You cannot delete other partitions.
tt Since deleted partitions cannot be recovered, perform a check thoroughly before deleting.
Displaying the storage device clip thumbnails and the video monitor
Displaying thumbnails
You can display and manage clips saved in a storage device, as well as display the thumbnail screen for clips saved in a P2 card attached to the
camera.
<SET>
<EXIT>
1Open the explorer screen.
Partitions or folders are displayed in a list.
2Use the control stick to place the cursor on the partition or folder you want to display on the thumbnail screen, and press the
control stick.
This displays the thumbnails of clips in the partition or folder. You can go back to the main explorer screen by clicking the <EXIT> button.
@@NOTE
tt When target partitions are selected, you can display thumbnails in all partitions selected as targets by pressing the control stick while holding down the
<SHIFT> button.
– 158 –
Chapter 8 Connecting to External Devices — Connection function via <USB2.0 DEVICE> or <USB3.0 HOST> terminal
rr Information display items
1
1 Storage device information
For [TYPE S]
[SERIAL]
P2 card serial number
[MODEL]
P2 card model name
[SELECTED PART.]
[SELECTED PART. NO.]
[NO.]
Displays a checkmark when a target partition is selected
List of selected partition numbers (only displayed when multiple partitions are selected)
Partition number
[DATE]
Partition record date
[TIME]
Partition record time
[VERIFY]
Verification settings and results during recording, [ON/FAILED]
ff[ON/FAILED]: Verification performed. Items match.
ff[ON/FINISHED]: Verification performed but no match found. (For [P2STORE], [−−] is displayed.)
ff[OFF]: Verification not performed
[NAME]
Partition name defined by the user
[SIZE]
Total capacity of the storage device
[USED]
Used storage device capacity
[FREE CAP.]
Remaining storage device capacity
For [FAT]
[SELECTED PART.]
[SELECTED PART. NO.]
[NO.]
Displays a checkmark when a target partition is selected
List of selected folder numbers (only displayed when multiple folders are selected)
Folder number
[DATE]
Folder creation date
[TIME]
Folder creation time
[FOLDER]
Folder name (creation date and time are not displayed in the root folder)
[SIZE]
Total capacity of the storage device
[FREE CAP.]
Remaining storage device capacity
@@NOTE
tt You can change the thumbnail screen display if necessary.
tt The 1001st clips onwards are not displayed.
Displaying clip information
You can display metadata of clips saved in a storage device. The procedure to display is the same as that of the P2 card clip properties.
1In the storage device thumbnail screen, move the cursor to the target clip.
2Select [CLIP PROPERTY] in the main menu → [CLIP] → [PROPERTY] and press the control stick.
This cannot be modified.
Deleting clips
You can delete unnecessary clips saved in a storage device.
1In the storage device thumbnail screen, select the clip you want to delete.
2Select [DELETE] in the main menu → [CLIP] and press the control stick.
3Move the cursor to [YES] in the confirmation message and press the control stick.
@@NOTE
tt You may not be able to delete clips with defective clip or unknown clip indicators.
– 159 –
Chapter 8 Connecting to External Devices — Connection function via <USB2.0 DEVICE> or <USB3.0 HOST> terminal
Writing back to the P2 card from a storage device (import)
Importing from a [TYPE S] storage device or [P2STORE] by partition
You can import (write back to a P2 card from as storage device) to a P2 card with the same part number as the source card by partition (card).
1Insert a P2 card that will serve as the input destination.
Make sure to insert a formatted P2 card.
2Connecting a storage device.
3Select [STORAGE] in the main menu → [CLIP] → [EXPLORE] to display the explorer screen.
4In the explorer screen, display the partition thumbnails to be imported.
5Select [IMPORT] in the main menu → [CLIP].
6Place the cursor on the P2 card slot number of the import destination and press the control stick.
Start importing by selecting [YES] in the confirmation message.
[COPY COMPLETED!] will be displayed when importing is completed.
@@NOTE
tt Importing to a P2 card that is different from the source P2 card may result in incomplete clips depending on the clips. In this case, use the
reconnection function to reconfigure the clips. For details, refer to “Reconnecting incomplete clips” (page 106).
tt You can select whether to perform verification at the time of copying in the main menu → [CLIP] → [STORAGE COPY SETUP] → [VERIFY].
tt You cannot import by partition to a P2 card of a different model. Perform copying by clip instead.
Copying to a P2 card by clip
You can specify a storage device clip and copy it to a P2 card.
1Open the storage device thumbnail screen.
2Select the clip you want to copy.
3In the main menu → [CLIP] → [COPY] → [STORAGE] list, move the cursor over the copy destination and press the control stick.
Start importing by selecting [YES] in the confirmation message.
[COPY COMPLETED!] will be displayed when copying is completed.
– 160 –
Chapter 9
Network Connection
This chapter describes how to use the camera by connecting to network.
Chapter 9 Network Connection — Network connection
Network connection
The camera can be connected to the network via wireless LAN or wired LAN.
To use wireless LAN, attach AJ‑WM30 (optional) to the <USB2.0 HOST> terminal.
To use wired LAN, connect a LAN cable to the <LAN> terminal on the rear side.
IEEE802.11g/n
100BASE-TX/10BASE-T
Available functions
When the camera is connected to network, the following functions are available.
ffChecking camera status
ffChecking thumbnail images
ffProxy playback
ffDownloading proxy file/clip management information
ffDisplaying/editing metadata
ffAdding/deleting metadata (shot mark/text memo)
ffCamera remote control (collective operations of recording control and time code/user bits)
ffSending/receiving clips from/to the camera (clip transfer via FTP client function)
Operating environment
The following operating environment is required to connect to network.
ffWindows
Microsoft Windows® 8.1 Professional 32/64 bit, Internet Explorer 11 (classic view)
ffMacintosh
Mac OS X v10.9.x (Mavericks)*, Safari 7
* Operation is guaranteed only when preinstalled or clean installed.
ffiPad/iPhone
iOS v7.x
Web browser
A Web browser is required to perform web control.
ffFor the latest information on the supported browsers, visit the following website:
http://pro-av.panasonic.net/
Media player
QuickTime is required for proxy video playback.
ffFor the latest information on the versions that are operation tested, visit the following website:
http://pro-av.panasonic.net/
Java run time
On computers, Java run time is used for the camera status display. Java is required to display the panel.
ffFor the latest information on the versions that are operation tested, visit the following website:
http://pro-av.panasonic.net/
– 162 –
Chapter 9 Network Connection — Preparing for connection
Preparing for connection
For wireless LAN
Connect the wireless module AJ‑WM30 (optional) to the camera. The grip belt can be removed.
<OPEN> button
<USB2.0 HOST> terminal
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
1Press the <OPEN> button and remove the cover by sliding it in the direction of the arrow. (Fig. 1)
2Connect the wireless module to the <USB2.0 HOST> terminal. (Fig. 2)
Insert it all the way.
3Slide the removed cover to close it.
@@NOTE
tt When removing the wireless module, pull it down straight.
Storing the wireless module
The removed wireless module can be stored in the grip belt.
Cautions when using wireless module
Read the operating manual of the wireless module thoroughly and understand it before using.
To prevent accidental operation, there are restrictions as follows:
ffSupported standard: IEEE802.11g/n
IEEE802.11a and IEEE802.11b cannot be used.
ffCommunication frequency: 2412 MHz to 2462 MHz (1ch, 6ch, 11ch)
12ch and higher cannot be used.
rr For use overseas
The following four types of products are available to comply with laws regarding radio wave of every region in the world. The products can be used only
in the country or region where they are supported.
ffAJ‑WM30MC
People’s Republic of China
ffAJ‑WM30P
United States of America, Canada, Mexico, Argentina, Peru, Taiwan
ffAJ‑WM30E
EU member nations, EFTA member nations, Australia, New Zealand, Russia, Ukraine, Saudi Arabia, UAE, Kuwait, Oman, Egypt, Republic of South
Africa, Korea, Philippines, Malaysia, Singapore
ffAJ‑WM30
Japan
@@NOTE
tt In France, using outdoors is prohibited.
– 163 –
Chapter 9 Network Connection — Preparing for connection
For wired LAN
Connect a LAN cable.
LAN cable (optional)
1Connect the LAN cable to the <LAN> terminal on the rear side.
– 164 –
Chapter 9 Network Connection — Network settings
Network settings
To use wireless LAN or wired LAN, configuration of each setting is required. Configure the settings according to the function to use. When the main
menu → [NETWORK SETUP] → [USB MODE SELECT] is set to [STORAGE], the network function cannot be used.
Wireless LAN settings
This section describes the settings to connect the camera to mobile devices (iPad/iPhone), computers, or wireless access point via wireless LAN.
[DIRECT] mode
Use the following procedures when accessing to the network function of the camera directly from a smartphone, tablet, or computer.
1Select [DIRECT] in the main menu → [NETWORK SETUP] → [WIRELESS PROPERTY] → [TYPE].
2Set each item in the main menu → [NETWORK SETUP] → [WIRELESS PROPERTY] as necessary.
[MAC ADDRESS]: MAC address of wireless LAN (cannot be changed)
[SSID]: Network name of the camera (SSID) (Factory setting: [AJ‑PX270])
[CHANNEL]: Channel to use (Factory setting: [AUTO])
[ENCRYPTION]: Encryption format to be used (Factory setting: [WPA2-AES])
[ENCRYPT KEY]: WPA2 encryption key (Factory setting: [01234567890123456789abcdef])
[DHCP]: Setting whether to use automatic acquisition via DHCP ([ENABLE]: Use automatic acquisition/[DISABLE]: Does not use automatic
acquisition) (Factory setting: [ENABLE]) (cannot be set)
[IP ADDRESS]: IP address of the camera (Factory setting: [192.168.0.1]).
[SUBNET MASK]: Subnet mask (Factory setting: [255.255.255.0])
[DEFAULT GATEWAY]: Default gateway (Factory setting: [192.168.0.254]) (cannot be set)
[PRIMARY DNS]: Primary DNS server setting (Factory setting: [0.0.0.0]) (cannot be set)
[SECONDARY DNS]: Secondary DNS server setting (Factory setting: [0.0.0.0]) (cannot be set)
[DHCP SERVER]: Setting whether to use DHCP SERVER function ([ENABLE]: Use DHCP SERVER function/[DISABLE]: Does not use DHCP
SERVER function) (Factory setting: [ENABLE])
3Select [WLAN] in the main menu → [NETWORK SETUP] → [NETWORK SEL].
If the setting is changed, the camera will restart as necessary.
4Select SSID from the list of the access points for mobile devices or computers and enter the password (encryption key).
Display the access point list screen in wireless setting and select [SSID] of the camera.
ffFactory setting: [AJ‑PX270]
When the password confirmation screen appears, enter the password (encryption key).
ffFactory setting: [01234567890123456789abcdef]
5Check the network connection.
When the setting is completed, confirm that network connection of mobile devices (iPad/iPhone) and computers is made properly.
Application (P2 Browser) which requires network can be used when network connect is made properly. However, if connected with [DIRECT], the
FTP client function cannot be used.
[INFRA] mode
Use the following procedures when connected to the wireless access point.
1Select [INFRA] in the main menu → [NETWORK SETUP] → [WIRELESS PROPERTY] → [TYPE].
2Set each item in the main menu → [NETWORK SETUP] → [WIRELESS PROPERTY] as necessary.
Set [SSID], [ENCRYPTION], and [ENCRYPT KEY] according to the wireless access point to be connected.
[MAC ADDRESS]: MAC address of wireless LAN (cannot be changed)
[SSID]: Network name of wireless access point (SSID) (Factory setting: [AJ‑PX270])
[CHANNEL]: Channel to be used (Factory setting: [AUTO]) (cannot be set)
[ENCRYPTION]: Encryption format to be used (Factory setting: [WPA2-AES])
[ENCRYPT KEY]: Encryption key of wireless access point (Factory setting: [01234567890123456789abcdef])
[DHCP]: Setting whether to use automatic acquisition via DHCP ([ENABLE]: Use automatic acquisition/[DISABLE]: Does not use automatic
acquisition) (Factory setting: [ENABLE])
[IP ADDRESS]: IP address of the camera (Factory setting: [192.168.0.1]).
[SUBNET MASK]: Subnet mask (Factory setting: [255.255.255.0])
[DEFAULT GATEWAY]: Default gateway (Factory setting: [192.168.0.254])
[PRIMARY DNS]: Primary DNS server setting (Factory setting: [0.0.0.0]) (When [DHCP] is set to [ENABLE] and can be acquired from the DNS
server, the DNS server value which is acquired externally is overwritten. When the value is [0.0.0.0], the server is not set.)
[SECONDARY DNS]: Secondary DNS server setting (Factory setting: [0.0.0.0]) (When [DHCP] is set to [ENABLE] and can be acquired from the
DNS server, the DNS server value which is acquired externally is overwritten. When the value is [0.0.0.0], the server is not set.)
[DHCP SERVER]: Setting whether to use the DHCP SERVER function ([ENABLE]: Use the DHCP SERVER function/[DISABLE]: Does not use the
DHCP SERVER function) (Factory setting: [ENABLE]) (cannot be set)
3Select [WLAN] in the main menu → [NETWORK SETUP] → [NETWORK SEL].
If the setting is changed, the camera will restart as necessary.
4Enter SSID and a password (encryption key) of the wireless access point for destination.
Enter SSID of the wireless access point for destination in [SSID] of the camera.
ffFactory setting: [AJ‑PX270]
– 165 –
Chapter 9 Network Connection — Network settings
Enter a password of the wireless access point for destination in [ENCRYPT KEY] of the of the camera.
ffFactory setting: [01234567890123456789abcdef]
5Check the network connection.
When the setting is completed, confirm that network connection between the camera and the wireless access point is made properly.
When network connection is made properly, the network status icon at the upper right of the thumbnail screen changes in yellow, and applications
(P2 Browser, FTP client function) which require network can be used.
@@NOTE
tt There are following restrictions while wireless LAN is set.
- Regardless of menu settings, signals are not output from the <GENLOCK IN/VIDEO OUT> terminal.
- The LCD monitor and viewfinder cannot be used together. The LCD monitor is not displayed while the viewfinder is used.
Starting application (P2 Browser) from web browser
After completing the network connection with your mobile device or computer, start the browser of the mobile device or computer, and then start the
application (P2 Browser).
Fig. 1
1Select [BROWSE] or [BROWSE (+CTRL)] in the main menu → [NETWORK SETUP] → [NETWORK FUNC] → [HTTP SERVER].
P2 browser function is enabled.
2Start the browser of your mobile device or computer (Safari, Internet Explorer).
3Enter the IP address set for the camera in the address entry field of the browser.
ffFactory setting: [192.168.0.1]
4If you use a computer, press the Enter key, and if you use iPad/iPhone, tap the GO button.
The web application (P2 Browser) starts up.
5Enter [USER NAME] and [PASSWORD] on the entry screen.
Enter [USER ACCOUNT] (Factory setting: [guest]) and [PASSWORD] (Factory setting: [p2guest]) that have been set for the camera.
When a screen like (Fig. 1) appears (for iPad), the connection has been established.
User account name and password can be set in the main menu → [NETWORK SETUP] → [NETWORK FUNC] → [USER ACCOUNT].
Accounts can be created or deleted, and the passwords can be changed in the main menu → [NETWORK SETUP] → [NETWORK FUNC] →
[ACCOUNT LIST].
For details on P2 Browser, refer to the following website.
http://pro-av.panasonic.net/
Wired LAN settings
The settings to connect to computers using the wired LAN are as follows.
1Set each item in the main menu → [NETWORK SETUP] → [LAN PROPERTY] as necessary.
[DHCP] and [DHCP SERVER] are mutually exclusive.
[MAC ADDRESS]: MAC address of wired LAN (cannot be changed)
[DHCP]: Setting whether to use automatic acquisition via DHCP ([ENABLE]: Use automatic acquisition/[DISABLE]: Does not use automatic
acquisition (Factory setting: [ENABLE])
[IP ADDRESS]: IP address (Factory setting: [192.168.0.1])
[SUBNET MASK]: Subnet mask (Factory setting: [255.255.255.0])
[DEFAULT GATEWAY]: Default gateway (Factory setting: [192.168.0.254])
[PRIMARY DNS]: Primary DNS server setting (Factory setting: [0.0.0.0])
[SECONDARY DNS]: Secondary DNS server setting (Factory setting: [0.0.0.0])
[DHCP SERVER]: Setting whether to use the DHCP SERVER function ([ENABLE]: Uses the DHCP SERVER function/[DISABLE]: Does not use
the DHCP SERVER function) (Factory setting: [DISABLE])
2Select [LAN] in the main menu → [NETWORK SETUP] → [NETWORK SEL].
– 166 –
Chapter 9 Network Connection — Network settings
3Configure the settings of wired LAN of your computer.
(For Windows)
Display [Properties] in [Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)] and configure the settings. For details on how to display the screen, refer to [Start] →
[Help and Support].
ffWhen [DHCP SERVER] is set to [ENABLE] on the camera
Select [Obtain an IP address automatically] and [Obtain DNS server address automatically] in the [General] tab. Select [Automatic private IP
address] in the [Alternate Configuration] tab.
ffWhen [DHCP] is set to [DISABLE] on the camera
Select [Use the following IP address] in the [General] tab.
- [IP address]: Enter the same address as that of the camera.
- [Subnet mask]: Enter the same value as that of the camera.
- [Default gateway]: Enter the same address as that of the camera.
- [Preferred DNS server]/[Alternate DNS server]: Not necessarily to be entered.
(For Mac OS)
ffWhen [DHCP SERVER] is set to [ENABLE] on the camera
[Configure IPv4]: Select [Using DHCP].
[Configure IPv6]: Select [Automatically].
ffWhen [DHCP SERVER] is set to [DISABLE] on the camera
[Configure IPv4]: Select [Manually] and enter the following items.
- [IP Address]
- [Subnet Mask]
- Entering [Router] is not required. Leave it blank.
[Configure IPv6]: Select [Automatically].
Starting application (P2 Browser) from web browser
After completing the network connection with your mobile device or computer, start the browser of the mobile device or computer, and then start the
application (P2 Browser).
Fig. 1
1Select [BROWSE] or [BROWSE (+CTRL)] in the main menu → [NETWORK SETUP] → [NETWORK FUNC] → [HTTP SERVER].
P2 browser function is enabled.
2Start the browser of your mobile device or computer (Safari, Internet Explorer).
3Enter the IP address set for the camera in the address entry field of the browser.
ffFactory setting: [192.168.0.1]
4Press the Enter key.
The web application (P2 Browser) starts up.
5Enter[USER NAME] and [PASSWORD] on the entry screen.
Enter [USER ACCOUNT] (Factory setting: [guest]) and [PASSWORD] (Factory setting: [p2guest]) that have been set for the camera.
When a screen like (Fig. 1) appears, the connection has been established.
User account name and password can be set in the main menu → [NETWORK SETUP] → [NETWORK FUNC] → [USER ACCOUNT].
Accounts can be created or deleted, and the passwords can be changed in the main menu → [NETWORK SETUP] → [NETWORK FUNC] →
[ACCOUNT LIST].
For details on P2 Browser, refer to the following website.
http://pro-av.panasonic.net/
@@NOTE
tt When [NETWORK SEL] is [WLAN] or [LAN], the startup time after turning on the power may be longer due to starting of the network.
tt When [NETWORK SEL] is [OFF], network functions cannot be used.
tt When you change the settings of [NETWORK SEL], the changes will not be reflected until the camera is restarted. After the settings have been
changed, the setting screen termination may take time due to the restart of the network service.
– 167 –
Chapter 9 Network Connection — Network settings
tt All of the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway must be correctly set.
If a warning [CANNOT ACCESS GATEWAY!] appears at the termination of the setting screen, contact the administrator of the network you use.
tt If you do not use default gateway and DNS, set them to [0.0.0.0].
tt DHCP and DNS may not function properly depending on the network environment.
P2 browser function settings and connection status check
P2 browser function settings
1Configure the settings in the main menu → [NETWORK SETUP] → [NETWORK FUNC] → [HTTP SERVER].
[BROWSE]: Enables the P2 browser function.
[BROWSE (+CTRL)]: Enables the HTTP server function, starting and stopping recording at the terminal side, and preset control of time code or user
bits.
[DISABLE]: Disables the HTTP server function.
Network operation status display (mode check function)
Push the <DISP/MODE CHK> switch on the camera towards the <CHK> side twice to check the network operation status in the mode check
[FUNCTION] screen.
For details, refer to “[FUNCTION] screen” (page 147).
FTP client function setting
By connecting the camera to network using wireless LAN (wireless access point connection) or wired LAN, you can transfer clips to a server device on
the network.
Client settings
To transfer clips with the FTP client function, you need to set the connection destination and other settings in advance.
1Set each item in the main menu → [NETWORK SETUP] → [CLIENT SERVICE].
[FTP SERVER URL]: Sets the name or address of the server to connect to. (Up to 500 characters)
[LOGIN USER]: Sets the user ID to connect to. (Up to 31 characters)
[LOGIN PASSWORD]: Sets the password to connect to. (Up to 15 characters) The set password cannot be displayed on the unit.
[SSH]: Sets when transferring files using SSH.
ff[ENABLE]: Uses SSH.
ff[DISABLE]: Does not use SSH.
@@NOTE
tt The FTP client function does not function when [WLAN] is set in the main menu → [NETWORK SETUP] → [NETWORK SEL], and [DIRECT] is set in
the main menu → [NETWORK SETUP] → [WIRELESS PROPERTY] → [TYPE].
Operation check tools, status indication, and initialization
You can check FTP client network connection status as follows.
rr Checking connection (PING)
1Press the <THUMBNAIL> button.
The thumbnail screen is displayed.
2Select [PING] in the main menu → [NETWORK SETUP] → [NETWORK TOOL].
3Press the control stick.
4Perform status check of the connection with the address that has been set.
When a connection is confirmed, [PING SUCCESSFUL!] appears.
If a connection cannot be established within approximately 30 seconds, [PING FAILED!] appears. The log may indicate the cause of a failure.
rr Displaying the connection log (LOG)
1Select [LOG DISPLAY] in the main menu → [NETWORK SETUP] → [NETWORK TOOL].
2Press the control stick.
The log appears.
3After checking the log, press the <EXIT> button.
The setting menu screen returns.
@@NOTE
tt Some operations may not generate any information in the log.
tt The password is indicated as [*] in the log.
rr Displaying the status
1Select [STATUS DISPLAY] in the main menu → [NETWORK SETUP] → [NETWORK TOOL].
– 168 –
Chapter 9 Network Connection — Network settings
2Press the control stick.
The connection status is displayed.
3After checking the log, press the <EXIT> button.
The setting menu screen returns.
@@NOTE
tt The status information is not updated in real-time. To view the most recent data, perform the procedure again.
tt If [ENABLE] is set in the main menu → [NETWORK SETUP] → [LAN PROPERTY] → [DHCP]/[DHCP SERVER] or in the main menu → [NETWORK
SETUP] → [WIRELESS PROPERTY] → [DHCP SERVER], IP address and other necessary information are assigned automatically.
tt While the address information is being obtained from the setting in the main menu → [NETWORK SETUP] → [LAN PROPERTY] → [DHCP]/[DHCP
SERVER] or in the main menu → [NETWORK SETUP] → [WIRELESS PROPERTY] → [DHCP SERVER], the status information is not displayed
correctly.
tt The default gateway is displayed as status information only when correctly set up.
tt If only [SECONDARY DNS] is set without setting [PRIMARY DNS] for the network setting (wireless LAN, wired LAN), [DNS1] is displayed.
rr Initializing network settings
1Select [INITIALIZE] in the main menu → [NETWORK SETUP] → [NETWORK TOOL].
2Press the control stick.
When initialization completes, the setting menu screen returns.
– 169 –
Chapter 9 Network Connection — Using FTP client function
Using FTP client function
To use the FTP client function, network configuration (wireless LAN, wired LAN) and FTP client settings are necessary in advance.
FTP server folder list (FTP explorer screen)
The information and subfolder list of folders in the FTP server can be displayed. You can also display the thumbnail list of a desired CONTENTS folder
(folder storing clips of P2 card).
1Press the <THUMBNAIL> button.
The thumbnail screen is displayed.
2Select [FTP] in the main menu → [CLIP] → [EXPLORE].
3Press the control stick.
The FTP explorer screen appears.
FTP explorer screen
1
3
4
2
1 Status indication
Indicates that the screen is the FTP explorer screen.
2 FTP server information
[URL]: The address of the connected FTP server
[USER ID]: ID of the user who has logged in
[SSH]: [ENABLE]/[DISABLE] indication of [SSH]
3 Media status
Indicates the P2 card insertion status, hard disk connection status, type, and network connection status.
When [LAN] is set in the main menu → [NETWORK SEL], the color of the network status indicator shows the following status.
ffGray: When [OFF] is set in the main menu → [NETWORK SETUP] → [NETWORK SEL]
ffWhite: When [WLAN] or [LAN] is set in the main menu → [NETWORK SETUP] → [NETWORK SEL]
ffYellow: When the LAN cable is inserted and being linked
ffRed: When there is an error in the camera (Malfunction may have occurred. Consult your dealer.)
When [WLAN] is set in the main menu → [NETWORK SEL], the color of the network status indicator shows the following status.
ffGray: When wireless module is not connected or not recognized
ffWhite: When wireless module is connected and working, but not connected to other devices
ffYellow: When connected to other devices
@@NOTE
tt The display of the network status indicator is updated a few seconds behind the actual state.
4 Folder information
[PATH]: The path of the current folder on the FTP server
[NO.]: Folder number
[FOLDER NAME]: Folder name
[DATE]: Date of last update
[TIME]: Time of last update
@@NOTE
tt The folder list displays only folders, and does not display ordinary files or link files.
tt [ . ] indicates the current folder. No date and time information is displayed.
tt The date and time information displays either local time or world standard time, which depends on the information from the FTP server. In some cases,
only the year or time is displayed.
tt Whether text is case sensitive or not depends on the FTP server.
tt Folder names using multi-byte characters are not displayed correctly.
tt Up to 100 folders can be displayed in one folder. The 101st folder and subsequent folders cannot be accessed from the FTP explorer screen.
However, if you have directly entered the folder name in the main menu → [NETWORK SETUP] → [CLIENT SERVICE] → [FTP SERVER URL], you
can access the folder even when it is the 101st or later.
tt Connectivity and folder appearance may differ from those when connected to an FTP server with a computer, etc.
tt Depending on the FTP server and the connection environment, error messages may not be displayed correctly.
tt To discontinue the connection procedure, press the control stick.
tt If an error occurs, perform the operation again.
– 170 –
Chapter 9 Network Connection — Using FTP client function
tt An error may occur when a network operation is performed immediately after inserting a LAN cable or connecting via wireless LAN, or when an
operation is performed again immediately after cancelling the previous operation.
tt If connection error persists after several times of attempt, check the main menu → [NETWORK SETUP] → [NETWORK TOOL] → [PING]. Note that
connection to FTP may succeed even when [PING] fails. If connection cannot be established even after checking with PING, consult your system
administrator in charge of your network environment.
tt When [PING] fails, check the following items.
- Network configuration is correct
- LAN cable is correctly inserted
- Hubs and routers in the path operates normally
tt When connection is not established even after [PING] has succeeded, check the following items.
- Server function services of the FTP server are running
- There is not a firewall in the communication path
- User ID and password that permits access to the FTP server have been set
tt Some on-screen operations may not be possible for a while after the use of FTP client function has been cancelled.
Control stick operation on the FTP explorer screen
Pushing rightward: Contents of the subfolder at the cursor position are displayed.
Pushing leftward: Contents of higher-level folder to the current folder are displayed.
Pushing upward/downward: The cursor is moved.
Pushing upward/downward while holding down the <SHIFT> button: The cursor is moved to the top/bottom folder on the list.
@@NOTE
tt Depending on server operating specifications or access rights setting, folder contents or folder path may not be displayed correctly.
tt The cursor position of the previous folder is stored. If an error occurs, the cursor position will be reset to the top folder.
tt If a thumbnail has been displayed, only the cursor position in the previously displayed folder list will be stored.
FTP thumbnail screen
1
1 FTP server/folder information
[URL]: The address of the connected FTP server
[USER ID]: ID of the user who has logged in
[SSH]: [ENABLE]/[DISABLE] indication in the main menu → [NETWORK SETUP] → [CLIENT SERVICE] → [SSH]
[PATH]: Path in the FTP server of the folder where currently displayed thumbnails are contained
[DATE]: Date of last update
[TIME]: Time of last update
@@NOTE
tt Press the <EXIT> button to return to the explorer screen.
tt The 1001st clip and subsequent clips cannot be displayed.
tt The date and time information displays either local time or world standard time, which depends on the information from the FTP server.
tt Opening thumbnails using [ . ] will not display the date and time of the folder.
Deleting clips on the FTP server
Clips on the FTP server that are no longer necessary can be deleted in the same way as clips on P2 cards.
For details, refer to “Deleting clips” (page 105).
@@NOTE
tt If you leave the FTP thumbnail screen displayed, the FTP server may be disconnected after a while. After the server has been disconnected, clips
cannot be deleted. In this case, return to the FTP explorer screen, display the FTP thumbnail screen again, and then delete clips.
Viewing information of clips on FTP server
You can view metadata of clips on the FTP server.
The information and the procedure to display are the same as that of P2 card clip properties.
1Move the cursor to the target clip on the FTP thumbnail screen.
The detailed information of a clip can be displayed and checked on the screen.
2Select [CLIP PROPERTY] in the main menu → [CLIP] → [PROPERTY].
3Press the control stick.
– 171 –
Chapter 9 Network Connection — Using FTP client function
@@NOTE
tt Metadata can be viewed but cannot be edited.
tt If you leave the FTP thumbnail screen or clip properties displayed, the FTP server may be disconnected after a while. After the server has been
disconnected, thumbnails may not be able to be displayed. In this case, return to the FTP explorer screen and display the FTP thumbnail screen
again.
Transferring from a P2 card to an FTP server (copy)
Clips on P2 cards can be transferred to the FTP server.
1Press the <THUMBNAIL> button.
The thumbnail screen is displayed.
2Select a clip to be transferred.
3Select [FTP] in the main menu → [CLIP] → [COPY].
If you copy only proxy recording, select [FTP(PROXY)] in the main menu → [CLIP] → [COPY].
4Press the control stick.
The folders of FTP server are displayed.
5Select the transfer destination folder using the control stick.
6Move the cursor to [YES] and press the control stick.
Copying starts.
For the procedure to import by clips, refer to “Copying clips” (page 106).
When copying is completed, [COPY COMPLETED!] appears.
@@NOTE
tt Folder names using multi-byte characters are not displayed correctly.
tt Depending on the number of clips on the server and network conditions, it may take some time to display thumbnails or to copy them.
tt To cancel the copy process, use the control stick to place the cursor on [CANCEL] and press the control stick. Select [YES] when a [CANCEL]
confirmation message appears, and then press the control stick. If the network has not been disconnected, the partially copied clips at the copy
destination are deleted. If the network has been disconnected, incomplete clips may remain on the FTP server.
tt After copying starts, disconnection errors will no longer be detected. Cancel the copy operation if the copying progress has stalled.
tt Contact your FTP server administrator for the amount of free space on the FTP server in advance, as it cannot be checked automatically before
copying starts.
tt Whether an error is generated when the remaining capacity of the FTP server reaches 0 depends on the FTP server. If an error is not generated,
cancel the copy operation.
tt Clips cannot be copied to an FTP server destination folder that contains more than 1000 clips.
tt To transfer clips using SSH, the FTP server must support SSH.
tt Using SSH will reduce the transfer speed.
tt To check the transfer result on a computer or another device, refreshing the display on the computer or another device may be necessary.
Writing back from an FTP server to a P2 card (copy)
You can write back the selected clips from an FTP server on the network to a P2 card.
1Display the FTP thumbnail screen
2Select a clip to be copied.
3Select one from [SLOT 1]/[SLOT 2]/[SLOT 3] in the main menu → [CLIP] → [COPY].
4Press the control stick.
Copying starts.
When copying is completed, [COPY COMPLETED!] appears.
@@NOTE
tt Depending on the number of clips on the server and network conditions, it may take some time to display thumbnails or to copy them.
tt To cancel the copy process, use the control stick to place the cursor on [CANCEL] and press the control stick. Select [YES] when a [CANCEL]
confirmation message appears, and then press the control stick. Clips copied halfway to the copy destination are deleted.
tt After copying starts, disconnection errors will no longer be detected. Cancel the copy operation if the copying progress has stalled.
tt Clips cannot be copied to the copy destination P2 card folder that contains more than 1000 clips.
tt To transfer clips using SSH, the FTP server must support SSH.
tt Using SSH will reduce the transfer speed.
tt After an error occurred during an operation such as copying, the FTP server may be disconnected and the operation can no longer be continued. In
this case, return to the FTP explorer screen, display the FTP thumbnail screen again, and then restart the copying or another operation.
Transferring from an SD card to an FTP server (export)
You can collectively transfer the data in an SD memory card to the FTP server.
1Press the <THUMBNAIL> button.
The thumbnail screen is displayed.
2Select [SD CARD] in the main menu → [CLIP] → [EXPORT].
– 172 –
Chapter 9 Network Connection — Using FTP client function
3Press the control stick.
The folders of FTP server are displayed.
4Select the transfer destination folder using the control stick.
5Move the cursor to [YES] and press the control stick.
Exporting starts.
When exporting is completed, [COPY COMPLETED!] appears.
@@NOTE
tt You cannot select clips to be exported.
tt Folder names using multi-byte characters are not displayed correctly.
tt Depending on factors such as the number of files, file sizes, and network conditions, exporting may take time.
tt To cancel the export process, press the control stick. Select [YES] when a [CANCEL] confirmation message appears, and then press the control stick.
If the network has not been disconnected, the partially exported files remaining on the FTP server are deleted. If the network has been disconnected,
incomplete files may remain on the FTP server.
tt After exporting starts, disconnection errors will no longer be detected. Cancel the export operation if the copying progress has stalled.
tt Contact your FTP server administrator for the amount of free space on the FTP server in advance, as it cannot be checked automatically before
exporting starts.
tt Whether an error is generated when the remaining capacity of the FTP server reaches 0 depends on the FTP server. If an error is not generated,
cancel the export operation.
tt If existing folders are selected and a file that has the same path name as data in the SD memory card is included in the selected folders, the file is
overwritten. However, if the path names are the same but the types differ (folder and file), an error is generated.
tt To prevent unintended overwriting, create new folders to export data whenever possible.
tt To transfer clips using SSH, the FTP server must support SSH.
tt Using SSH will reduce the transfer speed.
Writing back from an FTP server to an SD memory card (import)
You can write back the selected folders from an FTP server on the network to an SD memory card.
1Display the FTP explorer screen.
The folders of the server that has been set are displayed.
2Select folders to be written back.
3Select [SD CARD] in the main menu → [CLIP] → [IMPORT].
4Press the control stick.
A confirmation message appears. Select [OK] to start writing back to the SD memory card.
When writing back is completed, [COPY COMPLETED!] appears.
@@NOTE
tt To cancel the writing back process, press the control stick. Select [YES] when a [CANCEL] confirmation message appears, and then press the control
stick. Files partially written back in the SD memory card are deleted, but successfully written files remain.
tt After writing starts, disconnection errors will no longer be detected. Cancel the import operation if the copying progress has stalled.
tt Depending on factors such as the number or sizes of files in the selected folder, and network conditions, writing back may take time.
tt Any files with the same path names as the one in the SD memory card will be overwritten. However, if the path names are the same but the types
differ (folder and file), an error is generated.
tt To prevent unintended overwriting, format the SD memory card before writing back whenever possible.
tt To transfer clips using SSH, the FTP server must support SSH.
tt Using SSH will reduce the transfer speed.
– 173 –
Chapter 10
Maintenance and Inspection
Inspect the various parts of the camera before shooting. Maintenance of the camera or frequently asked questions are also described in this chapter.
Chapter 10 Maintenance and Inspection — Maintenance
Maintenance
Charging the built-in battery
The camera uses the built-in battery to remember the date and time.
If
appears on the viewfinder or LCD monitor, the built-in battery is running out. Charge the built-in battery by the following procedure.
1Make sure that the power switch is <OFF>.
2Connect the AC adaptor to the camera.
For details on the connection of AC adaptor, refer to “Using the AC adaptor” (page 27).
3Leave the camera for approx. four hours.
The built-in battery will be charged.
After charging completes, set the date and time and check the time code.
If
is still displayed after charging, the built-in battery needs to be replaced. Consult your dealer.
– 175 –
Chapter 10 Maintenance and Inspection — Frequently asked questions
Frequently asked questions
Power supply
rr What is the range of voltage supported by the attached AC adaptor?
ffAC 100 V - 240 V
rr Can I use the AC adaptor with the battery attached?
ffYes, you can. When you connect the AC adaptor with the battery attached (and the power is turned on), the power supply source will be switched to
the AC adaptor.
Battery
rr Can I use the battery of a previous model that I have been using?
ffYou can use the battery of P2 hand-held camera recorder of previous models (CGA‑D54/CGA‑D54s).
ffUsing the genuine Panasonic battery is recommended.
Parts No.: VW‑VBD58 (7.2 V, 5800 mAh)
rr Can I use the attached battery with charge level indicator with a P2 camera recorder of previous model?
ffYou cannot use the attached battery with a device other than this camera.
Shooting
rr The focus is not adjusted automatically.
ffIs manual focus mode set? The focus will be adjusted automatically by setting auto focus mode.
ffDo you perform shooting in an environment where focus may not be adjusted properly in auto focus mode? In some environment, auto focus function
cannot adjust the focus correctly. In such cases, adjust the focus in manual focus mode.
Under following conditions, focus may not be adjusted properly:
-- Shooting subjects that is in long and short distances at the same time
-- Shooting a subject through a dirty glass
-- Shooting in a dark place
-- With a glittering object nearby
-- Shooting a fast-moving subject
-- Shooting a low contrast subject
rr Shooting cannot be performed even when the microP2 memory card or P2 memory card is inserted correctly.
ffRecording cannot be performed when the write protect switch on the P2 memory card is at the PROTECT position.
ffRecording cannot be performed when the write protect switch on the microP2 memory card is at the LOCK position.
ffIf the remaining free space of the P2 card is extremely small, save the contents to another medium and delete them, or insert a new card.
ffIf the P2 card is in a format that cannot be used, reformat the card on the camera.
ffIs it a 2 GB P2 memory card? If so, the media information display shows [E] and the card cannot be used.
ffDoes the number of clips exceed 1000? Clips over 1000 cannot be recorded in a single P2 card. Recording in the one-clip recording mode creates
combined clips with multiple clips included. Even when the thumbnail screen shows smaller number of clips, the actual number of clips may be 1000.
rr Loop recording cannot be performed.
ffLoop recording can only be performed on the microP2 memory card slot. Also, two cards with at least one minute of free space must be inserted.
Editing
rr Computer (Windows/Mac) cannot be connected via USB. (The computer does not recognize the camera.)
ffIs USB host mode set? USB host mode is a mode to connect a hard disk drive to the camera. Set [DEVICE] in the main menu → [NETWORK SETUP]
→ [USB MODE SELECT].
ffIs the USB driver installed? (Windows)
Download and install the latest USB driver. For Mac, installation of a USB driver for the camera is not necessary.
rr Clips imported to computer or external hard disk drive cannot be recognized on application such as P2 Viewer Plus.
ffCheck if the clips are correctly saved in the file structure of the P2 system (folders and data contained in the CONTENTS folder).
ffIf clips in the CONTENTS folder or subfolders are renamed or saved as divided data, the clips may not be able to played back.
Playback
rr Hot swap playback cannot be performed.
ffThis camera does not support hot swap playback.
rr Clip copying cannot be performed.
ffClips cannot be copied when they are continuously linked in one-clip recording mode. Press the REC button for two seconds and release the clip
linking.
– 176 –
Chapter 10 Maintenance and Inspection — Frequently asked questions
Others
rr SD memory card is not recognized.
ffIs the SD memory card is formatted properly? Format the card on the camera.
rr The camera clatters when tilted forward/backward.
ffWhen the power switch is <OFF>, the camera may clatter due to the camera part mechanism. This is not a malfunction.
rr A short click sound occurs when the power is turned on.
ffThis is an initial operation of the startup of the lens of the camera recorder. This is due to the camera recorder mechanism and is not a malfunction.
rr Which lens filter can be attached?
ffYou can attach filters with 72 mm diameter that are common for broadcasting or professional use.
rr Can I use the wired remote controls that I have used with the AG‑HPX170 series and AG‑HPX250 series?
ffYou can basically use them as the control method is the same on the AG‑HPX170 series and AG‑HPX250 series. If they do not work, contact the
manufacturer of the wired remote control.
– 177 –
Chapter 10 Maintenance and Inspection — Warning system
Warning system
If an error is detected immediately after the camera is turned on or during operation, the viewfinder, LCD monitor, and tally lamp indicate the error. Deal
with the error by following the indications.
Cases indicated by error codes
Error code
Display
Description
Behavior and cause
[E‑30]
[TURN POWER OFF]
[P2 CARD]
An error occurred in the camera built-in memory
because the P2 card being accessed was ejected.
ffTally lamp flashes four times per second.
ffCannot operate.
ffFollow the message to turn off the power once and
turn on the power again.
ffEnsure that there is no error in the clips on the ejected
card, and restore the clips as necessary.
[E‑31]
[TURN POWER OFF]
[SYSTEM MODE]
System mode error occurred.
ffTally lamp flashes four times per second.
ffCannot operate.
ffFollow the message to turn off the power once, turn
on the power again, and check that there is no error
display.
[E‑33]
[SYSTEM ERROR]
[CAMERA]
Camera unit error occurred.
ffTally lamp flashes four times per second.
ffThe operation stops.
ffContact your dealer.
[E‑35]
[SYSTEM ERROR]
[CODEC]
Codec control error occurred.
ffTally lamp flashes four times per second.
ffThe operation stops.
ffContact your dealer.
[E‑36]
[SYSTEM ERROR]
[P2 SYSTEM]
P2 system error occurred.
ffTally lamp flashes four times per second.
ffThe operation stops.
ffContact your dealer.
[E‑37]
[SYSTEM ERROR]
[P2CS]
P2CS microcomputer error occurred.
ffTally lamp flashes four times per second.
ffThe operation stops.
ffContact your dealer.
[E‑39]
[SYSTEM ERROR]
[INITIALIZE]
Video initialization error occurred.
ffTally lamp flashes four times per second.
ffThe operation stops.
ffContact your dealer.
[E‑64]
[SYSTEM ERROR]
[FRAME SIGNAL]
(or no display)
Reference signal error occurred.
ffTally lamp flashes four times per second.
ffThe operation stops.
ffContact your dealer.
Cases indicated by error messages
During recording/playback
Display
Description
Behavior and cause
[AUTH NG CARD] (slot number)
CPS authentication of microP2 memory card has failed.
The microP2 memory card whose CPS authentication
failed cannot be recorded or played back.
ffThe current operation will continue.
ffSelect [AUTHENTICATE] in the main menu → [CLIP],
and enter the password.
[BACKUP BATT EMPTY]
Displays any reduced voltage detected on the backup
battery in the internal clock when the power is turned
on.
ffThe current operation will continue.
ffCharge the built-in battery.
[CARD ERROR] (slot number)
Displayed when an data error caused by the P2 card
occurs during recording.
Displayed after recording stops until the next operation.
Also displayed for three seconds during playback when
a P2 card error causes playback to stop.
ffIf the error occurs during recording, the tally lamp
flashes four times per second for approx. three
seconds after recording stops.
ffThe tally lamp does not flash when an error occurs
during playback.
ffThe operation will stop.
ffAfter it stops, the P2 card on which the error occurred
is write-protected. Replace the P2 card of the slot
where the error occurred.
[DIR NG CARD] (slot number)
The directory position is not correct.
ffThe current operation will continue.
ffMake a card backup immediately and format the card
to use it again.
[FAN STOPPED]
Displayed when the fan motor stops.
ffThe current operation will continue.
ffIf the fan has stopped with error, stop using the
camera immediately and consult your dealer.
ffIf the fan has stopped, temperature of the camera
will rise. Therefore, do not use the camera for a long
period of time.
[HIGH TEMPERATURE]
ffThe current operation will continue.
The temperature inside the camera is higher than that of ffTurn off the power of the camera, turn it on again,
the normal conditions.
and check recording and playback operations. If the
problem persists, consult your dealer.
[PB INTERMITTENT] (slot number)
Playback is interrupted on the SDHC/SDXC memory
card. A card whose playback performance cannot be
assured is inserted.
ffThe current operation will continue.
ffUse of microP2 or P2 memory card is recommended.
An error occurred in the internal proxy module.
ffThe current operation will continue.
ffTurn off the camera and turn on it again to check the
recording and playback. If the error continues to occur,
please consult your dealer.
[PROXY ERROR]
– 178 –
Chapter 10 Maintenance and Inspection — Warning system
Display
Description
Behavior and cause
ffThe current operation will continue.
ffTurn off the camera and turn on it again to check the
recording and playback. If the error continues to occur,
please consult your dealer.
[PROXY REC WARNING]
A proxy data recording error occurred.
[REC IMPOSSIBLE] (slot number)
An SDHC/SDXC memory card is inserted into the
ffThe current operation will continue.
microP2 memory card slot.
ffRecord to microP2 or P2 memory cards.
Recording to the SDHC/SDXC memory card is disabled.
[REC WARNING]
[FRAME SIGNAL]
Displayed when a video or audio error occurs during
recording.
ffTally lamp flashes four times per second during
continuous recording.
ffThe current operation will continue. When input
signals are disrupted, recording continues while
disrupted images are recorded. Check the signal to be
input to the camera.
ffTurn off the power and on before using it again.
[REC WARNING]
[OVER MAX# CLIPS]
Displayed when attempting to record in excess of the
maximum total number of clips allowed for one P2 card.
ffTally lamp flashes four times per second during
continuous recording.
ffThe operation will stop.
ffReplace the P2 card or delete unnecessary clips.
[REC WARNING]
[PULL DOWN]
(Occurs during recording)
The video pull-down sequence and time code values
are not synchronized.
ffTally lamp flashes four times per second during
continuous recording.
ffThe current operation will continue.
ffCheck the signal.
[REC WARNING]
[PULL DOWN ERROR]
(Occurs at times other than during recording)
The video pull-down sequence and time code values
are not synchronized.
ffThe current operation will continue.
ffCheck the signal.
[REC WARNING]
[REC DATA]
Displayed when an error occurs in recorded data during
recording.
ffTally lamp flashes four times per second during
continuous recording.
ffThe operation will continue or stop.
ffTurn off the power and on before using it again.
[RUN DOWN CARD] (slot number)
The maximum number of overwrites has been
exceeded.
ffThe current operation will continue.
ffReplacement of the P2 card is recommended.
[SD CARD] (slot number)
An SDHC/SDXC memory card is inserted into the
microP2 memory card slot.
ffThe current operation will continue.
ffUse of microP2 or P2 memory card is recommended.
[SLOT3 CANNOT REC]
[microP2 SELECTED]
Displayed when the card is inserted into the slot which
is not selected as the recording slot.
ffThe operation will stop.
ffSet [P2] in the main menu → [RECORDING SETUP]
→ [REC MEDIA].
[SLOT3/4 CANNOT REC]
[P2 SELECTED]
Displayed when the card is inserted into the slot which
is not selected as the recording slot.
ffThe operation will stop.
ffSet [microP2] in the main menu → [RECORDING
SETUP] → [REC MEDIA].
[TEMPORARY PAUSE]
[IRREGULAR SIG]
Correct recording is not possible due to disruption of
input signals of the <GENLOCK IN/VIDEO OUT> or
<SDI IN> terminal, etc., and recording is suspended
temporarily. The clip will be divided.
ffTally lamp flashes four times per second during
continuous recording.
ffThe operation will pause.
ffRecording resumes when the signal returns to normal.
However, during loop recording, recording does not
resume.
[VFR ON, NO AUDIO RECORDING]
Native variable frame rate recording is performed. Audio
ffThe current operation will continue.
can not be recorded.
During thumbnail and menu operation
Display
Description
Behavior and cause
[AUTHENTICATION ERROR!]
Manual authentication failed.
Enter the correct password.
[CANNOT ACCESS!]
Data cannot be accessed due to a content defect or
some other reason.
Ensure the health of the media and the clips.
[CANNOT CHANGE!]
For a clip with the
mark, where a thumbnail cannot
be generated, the thumbnail cannot be modified in the
text memo position.
Correct the settings and content to enable display of the
thumbnail.
[CANNOT DELETE!]
The content versions do not match. Cannot delete.
Match the device and contents version.
[CANNOT FORMAT!]
A P2 card problem or some other reason prevents
formatting.
Check the P2 card.
[CANNOT RE-CONNECT!]
Clips cannot be remerged because either clips not
recorded across multiple P2 cards are selected or other
reasons.
Check the selected content.
[CANNOT REPAIR IN SELECTION!]
Some of the selected clips cannot be repaired.
Check the selected content.
[CANNOT REPAIR!]
Content that cannot be repaired is selected.
Check the selected content.
[CANNOT SAVE! FILE NAME IN USE]
A settings file of the same name exists on the SD
memory card.
Use another name to save the file.
[CARD FULL!]
The P2 card or SD memory card is full.
Insert a card with free space available.
[COPY IMPOSSIBLE. TOO LARGE CLIP
CONTAINED! (CLIP NAME: XXXXXX)]
Files exceeding 4 GB cannot be copied to P2 memory
card or microP2 memory card with 32 GB or smaller
capacity.
Copy to a microP2 memory card with 32 GB or larger
capacity.
[INVALID VALUE!]
The data value you entered is invalid.
Enter data within the normal range.
[LACK OF CAPACITY!]
There is not enough recording capacity left on the card.
Insert a card with sufficient recording capacity.
– 179 –
Chapter 10 Maintenance and Inspection — Warning system
Display
Description
Behavior and cause
[MISSING CLIP!]
Shot marks cannot be attached to the clips unless all
clips recorded over multiple P2 cards are present.
Insert all P2 cards over which recording extended.
[NO CARD!]
No P2 or SD memory card is inserted.
Insert the relevant media.
[NO COPY TO SAME CARD!]
A clip cannot be copied to the card storing the original
clip.
Copy the selected clip to a card that does not contain
the original clip.
[NO FILE!]
The specified file does not exist.
Check the file.
[NO INPUT!]
No data is entered.
Enter data and then set.
[NO SD CARD!]
No SD memory card.
Insert an SD memory card.
[NOT SELECTED!]
Attempted to delete without selecting clips.
Select clips to delete.
[SAME CLIP IS SELECTED!]
Multiple instances of the same clip (copies) cannot be
Multiple instances of the same clip (copies) are included
copied simultaneously. Remove instances of the same
in the clips selected.
clip from selected items.
[TOO MANY CLIPS!]
Too many clips are selected.
Reduce the number of selected clips.
[UNKNOWN CONTENTS FORMAT!]
This is a warning of the contents for the version that is
not supported by the camera.
Match the device and content versions.
The metadata character code is invalid.
The metadata character code is UTF-8. Enter valid
characters using a viewer.
There is a problem with data in the file.
Create the file again.
[USER CLIP NAME MODIFIED!]
When adding a counter value to the clip name,
characters must be deleted.
For the counter addition setting, the user clip name plus
the counter value can only contain up to 100 bytes.
Characters in the clip name are automatically deleted
when the total number of characters exceeds this limit.
[WRITE PROTECTED!]
The P2 card or SD memory card is write-protected.
Insert write-accessible media.
[UNKNOWN DATA!]
During soft keyboard operation
Display
Description
Behavior and cause
[AUTHENTICATION ERROR!]
Manual authentication failed.
Enter the correct password.
[CANNOT CHANGE!]
An attempt is made to enter the [PERSON] item (user
who enters the memo) when there is no text memo.
Enter the [TEXT] (text information) first.
[CANNOT SET!]
[INVALID VALUE!]
The entered value is invalid.
Change the input value.
[CANNOT SET!]
[NO INPUT!]
There is not input to the software keyboard.
Enter the password.
[CANNOT SET!]
[RETRY PASSWORD IS DIFFERENT!]
The re-entered password is different.
Enter the correct reference password.
During USB host mode
Message
Description
Measure
[CANNOT ACCESS CARD!]
An error occurred while accessing the P2 card.
[CANNOT ACCESS TARGET!]
An error occurred while accessing the connection target. Check the storage device status and connection.
[CANNOT COPY! FORMAT STORAGE
DEVICE TO FAT]
The partition that can copy clips does not exist on the
storage device.
Reformat in FAT format, or export the P2 card to create
a partition.
[CANNOT FORMAT!]
The storage device cannot be formatted.
Change the connected storage device.
[CANNOT RECOGNIZE STORAGE
DEVICE!]
The storage device is not correctly recognized.
Reboot the storage device or connect another storage
device.
[CANNOT SELECT! MAX.6 PARTITIONS]
Storage devices with more than six partitions cannot be
selected (mounted simultaneously).
Release selected partitions.
[CARD IS EMPTY! CANNOT COPY!]
The P2 card to copy is empty.
The copy operation is not performed because the card
is empty.
[FORMAT P2 CARD!]
Cannot import to a P2 card containing clips.
Format the P2 card.
[LACK OF CAPACITY!]
Not enough space left on the storage device.
Use a new storage device with sufficient available space
or a formatted storage device.
[MISMATCH COMPONENT!]
The P2 card model number of the copy source and copy Use the P2 cards of the same model number, or import
destination do not match. Cannot copy.
on a clip basis.
[STORAGE DEVICE DISCONNECTED!]
Reconnect the USB cable to the <USB3.0 HOST>
The connection with the storage device is disconnected. terminal. When it does not function normally after that,
turn off the power once and turn on the power again.
[TOO MANY PARTITIONS!]
There are too many partitions.
The maximum number of partitions on the storage
device is 23. Either reformat, or use a new storage
device.
[UNKNOWN DEVICE CONNECTED!]
A non-compatible DVD drive or other device is
connected.
Change the connected device to the correct storage
device, and then turn off the power once and turn on it
again.
[VERIFICATION FAILED!]
The compare check performed after copying failed.
Copy it again.
– 180 –
Check the P2 card.
Chapter 10 Maintenance and Inspection — Warning system
Network
Message
Description
Measure
Check that the LAN settings are correct. Check that the
LAN cable is connected correctly and the network you
use is running.
[CANNOT CONNECT!]
A connection to the network cannot be established.
[CANNOT FIND FTPSERVER!]
Check that the setting in the main menu → [NETWORK
The connection destination FTP server cannot be found. SETUP] → [CLIENT SERVICE] → [FTP SERVER URL]
is correct.
[LOGIN FAILED!]
Logging in to the connection destination FTP server
failed.
Check that the settings in the main menu →
[NETWORK SETUP] → [CLIENT SERVICE] → [LOGIN
USER] and [LOGIN PASSWORD] are correct.
[PING FAILED!]
The [PING] failed.
Check that the LAN setting and the setting in the main
menu → [NETWORK SETUP] → [CLIENT SERVICE]
→ [FTP SERVER URL] are correct. Check that the LAN
cable is connected correctly and the network you use
is running.
[CANNOT ACCESS GATEWAY!]
The gateway server cannot be accessed.
Check that the LAN settings are correct.
[CHECK LAN SETTING]
The gateway server cannot be accessed.
Check that the LAN settings are correct.
[IP ADDRESS IS USED!]
The set IP address is being used by another device.
Consult your network administrator and set another IP
address.
[INVALID VALUE!]
The entered data value is invalid.
Enter data in a valid range.
– 181 –
Chapter 10 Maintenance and Inspection — Updating the camera firmware
Updating the camera firmware
There are two ways to update the firmware:
1 Use the dedicated tool P2_Status_Logger to check and apply the update.
Only customers registered as members to PASS (P2 Asset Support System) can log in to PASS to use the dedicated (P2_Status_Logger) tool.
With P2_Status_Logger, you can check the version information of the device used and jump to the page to download the required firmware.
For details about downloading and using P2_Status_Logger, refer to the pages displayed after logging in to PASS.
Other benefits are offered to registered users. For details, refer to the website (http://panasonic.biz/sav/pass_e) of PASS (P2 Asset Support System).
2 Check the version using the camera and apply the update
Check the version of the camera in the main menu → [DIAGNOSTIC] → [VERSION], access the latest information on the firmware from the website
described in NOTE, and then download the firmware as needed.
@@NOTE
tt Update completes by loading the downloaded files to the camera via the SD memory card. For details on update, visit the support desk at the following
website:
http://pro-av.panasonic.net/
tt On the camera, use SD memory cards that are compliant with the SD standard, the SDHC standard, or the SDXC standard.
Always use the camera or P2 Viewer Plus to format the SD memory card.
– 182 –
Chapter 10 Maintenance and Inspection — Cleaning and storing
Cleaning and storing
Cleaning the camera recorder
ffEither remove the battery or disconnect the AC cable from the power outlet before cleaning.
ffDo not use benzine or thinner to clean the camera. Using benzine or thinner may cause deformation or peeling off of the paint of the camera recorder
body.
ffWipe the camera recorder with a soft and clean cloth. If there is heavy dirt attached, wipe the camera recorder using a cloth soaked in kitchen
detergent diluted with water, and then wipe it with a dry cloth.
Cautions when storing the camera recorder
Remove the battery when storing the camera recorder. Store them in a place where humidity is low and temperature is relatively constant.
ffRecommended temperature: 15°C to 25°C (59°F to 77°F)
ffRecommended relative humidity: 40% to 60%
rr Camera recorder
ffWrap the camera recorder with a soft cloth so that dust does not get into it.
rr Battery
ffThe battery life shortens where the temperature is extremely high or low.
ffStoring in a place where there is heavy oil smoke or dust may lead to malfunctions due to rust on terminal connectors, etc.
ffDo not let the battery terminal contact a metal object (such as a necklace or hairpin). Short circuit may occur between terminals and it may lead to heat
generation. Touching on a heated part may cause severe burns.
ffStore the battery with electrically discharged. If you store it for a long period of time, it is recommended that you charge it once a year, use the camera
recorder until the battery runs out, and then storing it again.
rr P2 memory card
ffIf you remove it from the camera recorder, be sure to attach the dedicated cap so that sand and dust do not adhere to the connector part. Also, put it in
the dedicated case when storing or carrying it.
ffDo not place it in a place where there is corrosive gas.
rr microP2 memory card, SD memory card
ffIf you remove it from the camera recorder, be sure to put it in its case.
ffDo not place it in a place where there is corrosive gas.
ffDo not place it in a place where temperature gets high, such as in a car or under direct sunlight.
ffDo not place it in a dusty place or where humidity is high.
– 183 –
Chapter 11
Specification
This chapter describes the specifications of this product.
Chapter 11 Specification — Specifications
Specifications
171 mm (6-23/32 inches)
191 mm (7-17/32 inches)
Dimensions
329 mm (12-15/16 inches)
176 mm (6-15/16 inches)
426 mm (16-25/32 inches)
Specifications
General
Power
DC 7.2 V (when the battery is used)
DC 12 V (when the AC adaptor is used)
Power consumption
19.5 W (when the LCD monitor is used)
indicates safety items.
Ambient operating temperature
0°C - 40°C (32°F - 104°F)
Ambient operating humidity
10% - 80% (no condensation)
Weight
Approx. 2.2 k] (4.9 lbs.) (body only, excluding lens hood, battery, and accessories)
Approx. 2.6 k] (5.7 lbs.) (including lens hood, supplied battery, and microphone holder)
Dimensions (W×H×D)
Body only
176 mm×171 mm×329 mm
(6-15/16 inches×6-23/32 inches×12-15/16 inches)
(excluding protrusion)
Camera unit
Pickup device
1/3-type 2.2 million pixels, MOS solid state image sensor ×3
Lens
Optical image stabilizer lens, optical 22x motorized zoom
F1.6 - F3.2 (f=3.9 mm - 86 mm)
35 mm conversion: 28 mm - 616 mm (16:9)
Filter diameter
72 mm
Color separation optical system
Prism system
ND filter
<OFF>, <1/4>, <1/16>, <1/64>
Shortest shooting distance (M.O.D)
1.1 m from the lens
Gain setting
<L>/<M>/<H> selector switch
−3 dB – 18 dB (in 1 dB steps)
(Negative value of gain is only in [HIGH SENS.] mode.)
(When assigning [S.GAIN] to the USER button: Switching between 24 dB, 30 dB, and 36 dB)
Color temperature setting
[ATW], [ATW LOCK], [Ach], [Bch], preset 3200 K/preset 5600 K/VAR (2000 K to 15000 K)
Shutter speed
When [SYSTEM MODE] = 59.94 Hz
ff60i/60p mode:
1/60 (shutter off), 1/100, 1/120, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000 sec.
ff30p mode:
1/30, 1/50 (shutter off), 1/60, 1/120, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000 sec.
ff24p mode:
1/24, 1/50 (shutter off), 1/60, 1/120, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000 sec.
When [SYSTEM MODE] = 50 Hz
ff50i/50p mode:
1/50 (shutter off), 1/60, 1/120, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000 sec.
ff25p mode:
1/25, 1/50 (shutter off), 1/60, 1/120, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000 sec.
– 185 –
Chapter 11 Specification — Specifications
Slow shutter speed
Setting is possible when [VFR]=[OFF]
When [SYSTEM MODE] = 59.94 Hz
ff60i/60p mode:
1/1, 1/2, 1/4, 1/6, 1/15, 1/30 sec.
ff30p mode:
1/1, 1/2, 1/4, 1/6, 1/15 sec.
ff24p mode:
1/1, 1/2, 1/4, 1/6, 1/12 sec.
When [SYSTEM MODE] = 50 Hz
ff50i/50p mode:
1/1, 1/2, 1/4, 1/6, 1/12, 1/25 sec.
ff25p mode:
1/1, 1/2, 1/4, 1/6, 1/12 sec.
Synchro scan shutter
When [SYSTEM MODE] = 59.94 Hz and [SYNC SCAN TYPE] = [sec]
ff60i/60p mode:
1/60.0 – 1/249.8 sec.
ff30p mode:
1/30.0 – 1/249.8 sec.
ff24p mode:
1/24.0 – 1/249.8 sec.
When [SYSTEM MODE] = 50 Hz and [SYNC SCAN TYPE] = [sec]
ff50i/50p mode:
1/50.0 – 1/250.0 sec.
ff25p mode:
1/25.0 – 1/250.0 sec.
Shutter open angle
3.0 deg – 180.0 deg – 360.0 deg (in 0.5 deg steps, angle display)
VFR recording frame rate
ff1080/59.94p:
1, 2, 4, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18, 20, 21, 22, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 30, 32, 34, 36, 40, 44, 48, 54, and 60 (frames per
second)
ff1080/50p:
1, 2, 4, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 30, 32, 34, 37, 42, 45, 48, and 50 (frames per
second)
Sensitivity
ff[HIGH SENS.] mode
F11 (2000 lx, 3200 K, 89.9% reflection, 1080/59.94i)
F12 (2000 lx, 3200 K, 89.9% reflection, 1080/50i)
Minimum subject illumination
0.02 lx (F1.6, gain 18 dB, [1S.EXP.], [HIGH SENS.] mode)
Digital zoom
x2/x5/x10
Lens hood
Hood with lens cover
Memory card recorder
Recording media
microP2 memory card, P2 memory card
Recording slot
microP2 memory card slot ×2, P2 memory card slot ×1
System format
1080/59.94p, 1080/59.94i, 720/59.94p, 480/59.94i
1080/50p, 1080/50i, 750/50p, 576/50i
Recording format
AVC‑Intra 100/AVC‑Intra 50
AVC‑LongG 50/AVC‑LongG 25/AVC‑LongG 12
Switching DVCPRO HD/DVCPRO50/DVCPRO/DV formats
Recording video signal
1080/59.94p, 1080/59.94i, 1080/29.97pN, 1080/23.98pN
720/59.94p
480/59.94i, 480/29.97p
1080/50p, 1080/50i, 1080/25pN
720/50p
576/50i, 576/25p
– 186 –
Chapter 11 Specification — Specifications
Recording and playback time
ffAVC‑Intra 100/DVCPRO HD
16 GB×1 approx. 16 min
32 GB×1 approx. 32 min
64 GB×1 approx. 64 min
ffAVC‑Intra 50/AVC‑LongG 50/DVCPRO50
16 GB×1 approx. 32 min
32 GB×1 approx. 64 min
64 GB×1 approx. 128 min
ffAVC‑LongG 25/DVCPRO/DV
16 GB×1 approx. 64 min
32 GB×1 approx. 128 min
64 GB×1 approx. 256 min
ffAVC‑LongG 12
16 GB×1 approx. 120 min
32 GB×1 approx. 240 min
64 GB×1 approx. 480 min
Figures are for continuous recording as one clip. Depending on the number of clips, the overall recording
time may be shorter than the above.
Digital video
Sampling frequency
ffAVC‑Intra 100/AVC‑Intra 50/AVC‑LongG 50/AVC‑LongG 25/AVC‑LongG 12/DVCPRO HD
Y: 74.1758 MHz, PB/PR: 37.0879 MHz (59.94 Hz)
Y: 74.2500 MHz, PB/PR: 37.1250 MHz (50 Hz)
ffDVCPRO50
Y: 13.5 MHz, PB/PR: 6.75 MHz
ffDVCPRO
Y: 13.5 MHz, PB/PR: 3.375 MHz
Quantizing
ffAVC‑Intra 100/AVC‑Intra 50/AVC‑LongG 50/AVC‑LongG 25:
10 bits
ffAVC‑LongG 12/DVCPRO HD/DVCPRO50/DVCPRO/DV:
8 bits
Video compression format
ffAVC‑Intra 100/AVC‑Intra 50:
MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 Intra Profile
ffAVC‑LongG 50/AVC‑LongG 25/AVC‑LongG 12:
MPEG-4 AVC/H.264
ffDVCPRO HD:
DV-Based Compression (SMPTE 370M)
ffDVCPRO50/DVCPRO:
DV-Based Compression (SMPTE 314M)
ffDV:
DV Compression (IEC 61834-2)
Digital audio
Recording audio signal
ffAVC‑Intra 100/ AVC‑Intra 50:
48 kHz/16 bits, 4CH and 48 kHz/24 bits, 4CH switch
ffAVC‑LongG 50/AVC‑LongG 25:
48 kHz/24 bits, 4CH
ffAVC‑LongG 12/DVCPRO HD/DVCPRO50:
48 kHz/16 bits, 4CH
ffDVCPRO/DV:
48 kHz/16 bits, 4CH
Headroom
12 dB/18 dB/20 dB switchable menu
AVC proxy
File format
MOV
Video compression format
H.264/AVC Baseline Profile
H.264/AVC High Profile
Audio compression format
AAC‑LC
Linear PCM
– 187 –
Chapter 11 Specification — Specifications
Approximate recording time (1 GB)
ffAVC-G6 2CH MOV:
Approx. 13 min
ffSHQ 2CH MOV:
Approx. 25 min
ffHQ 2CH MOV:
Approx. 78 min
ffLOW 2CH MOV:
Approx. 135 min
These are reference values for continuous recording using the Panasonic products.
The recording time may differ depending on the scene or the number of clips.
Video input/output
<SDI OUT> terminal
BNC×1
<VIDEO OUT> terminal
BNC×1
HD (3G/1.5G), SD: 0.8 V [p-p], 75 Ω
Also used as the <GENLOCK IN> terminal, <IN/OUT> switch selection
Composite: 1.0 V [p-p], 75 Ω
<HDMI OUT> terminal
HDMI×1 (HDMI type A terminal, not compatible with VIERA Link)
Audio input
Built-in microphone
Supports stereo microphone
<AUDIO INPUT 1>/<AUDIO INPUT 2> terminal
XLR×2, 3-pin
Input high impedance, <LINE>/<MIC> switch selection
ff<LINE>:
4/0 dBu (selectable menu)
ff<MIC>:
−40/−50/−60 dBu (selectable menu), <+48V> on/off (switch selection)
Audio output
<AUDIO OUT> terminal
3.5 mm diameter stereo mini jack ×1
Output level: 600 Ω, 316 mV
Headphones terminal
3.5 mm diameter stereo mini jack ×1
100 Ω, −16 dBV (32 Ω load, at maximum output level)
Speaker
20 mm diameter, round ×1
Other input/output
<CAM REMOTE> terminal
2.5 mm diameter super mini jack ×1 <ZOOM S/S>
3.5 mm diameter mini jack ×1 <FOCUS IRIS>
<GENLOCK IN> terminal
BNC×1, also used as the <VIDEO OUT> terminal, <IN/OUT> switch selection, 1.0 V [p-p], 75 Ω
<TC IN/OUT> terminal
BNC×1
Used as the input and output terminals, <IN/OUT> switch selection
ffInput: 1.0 V - 4.0 V [p-p], 10 kΩ
ffOutput: 2.0 V±0.5 V [p-p], low impedance
<LAN> terminal
100BASE‑TX/10BASE‑T
<USB2.0 DEVICE> terminal (device)
Type miniB connector, 4-pin
<USB3.0 HOST> terminal (host)
Type A connector, 9-pin
<USB2.0 HOST> terminal (sub-host)
Type A connector, 4-pin (exclusively for wireless module AJ‑WM30)
<DC IN 12V> terminal
DC 12 V (DC 10.5 V - 13.5 V), EIAJ type 4
Monitor
LCD monitor
3.5-type QHD color monitor
(Approx. 1560000 dots)
Viewfinder
0.5-type OLED (organic EL display)
(Approx. 2360000 dots, video display area: approx. 1770000 dots)
– 188 –
Chapter 11 Specification — Specifications
AC adaptor
Power source
AC 100 V - 240 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz
42 W
Power output
DC 12 V, 2.5 A
indicates safety items.
Ambient operating temperature
0°C - 40°C (32°F - 104°F)
Ambient operating humidity
10% - 80% (no condensation)
Weight
Approx. 210 ] (0.46 lbs.)
Dimensions (W×H×D)
115 mm×37 mm×57 mm (4-17/32 inches×1-15/32 inches×2-1/4 inches)
Battery charger
Power source
AC 100 V - 240 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz
0.4 A
Power output
DC 8.4 V, 1.2 A
indicates safety items.
Ambient operating temperature
0°C - 40°C (32°F - 104°F)
Ambient operating humidity
10% - 80% (no condensation)
Weight
Approx. 160 ] (0.35 lbs.)
Dimensions (W×H×D)
70 mm×44.5 mm×116 mm (2-3/4 inches×1-3/4 inches×4-9/16 inches)
– 189 –
Index
Index
A
Formatting
P2 card 108
AC adaptor
SD memory card 84, 109
Attaching 27
Storage device 154
Removal 28
Frame marker 72
Adjusting image quality 55
Front microphone 31
Area mode function 49
FTP client function 170
[AREA SELECT] 140
ATW 52
G
Audio input 63
Gain 47
[AUDIO SETUP] 131
Gamma function 57
Audio the recording level 64
Genlock 88
[AUTO SW] 127
GPS 65
Auto tracking white balance 52
Grip strap 29
[AWB PRE CONTROL] 140
B
H
Headphones 150
Backlight compensation 72
High color function 58
Battery
Hot swap recording 69
Attaching 27
Charging 26
I
Removing 27
Image size 72
Black balance 52
Image stabilization function 72
Black control function 57
Interval recording 66
Brightness adjustment 47
Iris 47
Built-in battery 175
Built-in microphone 63
K
Knee function 57
C
[CAM REMOTE ADJ.] 140
L
[CARD FUNCTIONS] 138
LCD monitor 40
Center marker 71
Displaying screen 142
Chroma setting function 56
Status display 142
Clip
Lens cover 30
Copying 106
Lens hood 29
Deleting 105
Level gauge function 50
Metadata 106
Loop recording 67
Playback 99
Low angle shooting 71
Properties 109
M
Reconnecting 106
Macro 47
Restoring 105
[MAINTENANCE] 138
[CLIP] 129
Manual focus 47
Clock 33
Matrix function 56
Color bars 72
Menu
Color correction function 57
Main menu 115
Counter 97
[OPTION MENU] 115
CPS 37
Setting menu 116
D
[USER MENU] 115
Date and time 33
Metadata 106
Deleting last clip function 73
microP2 memory card 34
Detail function 55
Inserting 34
[DIAGNOSTIC] 139
Removing 35
Direct menu operation 73
Write protect 35
[DISPLAY SETUP] 135
Microphone 31
Dual codec recording 79
Mirror shooting 40
Dynamic range stretcher function 38, 72
Mode check 147
Monitor 150
E
Electronic shutter 59
N
[ENG SECURITY] 140
ND filter 47
Error code 178
Network 162
Error message 178
Settings 165
Expanded display 48
Wired LAN 164
Eye cup 30
Wireless LAN 163
Eye sensor 41
[NETWORK SETUP] 134
F
O
FBC 60
One-clip recording 68
Flash band compensation 60
One-shot recording 67
Focus assist 48
[OTHER FUNCTIONS] 138
Focus bar display 48
[OUTPUT SEL] 132
Focus in red display 48
– 190 –
Index
P
152
Host mode User bits 92
P2 card 34
USER button 38
Formatting 108
User data 85
Recording time 36
[USER MENU SEL] 139
Status 35
[USER SW] 125
Status display 110
Write back 160
V
P2 memory card 34
Variable frame rate 61
Inserting 34
Viewfinder 41
Removing 35
Displaying screen 142
Write protect 35
Status display 142
Pre-recording 66
Properties 109
W
Proxy recording 79
Warning system 178
Waveform monitor function 73
R
White
balance 51
RB gain control function 56
White clip function 58
Recording check function 70
Recording format 78
Z
Recording functions 66
Zebra patterns 71
[RECORDING SETUP] 128
Zoom 54
Remote control 150
Zoom ring 54
S
Safety zone marker 71
Scan reverse shooting 71
[SCENE FILE] 119
Scene file data 85
SD memory card 19
Formatting 84, 109
Handling 83
Inserting 84
Operation 84
Removing 84
Status display 113
Setting data 83
Setting menu 116
Basic operations 116
Initializing 87, 117
Setting [USER MENU] 117
Shooting 44
Shot mark 70, 104
Shot mark recording 70
Shoulder strap 29
Shutter mode 59
Shutter speed 59
Simultaneous recording 69
Skin tone function 55
Specifications 185
Storage device
Exporting 155
Formatting 154
Importing 160
Information display 156
Super gain 47
[SW MODE] 126
[SYSTEM MODE] 124
T
Tally lamp 42
Text memo 104
Text memo recording 70
Thumbnail 100
Changing 103
Selecting 102
Setting 102
Time code 93
Time data 89
Time stamp function 72
Time zone 33
Tripod 31
TV 150
U
USB 152
Device mode 152
– 191 –
Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union
EU
These symbols are only valid in the European Union. If you wish to discard these items, please contact
your local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal.
Web Site: http://panasonic.net
© Panasonic Corporation 2014